Contents

Peterbilt Model 567 Operator's Manual v2 PDF

1 of 332
1 of 332

Summary of Content for Peterbilt Model 567 Operator's Manual v2 PDF

567M O

D E

L

Safety..................................... 1

Emergency..................................... 2

Controls..................................... 3

Driving..................................... 4

Maintenance..................................... 5

Information..................................... 6

Contents

2021 PACCAR Inc. - All Rights Reserved This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features or equipment which may be either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment which are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any illustrations or descriptions relating to features or equipment which are not on this vehicle. PACCAR reserves the right to discontinue, change specifications, or change the design of its vehicles at any time without notice and without incurring any obligation. The information contained in this manual is proprietary to PACCAR. Reproduction, in whole or in part, by any means is strictly prohibited without prior written authorization from PACCAR Inc.

Contents

Chapter 1 | SAFETY Using this Manual..................................................................................................................................6 Safety Alerts..........................................................................................................................................6 Illustrations............................................................................................................................................7 General Safety Instructions...................................................................................................................7 Data Recorder.....................................................................................................................................10 Environmental Protection Agency.......................................................................................................10 Repairs................................................................................................................................................ 11 Additional Sources of Information....................................................................................................... 12 Cab Access.........................................................................................................................................12 How to Access the Upper Bunk.......................................................................................................... 14 Deckplate Access................................................................................................................................19 How to open the hood.........................................................................................................................20 Seat.....................................................................................................................................................23 What to do before starting the vehicle.................................................................................................32 Vehicle Loading...................................................................................................................................34 Visual inspection while approaching the vehicle................................................................................. 34

SAFETY -

4 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

1

Daily Checks....................................................................................................................................... 35 Weekly Checks................................................................................................................................... 36 Systems Check................................................................................................................................... 37

SAFETY -

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 5

1

Using this Manual Please take the time to get acquainted with your vehicle by reading this Operators Manual. We recommend that you read and understand this manual from beginning to end before you operate this equipment. This manual contains useful information for the safe and efficient operation of this equipment. It also provides service information, with an outline for performing safety checks and basic preventive maintenance inspections. We have tried to present the information youll need to learn about functions, controls, and operation and to present it as clearly as possible. We hope youll find this manual easy to use. There will be times when you need to take this manual out of the glovebox. When you do, please be sure to return it when you are finished using it.

NOTE

After you've read this manual, it should be stored in the cab for convenient ref- erence and remain with this truck when sold.

Your vehicle may not have all the features or options mentioned in this manual. Therefore, you should pay careful attention to the instructions that pertain to just your vehicle. In addition, if your vehicle is equipped with special equipment or options not discussed in this manual, consult your dealer or the manufacturer of the equipment. There are several tools built into this manual to help you find what you need quickly and easily; first is the Quick Table of Contents. Located at the front of the manual, this table lists the main subjects covered and gives section numbers where you can find these subjects. Use the Quick Table of Contents to find information on a large subject and then use the detailed table of contents found on the first page of each chapter. Cross-referenced citations also help you get the information you need. If some other part of the manual contains further information on the subject you are reading about, well indicate that in a cross- reference like this: (See Safety Alerts on page 6). Finally, youll find a helpful Subject Index. Its in the back of the manual and alphabetically lists the subjects covered. All information contained in this manual is based on the latest production information

available at the time of publication. Peterbilt Motors Company reserves the right to make changes at any time without notice.

Safety Alerts Read and follow all of the safety alerts contained in this manual. They are there for your protection and information. These alerts can help you avoid injury to yourself, your passengers, and help prevent costly damage to the vehicle. Safety alerts are highlighted by safety alert symbols and signal words such as WARNING, CAUTION, or NOTE. DO NOT ignore any of these alerts.

Warnings

The safety message following this symbol and signal word provides a warning against operating procedures which could cause death or injury. They could also cause equipment or property damage. The alert will identify the hazard, how to avoid it, and

SAFETY - Using this Manual

6 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

1

the probable consequence of not avoiding the hazard. Example:

WARNING

Hot engine oil can be dangerous. You could be burned. Let the engine oil cool down before changing it. Failure to comply may result in death, person- al injury, equipment or property dam- age.

Cautions

The safety message following this symbol and signal word provides a caution against operating procedures which could cause equipment or property damage. The alert will identify the hazard, how to avoid it, and the probable consequence of not avoiding the hazard. Example:

CAUTION

Continuing to operate your vehicle with insufficient oil pressure will cause seri- ous engine damage. Failure to comply may result in equipment or property damage.

Notes

The message following this symbol and signal word provides important information that is not safety related but should be followed. The alert will highlight things that may not be obvious and is useful to your efficient operation of the vehicle. Example:

NOTE

Pumping the accelerator will not assist in starting the engine.

Illustrations Some of the illustrations throughout this manual are generic and will not look exactly like the engine or parts used in your application. The illustrations can contain symbols to indicate an action required and/or an acceptable or unacceptable condition. The illustrations are intended to show repair or replacement procedures. The procedure will be the same for all applications, although the illustrations may differ.

General Safety Instructions

WARNING

Improper practices, carelessness, or ignoring any warnings may cause property damage, personal injury, or death.

SAFETY - Illustrations

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 7

1

WARNING

Manually rotating the crankshaft re- quires a trained technician and specialty tools. DO NOT pull or pry on the fan in an attempt to rotate the crankshaft. Ap- plying force to the fan can damage the fan blades or cause premature fan fail- ure. Failure to comply with the approved procedure may result in property dam- age, personal injury, or death.

Before performing any repair, read and understand all of the safety precautions and warnings. The following is a list of general safety precautions that must be followed to provide personal safety. Failure to follow these instructions may cause death or injury. Special safety precautions are included in the procedures when they apply. Keep in mind that even a well maintained vehicle must be operated within the range of its mechanical capabilities and the limits of its load ratings. See the Weight Ratings label on the driver's door edge. Every new vehicle is designed to conform to all Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards applicable at the time of manufacture. Even with these safety

features, continued safe and reliable operation depends greatly upon regular vehicle maintenance. Follow the maintenance recommendations found in the Preventive Maintenance section. This will help preserve your investment. Make sure your vehicle is in top working condition before heading out on the road, it is the responsible driver's duty to do so. Inspect the vehicle according to the Driver's Check List.

Work areas should be dry, well lit, well ventilated, free from clutter, loose tools, parts, ignition sources and hazardous substances.

Wear protective glasses and protective shoes when working.

DO NOT wear loose-fitting or torn clothing. Tie back and/or tuck in long hair. Remove all jewelry when working.

Before beginning any repair, disconnect the battery (negative [-] cable) and discharge any capacitors.

Put a DO NOT OPERATE tag in the operator's compartment or on the controls.

Allow the engine to cool before slowly loosening the coolant fill cap

to relieve the pressure from the cooling system.

WARNING

Removing the fill cap on a hot engine can cause scalding coolant to spray out and burn you badly. If the engine has been in operation within the previ- ous 30 minutes, be very careful in re- moving the fill cap. Protect face, hands, and arms against escaping flu- id and steam by covering the cap with a large, thick rag. DO NOT try to re- move it until the surge tank cools down or if you see any steam or coolant es- caping. Always remove the cap very slowly and carefully. Be ready to back off if any steam or coolant begins to escape. Failure to comply may result in death, personal injury, equipment or property damage.

Always use wheel chocks or proper jack stands to support the vehicle or vehicle components before performing any service work. DO NOT work on anything that is supported only by lifting jacks or a hoist. Before resting a vehicle on jack stands, be sure the stands are

SAFETY - General Safety Instructions

8 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

1

rated for the load you will be placing on them.

Before removing or disconnecting any lines, fittings, or related items, relieve all pressure in the air, oil, fuel, and cooling systems. Remain alert for possible pressure when disconnecting any device from a system that contains pressure. High pressure oil or fuel can cause death or personal injury.

Always wear protective clothing when working on any refrigerant lines and make sure that the workplace is well ventilated. Inhalation of fumes can cause death or personal injury. To protect the environment, liquid refrigerant systems must be properly emptied and filled using equipment that prevents the release of refrigerant gas. Federal law requires capturing and recycling refrigerant.

When moving or lifting any heavy equipment or parts, make sure to use proper techniques and assistance. Ensure all lifting devices such as chains, hooks, or slings are in good condition and are of the correct load capacity.

Make sure all lifting devices are positioned correctly.

Corrosion inhibitors and lubricating oils may contain alkali. DO NOT get the substance in eyes and avoid prolonged or repeated contact with skin. DO NOT swallow. If ingested, seek immediate medical attention. DO NOT induce vomiting. In case of contact, immediately wash skin with soap and water. In case of harmful contact, immediately contact a physician. Always keep any chemicals OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN.

Naphtha and Methyl Ethyl Ketone (MEK) are flammable materials and must be used with caution. Follow the manufacturer's instructions to ensure safety when using these materials. Always keep any chemicals OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN.

When working on the vehicle, be alert for hot parts on systems that have just been turned off, exhaust gas flow, and hot fluids in lines, tubes, and compartments. Contact with any hot surface may cause burns.

Always use tools that are in good condition. Make sure you have the proper understanding of how to use the tools before performing any service work. Use only genuine replacement parts from PACCAR.

Always use the same fastener part number (or equivalent) when replacing items. DO NOT use a fastener of lesser quality if replacements are necessary. (e.g., DO NOT replace a SAE 10.9 grade with 8.8 grade fastener.)

Always torque fasteners and fuel connections to the required specifications. Overtightening or under-tightening can allow leakage.

Close the manual fuel valves prior to performing maintenance and repairs, and when storing the vehicle inside.

DO NOT perform any repair when impaired, tired, fatigued, or after consuming alcohol or drugs that can impair your functioning.

Some state and federal agencies in the United States of America have determined that used engine oil can be carcinogenic and can cause reproductive toxicity. Avoid

SAFETY - General Safety Instructions

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 9

1

inhalation of vapors, ingestion, and prolonged contact with used engine oil.

DO NOT connect the jump starting or battery charging cables to any ignition or governor control wiring. This can cause electrical damage to the ignition or governor.

Coolant is toxic. If not reused, dispose of coolant in accordance with local environmental regulations.

CAUTION

Corrosive chemicals can damage the engine. DO NOT use corrosive chemi- cals on the engine. Failure to comply may result in equipment or property damage.

California Proposition 65 Warning Diesel engine exhaust and some of

its constituents are known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects, and other reproductive harm.

The catalyst substrate located in the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)

contains vanadium pentoxide, which has been determined by the State of California to cause cancer. Always wear protective clothing and eye protection when handling the catalyst assembly. Dispose of the catalyst in accordance with local regulations. If catalyst material gets into the eyes, immediately flood eyes with water for a minimum of 15 minutes. Avoid prolonged contact with skin. In case of contact, immediately wash skin with soap and water. In case of harmful contact, immediately contact a physician.

Other chemicals in this vehicle are also known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects or other reproductive harm.

Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.

Data Recorder California Vehicle Code - Section 9951 - Disclosure of Recording Device Your vehicle may be equipped with one or more recording devices commonly referred to as "event data recorders" (EDR) or "sensing and diagnostic modules" (SDM). If you are involved in an accident, the device(s) may have the ability to record vehicle data that occurred just prior to and/or during the accident. For additional information on your rights associated with the use of this data, contact:

The California Department of Motor Vehicles - Licensing Operations Division

http://www.dmv.ca.gov/

Environmental Protection Agency Some of the ingredients in engine oil, hydraulic oil, transmission and axle oil, engine coolant, diesel fuel, air conditioning refrigerant (R12, R134a, and PAG oil), batteries, etc., may contaminate the

SAFETY - Data Recorder

10 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

1

environment if spilled or not disposed of properly.

WARNING

Diesel engine exhaust and some of its constituents are known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth de- fects, and other reproductive harm. Other chemicals in this vehicle are al- so known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects or other re- productive harm. This warning require- ment is mandated by California law (Proposition 65) and does not result from any change in the manner in which vehicles are manufactured.

Contact your local government agency for information concerning proper disposal.

Repairs

WARNING

DO NOT attempt repair work without sufficient training, service manuals, and the proper tools. You could be kil-

led or injured, or you could make your vehicle unsafe. Perform only those tasks you are fully qualified to do.

WARNING

Modifying your vehicle can make it un- safe. Some modifications can affect your vehicle's electrical system, stabili- ty, or other important functions. Before modifying your vehicle, check with your dealer to make sure it can be done safely. Improper modifications can cause death or personal injury.

CAUTION

The installation of electronic devices to the On Board Diagnostics (OBD) con- nector, the vehicle Controller Area Net- work (CAN), or their associated wiring is not permitted. Doing so can ad- versely affect vehicle performance and/or cause fault codes to be record- ed. The OBD connector is provided for temporary connection of service tools and for diagnostic purposes only.

Your dealers service center is the best place to have your vehicle repaired. You can find dealers all over the country with the equipment and trained personnel to get you back on the road quicklyand keep you there. Your vehicle is a complex machine. Anyone attempting repairs on it needs good mechanical training and the proper tools. However, all warranty repairs must be performed by an authorized service facility. If you arent an experienced mechanic, or dont have the right equipment, please leave all repairs to an authorized service facility. They are the ones best equipped to do the job safely and correctly.

Maintenance Manuals If you do decide to do any complex repair work, youll need the maintenance manuals. Order them from your authorized dealer. Please provide your Chassis Serial Number when you order, to be sure you get the correct manuals for your vehicle. Allow about four weeks for delivery. There will be a charge for these manuals.

SAFETY - Repairs

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 11

1

Final Chassis Bill of Material A complete, non-illustrated computer printout listing of the parts used to custom- build your vehicle is available through the dealer from whom you purchased your vehicle.

Additional Sources of Information Major component suppliers also supply operation manuals specific to their products. Additional manuals and other pieces of literature are included in the glove box literature package. Look for information on products such as the engine, driver's seat, transmission, axles, wheels, tires, ABS/ESC, radio, fifth wheel, lane departure, and adaptive cruise control. If you are missing these pieces of literature, ask your dealer for copies. Another place to learn more about trucking is from local truck driving schools. Contact one near you to learn about courses they offer. Federal and state agencies such as the department of licensing also have information. The Interstate Commerce Commission can give you information

about regulations governing transportation across state lines.

Cab Access

WARNING

Always reinstall steps before entering the cab or accessing the deck plate. Without steps you could slip and fall. Failure to comply may result in person- al injury or death.

WARNING

Keep steps clean. Clean any fuel, oil, or grease off the steps before entering the cab or accessing the deck plate. Stepping on a slippery surface can cause a fall which may result in death or personal injury.

Be careful whenever you get into or out of your vehicles cab. Always maintain at least three points of contact with your hands on the grab handles and your feet on the steps. The following picture shows

the best way to enter and exit a Conventional Cab.

WARNING

Jumping out of the cab or getting into the cab without proper care is danger- ous. You could slip and fall, which could lead to death or personal injury. Keep steps clean. Clean any fuel, oil, or grease off of the steps before enter- ing the cab. Use the steps and grab handles provided, and always keep at least three points of contact between your hands and feet and the truck. Look where you are going.

SAFETY - Additional Sources of Information

12 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

1

How to Lock and Unlock the Cab Doors The vehicle has one key for cab doors, ignition, and the optional sleeper luggage compartment. Frame-mounted tool box locks and locking fuel tank caps each have separate, individual keys.

WARNING

To help lessen the chance and/or se- verity of death or personal injury in case of an accident, always lock the doors while driving. Along with using the lap shoulder belts properly, locking the doors helps prevent doors from in- advertently opening and occupants from being ejected from the vehicle.

To lock or unlock the doors from outside the cab:

1. Rotate the key toward the rear of the vehicle to lock (clockwise), or

Rotate the key toward the front of the vehicle (counter clockwise) to unlock.

Remote Keyless Entry (Option) Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) is a system that adds security and convenience to your vehicle. The system will lock or unlock cab doors with the key fob. The system will alert you with parking lights when the selected doors are locked or unlocked. The system includes two key fobs that provide

secure rolling code technology that prevents someone from recording the entry signal.

NOTE

FCC ID: L2C0031T IC: 3432A-0031T FCC ID: L2C0032R IC: 3432A-0032R This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer- ence, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including in- terference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term IC: before the ra- dio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifi- cations were met.

Operate Door Locks using Remote Keyless Entry Open doors will not lock using the key fob. The key fob should be within 30 ft. (9 m) of

SAFETY - Cab Access

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 13

1

the vehicle and should not be in proximity of other RF sources such as television, radio or cell phone transmitters. To unlock the cab doors:

1. Press the UNLOCK button once. The driver's door will unlock and the parking lights will come on for 40 seconds.

2. Quickly press the UNLOCK button a second time within 5 seconds to unlock the passenger door.

3. Press the LOCK button. The doors will lock and the parking lights will come on for 2 seconds.

How to Access the Upper Bunk

Upper Bunk Ladder This vehicle may be equipped with an upper bunk ladder. The ladder enables you to conveniently climb into the upper bunk without stepping on the lower bunk. The ladder can be unfolded when needed. The ladder folds up into the upper bunk structure when not in use, while driving, or when accessing the lower bunk. The

ladder can be folded up into the upper bunk.

Ladder Folded and Latched

Ladder Partially Unfolded

Ladder Unfolded

How to Unfold the Upper Bunk Ladder It is important to follow all specified safety instructions when unfolding the upper bunk ladder.

SAFETY - How to Access the Upper Bunk

14 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

1

WARNING

DO NOT attempt to fold or unfold the ladder while an occupant is in the low- er bunk. Allow the lower bunk occu- pant to vacate the bunk before folding or unfolding the ladder. Failure to do so may result in personal injury.

CAUTION

Upper bunk must be in down position before folding and unfolding the lad- der. Always lower the upper bunk be- fore folding and unfolding the ladder. Failure to do so may result in property damage.

CAUTION

Lower bunk must be in down position before folding and unfolding the lad- der. Failure to do so may result in property damage.

CAUTION

Make sure floor area is clear prior to folding and unfolding the ladder. There should be nothing between the ladder leg and floor carpet when the ladder is unfolded. Failure to do so may result in property damage.

1. Ensure the lower bunk is in the down position.

2. Lower the upper bunk. 3. Locate the release latch on the

driver's side front edge of the upper bunk.

4. Release the ladder by pulling the latch out.

Unlatching the ladder

5. Position your left hand, open palm, beside the latch to control the unfolding action of the ladder as it separates from the bunk structure. Maintain contact with your left hand, open palm, in the same position until the ladder is completely unfolded.

6. When the ladder is about half way unfolded, position your right hand, open palm, on the upper right side of the ladder to help guide the ladder into position.

SAFETY - How to Access the Upper Bunk

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 15

1

WARNING

DO NOT grip the ladder while folding and unfolding it. Always use an open hand when folding and unfolding the ladder to prevent injuries and pinching of fingers. Failure to comply may result in personal injury.

Apply pressure in opposite directions to ensure smooth operation of the ladder.

Hand Positions to Unfold the Ladder

7. Make sure the ladder is completely unfolded against the internal stop.

The ladder should be vertical at this point.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to open the lower bunk when the ladder is unfolded and verti- cal. Failure to comply may result in property damage.

CAUTION

Never attempt to pull the bottom of the ladder forward when the ladder is in the down position. Failure to comply may result in property damage.

CAUTION

Never attempt to fold or force the lad- der toward the passenger side of the vehicle once the ladder has reached vertical position and is against the in- ternal stop inside the upper bunk. Do- ing so can cause damage to the lad- der.

SAFETY - How to Access the Upper Bunk

16 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

1

How to Climb In and Out of the Upper Bunk

WARNING

Make sure the ladder is fully open be- fore climbing up or down the ladder. The ladder should be against internal stops and vertical before using it. Fail- ure to do so may result in death or per- sonal injury.

WARNING

Never use the ladder while the vehicle is in motion. Always fold and stow the ladder before moving the vehicle. Fail- ure to comply may result in death or personal injury.

WARNING

Do not exceed the weight limit of 320 lb on the ladder. Failure to comply may result in personal injury or death.

WARNING

Never climb a damaged, bent, or bro- ken ladder. Doing so may result in per- sonal injury.

WARNING

Never allow multiple people on the lad- der at the same time. Only one person on the ladder at any time. Failure to comply may result in personal injury.

Make sure the ladder is in the unfolded position.

1. Face the ladder when climbing up or down.

Face the ladder

2. Maintain a firm grip when climbing up or down the ladder. Use the ladder and grab handles provided, and always keep at least three points of contact between your hands and feet and the truck. Always face toward the bunk when entering or exiting the upper bunk and look where you are going.

SAFETY - How to Access the Upper Bunk

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 17

1

3. As you get higher on the ladder, maintain contact with the sleeper upper grab handles as you get onto the upper bunk.

Upper Grab Handles

1

1. Upper Grab Handles

How to Fold the Upper Bunk Ladder

WARNING

DO NOT attempt to fold or unfold the ladder while an occupant is in the low- er bunk. Allow the lower bunk occu- pant to vacate the bunk before folding or unfolding the ladder. Failure to do so may result in personal injury.

CAUTION

Lower bunk must be in down position before folding and unfolding the lad- der. Failure to do so may result in property damage.

1. Ensure that the lower bunk is in the down position.

2. Position your left hand, open palm, against the lower left side of the ladder. Maintain contact with your left hand, open palm, in the same position until the ladder is completely folded.

3. Position your right hand, open palm, against the upper right side

of the ladder. Maintain contact with your left hand, open palm, in the same position until the ladder is approximately half-way folded.

Hand Positions to Fold the Ladder

SAFETY - How to Access the Upper Bunk

18 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

1

WARNING

DO NOT grip the ladder while folding and unfolding it. Always use an open hand when folding and unfolding the ladder to prevent injuries and pinching of fingers. Failure to comply may result in personal injury.

CAUTION

Lower bunk must be in down position before folding and unfolding the lad- der. Always fold the ladder before rais- ing the lower bunk. Failure to do so may result in property damage.

Apply pressure in opposite directions to ensure smooth operation of the ladder.

WARNING

Right hand must be clear of the ladder when it is approximately half-way fold- ed. Failure to do so may result in per- sonal injury.

4. Use the right hand to apply pressure to the left and

simultaneously use the left hand to apply pressure to the right. The ladder will begin to fold up.

5. When the ladder is approximately half-way folded, remove your right hand from the right side of the ladder.

6. Continue to push with your left hand until the ladder has been folded into the upper bunk structure.

7. Secure the latch.

CAUTION

Make sure the ladder is fully closed while the vehicle is in motion. Failure to do so may result in property dam- age.

Deckplate Access

WARNING

Always reinstall steps before entering the cab or accessing the deck plate.

Without steps you could slip and fall. Failure to comply may result in person- al injury or death.

WARNING

Keep steps clean. Clean any fuel, oil, or grease off the steps before entering the cab or accessing the deck plate. Stepping on a slippery surface can cause a fall which may result in death or personal injury.

WARNING

When you are climbing onto and off the deck plate, maintain at least three points of contact with your hands on the grab handles and your feet on the steps. Always face toward the vehicle when entering or exiting the cab and look where you are going. Failure to comply may result in death or personal injury.

SAFETY - Deckplate Access

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 19

1

WARNING

When stepping onto a surface to enter the cab or access the deck plate, only use the steps and grab handles instal- led and designed for that purpose. Failure to use the proper steps and grab handles could cause a fall which may result in death or personal injury.

NOTE

Any alteration (adding bulkheads, headache racks, tool boxes, etc.) be- hind the cab that affects the utilization of installed grab handles, deck plates, or frame access steps should comply with Federal Motor Carrier Safety Reg- ulation 399.

How to open the hood Access the engine by opening the hood. The hood is typically held in the closed position by a latch system. The latches are typically mounted on the hood and the

mating side is on the cab or quarter fenders.

WARNING

Before opening or closing the hood, make sure your footing is secure and stable. Failure to do so may cause the hood to open or close uncontrollably which may result in death or personal injury.

SAFETY - How to open the hood

20 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

1

CAUTION

A hood not latched securely could open during operation and cause vehi- cle damage. Be sure to latch the hood securely.

WARNING

A pivoting hood could hurt someone or be damaged itself. Before opening or closing the hood, be sure there are no people or objects in the way. Failure to stand in a position of safety can cause death or personal injury.

1. Release the latches

2. Put one or both hands on the top of the hood front. Tilt the hood forward by pulling at the top of the hood keeping your feet on the ground for stability. Keep pulling on the hood until you are certain that the hood hold open device is engaged.

Close the Hood The hood hold-open device will only be engaged if the vehicle hood is fully open. Once it is fully open, the latch will automatically engage and will need to be disengaged by the operator. The release lever for the hood hold-open device is located near the front hinge of the hood.

SAFETY - How to open the hood

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 21

1

Pull the lever out to disengage the hood hold-open device.

When closing the hood, be sure that you maintain the same point of contact (top of hood) to control the movement of the hood as it closes. Gently lower the hood into place to avoid damage to the hood or cab.

WARNING

DO NOT let go of the hood while it closes. Close the hood in a controlled manner which requires hands firmly grasping the hood and feet on a sta- ble, non-slip, surface. Failure to control the hood as it closes may result in death or personal injury

WARNING

Always ensure the hood hold open latch is engaged to keep the hood fully open any time anyone gets under the hood for any reason. Failure to do so may cause the hood to close uncon- trollably which may result in death or personal injury.

WARNING

Before closing the hood, be sure the area is clearno people or objects are in the way. Failure to do so may result in death or personal injury.

Under Hood Air Intake? The option for under hood intake is a switch on the dash that allows the operator to use air from under the hood in the event the air filter housing's inlet is blocked by snow or ice.

WARNING

DO NOT open the under hood air door with hands. This door is held closed with a spring which may pull the door closed unexpectedly. Failure to comply may result in personal injury.

CAUTION

Only operate the under hood intake air switch when outside temperatures are below 32F (0C). Engaging the under hood air intake while temperatures are above freezing may result in engine damage.

The switch is directly wired to a solenoid on the air filter housing. This air solenoid (normally closed) will engage when signaled which will supply air to a piston. This air pressure will overcome a spring

SAFETY - How to open the hood

22 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

1

which holds a door closed inside the air filter housing. Fully engaged, the door will open and air will enter from under the hood instead of the opening on the side of the hood.

Seat This seat has up to ten different controls that maximize the driver's comfort. Lumbar (and bolster support if available) are provided for superior support to the back during operation. Lower support is standard and the optional functions include upper lumbar and bolster functions. Pressing on the + symbol of the button will add support in the area. Pressing the opposite side of the button will release pressure and will reduce support in the area.

The seats in this vehicle are equipped with a switch that locks out the fore-aft isolator function in the seat. When locked, the seat will not move back and forth. It will be rigidly fixed and only allowed to move up and down with the vehicles movements. This vehicle may be equipped with a swivel function on the passenger seat. This function allows the passenger seat to rotate and face towards the inside of the cab.

WARNING

Always ensure that the passenger seat is locked into the forward facing posi- tion when the vehicle is in motion. Locking the swivel seat into the for- ward facing position maximizes visibili- ty to the surrounding area. Failure to comply creates a safety hazard that may result in death or personal injury.

WARNING

DO NOT use the swivel function while a passenger is in the seat and the ve- hicle is in motion. The seat belt will not provide proper protection if the pas- senger is not facing forward and the vehicle is in an accident. Failure to comply may result in death or personal injury.

SAFETY - Seat

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 23

1

2 1

1. Lower and Upper Lumbar Adjustment

2. Bolster Adjustment (option)

3

1 2 1. Seat heater/cooler 2. Seat thigh support up/down 3. Seat bottom angle adjustment

CAUTION

DO NOT use the seat heater for more than 10 minutes at a time. Always turn off the seat heaters when they are not needed. Overuse of the seat heater may decrease the capacity of the vehi- cles batteries and may result in poor starting and potential equipment dam- age.

WARNING

This seat may be equipped with a seat heater or ventilation system. There is a possibility that some people may suffer heat-induced burns or excessive cool- ing when using the system. DO NOT use either of these systems if you have a diminished ability to sense tem- perature, a reduced ability to feel pain, or have sensitive skin.

WARNING

When using the seat heater or ventila- tion system, DO NOT place anything on the seat that insulates against heat or cooling, such as a blanket, cushion, or similar item. This may cause the seat heater or ventilation system to overheat, which may cause a heat-in- duced burn or may damage the seat.

4 6

5321

7

1. Seat fore/aft 2. Express down 3. Suspension stiffness

SAFETY - Seat

24 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

1

4. Seat height 5. Lumbar and Bolster (Bolster is an

optional feature) 6. Recline 7. Armrest angle

WARNING

DO NOT drive or ride with your seat back in the reclined position. You could be injured by sliding under the seat belts in a collision. Failure to com- ply may result in personal injury or death.

Passenger Seat Swivel (Option) This vehicle may be equipped with a swivel function on the passenger seat. This function allows the passenger seat to rotate and face towards the inside of the cab.

WARNING

Always ensure that the passenger seat is locked into the forward facing posi- tion when the vehicle is in motion.

Locking the swivel seat into the for- ward facing position maximizes visibili- ty to the surrounding area. Failure to comply creates a safety hazard that may result in death or personal injury.

WARNING

DO NOT use the swivel function while a passenger is in the seat and the ve- hicle is in motion. The seat belt will not provide proper protection if the pas- senger is not facing forward and the vehicle is in an accident. Failure to comply may result in death or personal injury.

How to adjust a seat

WARNING

DO NOT adjust the driver's seat while the vehicle is moving. The seat could move suddenly and unexpectedly and can cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Make all adjustments to the seat while the vehicle is stopped. After adjusting the seat and before

driving off, always check to ensure that the seat is firmly latched in position. Failure to comply may result in person- al injury, death, equipment or property damage.

WARNING

Before driving or riding in a vehicle, ensure that there is adequate head clearance at maximum upward travel of seat. Injury may occur if head clear- ance is not adequate. Failure to com- ply may result in personal injury or death.

1. Set the seat's fore/aft position via the bar located below the seat cushion. This is a mechanical latch that does not involve any electric or air operated devices to control adjustment.

2. Set the seat height via the large switch on the left side of the seat cushion. This switch is located in the center of the seat pad and uses air to adjust the seat height.

3. Adjust the thigh support by toggling the switch located immediately

SAFETY - Seat

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 25

1

under the seat bottom cushion and above the fore/aft position adjustment lever.

4. Adjust the seat bottom angle using the switch next to the thigh support.

5. Adjust the seat back recline angle using the large lever situated near the seat belt buckle.

6. Adjust the lumbar support by using the switch bank located on the side the seat cushion between the up/ down adjustment switch and the seat recline adjustment lever.

7. Adjust the steering wheel. 8. Adjust the cab side mirrors.

Safety Restraint Belts Safety belts have proven to be the single most effective means available for reducing the potential for either death or personal injury in motor vehicle accidents. The combination lap/shoulder belt is equipped with a locking mechanism. The system adjusts automatically to a person's size and movements as long as the pull on the belt is slow. Hard braking or a collision locks the belt. The belt will also lock when driving up or down a steep hill or in a sharp curve.

Unbelted riders could be thrown into the windshield or other parts of the cab or could be thrown out of the cab. They could strike another person. Injuries can be much worse when riders are unbelted. Always observe user warnings pertaining to safety belts. Your vehicle is equipped with a seat belt indicator lamp located on the dash.

WARNING

DO NOT drive vehicle without your seat belt and your passengers' belts fastened. Riding without a safety belt properly fastened can lead to injury or death in an emergency.

WARNING

DO NOT use the swivel function while a passenger is in the seat and the ve- hicle is in motion. The seat belt will not provide proper protection if the pas- senger is not facing forward and the vehicle is in an accident. Failure to comply may result in death or personal injury.

Correct Use of Restraint Correct Placement of Lap Belt

Correct Placement of Shoulder Belt

SAFETY - Seat

26 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

1

Incorrect Use of Restraint Lap Belt Too High on the Hip

Shoulder Belt Incorrectly Under the Arm

Safety Restraint Belt Twisted

During Pregnancy Pregnant women should always wear combination lap/shoulder belts. The lap belt portion must be worn snugly and as low as possible across the pelvis. To avoid pressure on the abdomen, the belt must never pass over the waist. A properly worn seat belt may significantly reduce the risks to woman and baby in the event of a crash.

Safety Restraint Tips DO NOT wear a belt over rigid or

breakable objects in or on your clothing, such as eye glasses, pens, keys, etc., as these may cause injury in an accident.

Any authorized person sleeping in your vehicle while it is moving should use the bunk restraint.

Any authorized person sitting in the sleeper area on the sofa bed (if equipped) while it is moving should wear a seat belt.

A responsible operator sees to it that everyone in the vehicle rides or sleeps safely. The operator is responsible to inform any passengers or co-drivers how to

SAFETY - Seat

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 27

1

properly use the seat belts and bunk restraint in the vehicle.

DO NOT strap in more than one person with each belt.

Keep seat belt and bunk restraint buckles free of any obstruction that may prevent secure locking.

Damaged or worn belts in the cab or sleeper subjected to excessive stretch forces from normal wear, must be replaced. They may not protect you if you are in an accident.

Any belts or restraints that have been subjected to an accident should be inspected for any loose (attaching) hardware or damaged buckles.

If belts show damage to any part of assembly, such as webbing, bindings, buckles or retractors, they must be replaced.

DO NOT allow safety belts (seat or bunk) to become damaged by getting caught in door, bunk, or seat hardware, or rubbing against sharp objects.

All belts must be kept clean or the retractors may not work properly.

Never bleach or dye seat or bunk restraint belts: chemicals can weaken them. Do, however, keep them clean by following the care label on the belts. Let them dry completely before allowing them to retract or be stowed away.

Make sure the seat belts and bunk restraint of the unoccupied passenger seat or bunk is fully wound up on its retractor or is stowed, so that the belt or restraint tongue is in its properly stowed position. This reduces the possibility of the tongue becoming a striking object in case of a sudden stop.

DO NOT modify or disassemble the seat belts or bunk restraint in your vehicle. They will not be available to keep you and your passengers safe.

If any seat belt or bunk restraint is not working properly, see an authorized dealer for repair or replacement.

How to Use Lap/Shoulder Belt Follow these steps to fasten your seat belt and be sure anyone riding with you does the same.

WARNING

Proper seat belt adjustment and use is important to maximize occupant safe- ty. Failure to wear or adjust the safety belt properly may result in death or personal injury.

To fasten the belt: 1. Grasp the belt tongue. 2. Pull belt in a continuous slow

motion across your chest and lap. 3. Insert belt tongue into buckle on

inboard side of seat. 4. Push down until the tongue is

securely locked with an audible click.

5. Pull belt to check for proper fastening and adjustment.

a. Pull shoulder section to make sure belt fits snugly across the chest and pelvis.

SAFETY - Seat

28 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

1

b. There should be less than one inch (25 mm) gap between the body and the belt.

c. The shoulder belt must be positioned over the shoulder, it must never rest against the neck or be worn under the arm.

d. Make sure any slack is wound up on the retractor and that the belt is not twisted.

If the belt is locked, lean the body back to remove any tension in the belt. After releasing the belt, allow the belt to retract completely by guiding the belt tongue until the belt comes to a stop. To unfasten the belt, push the release button on the buckle and the belt should spring out of the buckle. The seat belt indicator will turn off once the driver's seat

belt is fastened.

Tether Belts Make sure that the tether belt is attached to the cab floor and seat frame. It should be routed through the buckle on each side. Often the attachments are made using a split-type hook. Make sure both halves of the hook are around the anchor bracket.

WARNING

DO NOT remove, modify, or replace the tether belt system with a different tether system. A failed or missing teth- er belt could allow the seat base to fully extend in the event of an acci- dent. Failure to comply may result in death or personal injury.

WARNING

Failure to adjust external tether belts properly can cause excessive move- ment of the seat in an accident. Tether belts should be adjusted so that they are taut when the seat is in its most upward and forward position. Failure to comply may result in death or per- sonal injury.

Adjust an external tether by either lengthening or shortening the strap. To lengthen it:

1. Turn the buckle to a right angle to the webbing.

2. Then pull the buckle.

SAFETY - Seat

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 29

1

3. To shorten the tether, pull on the strap.

Komfort Latch Feature

WARNING

DO NOT set the Komfort Latch with too much slack. Too much slack may reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt. Failure to comply may result in death or personal injury.

To eliminate cinching, simply activate the Komfort Latch device located on the seat belt webbing at the appropriate time:

1. Adjust the seat to its proper driving position.

2. Latch the seat belt. 3. If available, adjust the seat belt

height adjuster to a comfortable driving position.

4. While seated appropriately, push the "on" button to engage the Komfort Latch.

5. Learn forward in the seat until you hear a "click."

6. Return to normal driving position, and the Komfort Latch maintains the preset amount of tension relief.

More information and video tutorials can be found at: http://www.clicktugsnug.com/ To disengage the mechanism unbuckle the seat belt and then press the OFF button of the Komfort Latch or tug on the shoulder strap.

Belt Damage and Repair Damaged belts in the cab must be replaced. Belts that have been stretched, cut, or worn out may not protect you in an accident. If any seat belt is not working properly, see an Authorized Service Center for repair or replacement. For further information on seat belts and seat belt maintenance, see Safety Restraint System - Inspection on page 247.

Sleeper Bunks and Restraints This vehicle comes equipped with a bunk restraint for the primary lower bunk and the optional upper bunk. These restraints should be used whenever the bunks are occupied by a person while the vehicle is in motion. The sleeper bunk restraint is intended to reduce the risk of being thrown from the bunk in a crash. This device is not designed to hold the occupant in a fixed position on the bunk and may not prevent all injuries in the event of a crash.

SAFETY - Seat

30 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

1

WARNING

Be sure the restraint system is used when anyone is occupying the sleeper while the vehicle is moving. In an acci- dent, an unrestrained person lying in a sleeper bunk could be seriously in- jured. He or she could be thrown from the bunk. Failure to comply may result in death, personal injury, equipment or property damage.

Lower Bunk

WARNING

Always keep the lower bunk in its hori- zontal, latched, position while the vehi- cle is moving. If left open, stored items could become loose during an acci- dent and strike you, causing death or personal injury.

Before you move the vehicle, check to be sure the lower bunk is in the down position.

Lower Bunk Sleep Restraints

Upper Bunk

WARNING

Be sure the latch that holds the upper bunk in the folded position is working properly so the bunk will not fall down. Pull on the bunk to be sure it is latched securely. If the bunk falls, you could be injured. Failure to comply may result in death, personal injury, equipment or property damage.

WARNING

Any loose items on the upper or lower bunk should be moved to a secured place before driving the vehicle. Fail- ure to comply may result in death, per- sonal injury, equipment or property damage.

Per FMCSR 392.60 - Unauthorized Persons Not to be Transported. Federal law prohibits the transportation of persons in commercial vehicles unless they are specifically authorized in writing by the motor carrier. See the cited FMCSR for a

SAFETY - Seat

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 31

1

complete description of the regulation and exemptions. Upper Bunk Sleep Restraints

Upper Rear Sleeper Storage Your vehicle may be equipped with an upper storage shelf that extends over the lower bunk and across the rear of the sleeper. The following warning applies:

WARNING

Overhead compartments are not in- tended for personnel use or for items exceeding their designed weight limits. Exceeding the weight limits may cause the shelf to collapse and/or items may

fall out in a sudden stop which may lead to death or personal injury.

Compartments in the cab and sleeper are provided for storage of necessary items used during operation. The storage areas above the door are designed to hold a combined total not exceeding 14 lbs (6 kg) per compartment and the other overhead compartments (including those in the optional sleeper) should hold a combined total not exceeding 5 lbs (2.2 kg) per compartment.

What to do before starting the vehicle Safe Vehicle Operation Be sure to perform pre-trip inspections before starting and operating the vehicle. For your safety, as well as those around you, be a responsible driver:

If you drink alcohol, do not drive. Do not drive if you are tired, ill, or

under emotional stress. Safe driving is only possible with the proper concentration on the driving task. Keep distraction to a minimum to improve your concentration. Examples of

distractions may include radio controls, GPS navigation controls, cellular telephone calls, cellular text messages, reading or reaching for something on the floor. Minimizing your distractions will improve safe driving and will help avoid an accident involving death or personal injury. Be aware of local regulations that may prohibit the use of cellular telephones while driving. In addition to being an unsafe practice, it may be against local or federal ordinances to use cellular devices while operating the vehicle. Much has gone into the manufacturing of your vehicle including advanced engineering techniques, rigid quality control, and demanding inspections. These manufacturing processes will be enhanced by you, the safe driver, who observes the following:

Knows and understands how to operate the vehicle and all its controls

Maintains the vehicle properly Uses driving skills wisely.

This manual is not a training manual. It cannot tell you everything you need to know about driving your vehicle. For that you need a good training program or truck driving school. If you have not been trained, get the proper training before you

SAFETY - What to do before starting the vehicle

32 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

1

drive. Only qualified drivers should drive this vehicle. For more information, refer to Department of Transportation Regulation 392.7, which states that interstate commercial motor vehicles are not to be driven unless the driver is sure that certain parts and accessories are in working order. Do not drink alcohol and drive. Your reflexes, perceptions, and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You could have a serious or even fatal accident, if you drive after drinking. DO NOT drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking.

WARNING

The use of alcohol, drugs, and certain medications can impair perception, re- actions, and driving ability. These cir- cumstances can substantially increase the risk of an accident. Failure to com- ply may result in property damage, personal injury, or death.

WARNING

DO NOT text and drive. Your reaction time, perceptions, and judgment can be affected while texting or using any other form of mobile messaging while driving. Failure to comply may result in death, personal injury, equipment or property damage.

Emergency Equipment It is good practice to carry an emergency equipment kit in your vehicle. One day, if you have a roadside emergency, you will be glad the following items are with you:

Window scraper Snow brush Container or bag of sand or salt Emergency light Warning triangles Small shovel First aid kit Fire extinguisher Vehicle recovery hitches.

Drivers Checklist To keep your vehicle in top shape and maintain a high level of safety for you, your passengers, and your load, make a thorough inspection every day before you drive. You will save maintenance time later, and the safety checks could help prevent a serious accident. Please remember, too, that Federal Motor Carrier Safety Regulation 392.7 requires a pre-trip inspection and so do commercial trucking companies. You are not expected to become a professional mechanic. The purpose of your inspections is to find anything that might interfere with the safe and efficient transportation of yourself, any passengers, and your load. If you do find something wrong and cannot fix it yourself, have an authorized dealer or qualified mechanic repair your vehicle right away. The following operations are to be performed by the driver. Performing these checks and following the maintenance procedures in this manual will help keep your vehicle running properly.

SAFETY - What to do before starting the vehicle

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 33

1

Vehicle Loading

WARNING

DO NOT exceed the specified load rat- ing. Overloading can result in loss of vehicle control, either by causing com- ponent failures or by affecting vehicle handling. Exceeding load ratings can also shorten the service life of the ve- hicle. Failure to comply may result in death or personal injury.

WARNING

An unevenly distributed load or exces- sive load over one axle can adversely affect the braking and handling of your vehicle, which could result in an acci- dent. Even if your load is under the le- gal limits, be sure it is distributed even- ly. Failure to comply may result in death, personal injury, equipment or property damage.

The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the maximum front and rear Gross Axle Weight Ratings are determined by the

components installed from the factory on to the vehicle and their designed specifications. (Axle weight ratings are listed on the driver's door edge.)

GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. This is the MAXIMUM WEIGHT your vehicle is allowed to carry, including the weight of the empty vehicle, loading platform, occupants, fuel, and any load. Never exceed the GVWR of your vehicle.

GCW Gross Combination Weight (GCW). This is the actual combined weight of your vehicle and its load: vehicle, plus trailer(s), plus cargo.

GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating. This is the total weight that one axle is designed to transmit to the ground. You will find this number listed on the driver's door edge.

Load Distribution

Be sure any load you carry is distributed so that no axle has to support more than its GAWR.

1 - Axle Weight 2 - Payload Distribution

3 - MAXIMUM LOAD RATING 7,880 (3,574) 4,120 (1,869)

12,000 (5,443)

Lbs (Kg)

7,540 (3,420) 24,348 (11,061) 31,925 (14,481)

Lbs (Kg)

(1)

(3) (2)

1. Axle Weight 2. Payload Distribution 3. Maximum Load Rating

Be sure that the load on the vehicle is distributed evenly across each axle so that no axle has to support more than its rated GAWR. In total, the vehicle and its load should not exceed the GAWR for each axle and must not exceed the GCW.

Visual inspection while approaching the vehicle While approaching the vehicle, inspect the general appearance of the vehicle and its surroundings for any signs of needed attention.

SAFETY - Vehicle Loading

34 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

1

NOTE

If equipped with a three-piece roof fair- ing, DO NOT DRIVE WITH ROOF FAIRING FOLDED DOWN, since the marker lamps will not be effective in that position.

Perform these basic inspection steps before operating the vehicle.

1. Check the overall appearance and condition. Are windows, mirrors, and lights clean and unobstructed?

2. Is the air-intake opening clear of obstructions?

3. Check beneath the vehicle. Are there signs of fuel, oil, or water leaks?

4. Check for damaged, loose, or missing parts. Are there parts showing signs of excessive wear or lack of lubrication? Have a qualified mechanic examine any questionable items and repair them without delay.

5. Check your load. Is it secured properly?

Daily Checks

NOTE

These checks are in addition to, not in place of, Federal Motor Carrier Safety Regulations. These regulations may be purchased by writing to: Superin- tendent of Documents U.S. Govern- ment Printing Office Bookstore 710 N. Capitol St. N.W. Washington, DC 20402, or ContactCenter@gpo.gov.

Engine Engine oil Engine coolant Power steering fluid Engine belt Fuel filter (water separator) Fuel

System on page 273 Windshield washer fluid Battery cables - check the

condition of the battery and alternator cables for signs of chafing or rubbing. Make sure that all clamps (straps) holding the

cables are present and in good working order.

Hood latch Brake lines and hoses Steering components - check

pitman arm, drag link, tie rod, steering shaft and power steering hoses, etc., for loose, broken, or missing parts.

Hydraulic clutch fluid

Chassis and Cab Exterior Lamps - are any exterior lamps

cracked or damaged? Perform an exterior lamp test. See Exterior Lighting Self-Test on page 107 for more information.

Is the air-intake opening clear of obstructions?

Window and mirrors - clean and adjusted?

Tires, wheels and hubs Tires on page 290 Wheels on page 294 and Systems Check on page 37

Suspension components - check for loose or missing fasteners. Check damage to springs or other suspension parts such as cracks, gouges, distortions, bulges or chafing.

SAFETY - Daily Checks

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 35

1

Brake lines and hoses - check lines, linkages, chambers, parking and service brake operation.

Air system - Air System on page 232

Steps and grab handles Frame mounted tanks (fuel, diesel

exhaust fluid, etc) - check underneath the vehicle for signs of fluid leaks. If any are found, correct before operating the vehicle. Is the tank fill cap secure? Are the tank straps tight? Is the strap webbing in place?

Trailer connections - are they secure and the lines clear? If they are not being used, are they stored properly? Is the trailer spare wheel secure and inflated? Is the landing gear up and the handle secured?

Fifth wheel - Is the kingpin or the sliding fifth wheel locked?

Cab Interior Seat - adjust the seat for easy

reach of controls and visibility. Seat belts - fasten and adjust

safety restraint belts (which may include restraints in the sleeper).

Steering column - adjust for easy reach and visibility.

Mirrors - check and readjust mirrors if necessary.

Lamps - turn ignition key to the ON position to allow the bulb check and the systems check to test the truck systems. Perform an Exterior Light Selft Test

Instruments - check all instruments. see Systems Check on page 37

Windshield - check operation of windshield wipers and washers.

Horn - check operation of horn. Fuel - check vehicle's fuel level. Is

there enough fuel? Diesel exhaust fluid - check level.

Is there enough fluid? Air conditioning filters in the cab

and/or sleeper - check the condition of the sleeper air conditioning air filter. Keep the sleeper floor area behind the passenger front seat clear of debris and pet hair. The sleeper air conditioner draws air from this area and excessive dirt or pet hair may shorten the service life of the sleeper air conditioning air filter.

Weekly Checks

NOTE

These checks are in addition to, not in place of, Federal Motor Carrier Safety Regulations. These regulations may be purchased by writing to: Superin- tendent of Documents U.S. Govern- ment Printing Office Bookstore 710 N. Capitol St. N.W. Washington, DC 20402, or ContactCenter@gpo.gov.

Engine Belts Hoses Clamps Radiator Air filter and its housing Engine Aftertreatment system

components Exhaust pipes Engine air pre-cleaner (option) -

For vocational vehicles with optional engine air pre-cleaner, check the purge valve at the bottom of the hood mounted

SAFETY - Weekly Checks

36 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

1

engine air pre-cleaner for any obstructions. Make sure the purge valve will open and close as needed to purge dirt and water from the engine intake air.

Automatic transmission fluid (where applicable) - Check level, after the engine has warmed up to operating temperature.

Chassis and Cab Exterior Battery - check battery and

terminals. Hood supports and guides are

properly lubricated. Wheel cap nuts - are they all in

place and torqued properly - tighten if necessary. Wheels on page 294

Controls and wiring - check for condition and adjustment

Steering components - check pitman arm, drag link, intermediate shaft U-joint pinch bolt, tie rod, steering shaft and power steering hoses, etc., for loose, broken, or missing parts.

Cab air conditioner fresh air filter - check for condition and cleanliness.

PACCAR 20k Front Axle Kingpin Joint Grease/Tie Rod Ends (option) (VOCATIONAL USE) - For vocational vehicles with this axle, grease with Heavy-Duty Multipurpose Lithium Based: #1 or #2 grade, every 50 hours. (Refer to Front Axle and Suspension on page 273 for maintenance instructions.)

Systems Check System Check Display

Systems Check evaluates each monitored system and displays its progress for the operator. The Systems Check will appear when the Exterior Lighting Self-Test (ELST) is activated, or when viewing the Notifications sub-menu. Systems Check can be interrupted at any time by

Pressing Select Switching the ELST switch to OFF Turning the ignition key to OFF or

ACC Releasing the Parking Brake.

The Systems Check can also present the following optional features.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (option) One of the systems the vehicle monitors is the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).

105 105 105 105

105

105 105 105

105105 105 105

105

105 105

105

84 114

1

2

SAFETY - Systems Check

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 37

1

TPMS shows individual tire pressures for each location and will change the color of the tire:

Outlined Tire pressure not available

Gray Nominal Amber High or low pressure Red Very low or high pressure, or

high temperature To read about tires and recommended maintenance practices, see Tires on page 290. System Check Display with TPMS

84 96105

105 105

21

105

3

105 105 105

105

105 105 105

105

54

105 105

Once the Systems Check has completed, the results will display in a summary. A detailed explanation of this summary can be viewed by accessing the Menu after a Systems Check has completed.

Driver Rewards (option) If enabled, the Driver Rewards score for Fuel Economy, Engine Idle Time, or both Fuel Economy and Engine Idle Time are

shown, as well as general driving tips that can improve brake saving and fuel economy (see Driver Rewards).

Driver Performance Assistant (DPA) (option) If enabled, The Driver Performance Assistant score for Braking Habits is shown, as well as general driving tips that can improve brake saving and fuel economy (see DPA ).

SAFETY - Systems Check

38 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

1

SAFETY - Systems Check

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 39

1

Chapter 2 | EMERGENCY Roadside Assistance...........................................................................................................................41 Low Air Alarm .....................................................................................................................................41 Stop Engine Light................................................................................................................................42 Low Oil Pressure.................................................................................................................................42 Engine is Overheating.........................................................................................................................42 How to Inspect and Replace a Fuse................................................................................................... 44 Where are the Fuses Located?...........................................................................................................46 How to Jump Start a Battery............................................................................................................... 46 How to Recover a Vehicle...................................................................................................................48

EMERGENCY -

40 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

2

Roadside Assistance Call toll-free to talk to someone at the PACCAR Customer Center.

1-800-4Peterbilt (800-473-8372) The Customer Call Center is open 24/7-365 days a year and staffed with trained personnel (English and other languages if necessary), free of charge, to provide total roadside assistance. Their custom mapping system can locate the nearest Authorized dealers and Independent Service Providers (ISPs) based on the vehicle's location. In addition, the customer center can dispatch services for jump and pull starts, tires, trailers, fines and permits, chains, towing, hazardous clean-up, out of fuel (roadside), mechanical repairs, and preventive maintenance services. If they cant answer a specific question, they will direct you to a representative who can.

Low Air Alarm

If this alarm turns on while parked or driving, be sure to perform these tasks:

WARNING

If the air pressure falls below 60 psi (414 kPa) the spring brakes may stop the vehicle abruptly, which could cause an accident resulting in person- al injury or death. Observe the gauges. If the warning alert comes on, do not continue to drive the vehicle until it has been properly repaired or serviced.

NOTE

The instrument cluster gauges may appear, if hidden from view, change brightness and change color to bring attention to a particular system.

1. Slow down carefully. 2. Move a safe distance off the road

and stop. 3. Place the transmission in neutral

(park with automatic transmissions, if equipped) and set the parking brake.

4. Turn OFF the engine. 5. Turn ON the emergency flasher

and use other warning devices to alert other motorists.

If the light and alarm do not turn off at start- up, DO NOT try to drive the vehicle until the problem is found and fixed.

EMERGENCY - Roadside Assistance

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 41

2

Stop Engine Light

This warning light illuminates when the engine has a serious problem. This is an emergency and the vehicle should be safely stopped at the soonest opportunity.

WARNING

This should be considered an emer- gency. You should stop the vehicle as safely as possible and turn OFF the ig- nition. The vehicle must be serviced and the problem corrected before driv- ing again. Failure to do so may cause severe engine or Diesel Particulate Fil- ter damage, or cause an accident which may result in death or personal injury.

Low Oil Pressure

CAUTION

Continuing to operate your vehicle with insufficient oil pressure will cause seri- ous engine damage. Failure to comply may result in equipment or property damage.

It is important to maintain oil pressure within acceptable limits. If oil pressure drops below the minimum psi (kPa) the oil pressure gauge will illuminate and change color. Additionally, the Stop Engine Lamp will turn red.

NOTE

The instrument cluster gauges may appear, if hidden from view, change brightness and change color to bring attention to a particular system.

1. Slow down carefully.

2. Move a safe distance off the road and stop.

3. Place the transmission in neutral (park with automatic transmissions, if equipped) and set the parking brake.

4. Turn OFF the engine. 5. Turn ON the emergency flasher

and use other warning devices to alert other motorists.

6. Wait a few minutes to allow oil to drain into the engine oil pan, and then check the oil level.

7. Add oil if necessary. If the problem persists, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Engine is Overheating

EMERGENCY - Stop Engine Light

42 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

2

CAUTION

The cooling system may overheat if the engine coolant is at the minimum level. A sudden loss of coolant, caused by a split hose or broken hose clamp could also lead to an overheat condition. Always inspect to ensure hoses and clamps are not cracked, worn, or loose. Failure to comply may result in equipment or property dam- age.

NOTE

The system may also temporarily over- heat during severe operating condi- tions such as: Climbing a hill on a hot day Stopping after high-speed/high-

load driving Debris blocking air flow through

the cooling module (radiator)

If the engine coolant temperature warning lamp comes on and the audible alarm sounds showing an overheat condition, or if you have any other reason to suspect the

engine may be overheating, DO NOT TURN OFF THE ENGINE unless a low water warning device indicates a loss of coolant. Follow these steps if the engine coolant temperature is rising, or the temperature is already above normal, and there are no other warning alarms displayed in the instrument cluster.

NOTE

The instrument cluster gauges may appear, if hidden from view, change brightness and change color to bring attention to a particular system.

1. Reduce engine speed, or stop. When stopped, place the transmission in neutral (N) and set the parking brake. Keep the engine running.

WARNING

To reduce the chance of personal in- jury, vehicle damage, and/or death from overheated engines, which can result in a fire, never leave the engine

idling without an alert driver present. If the engine does overheat, as indicated by the engine coolant temperature lamp, immediate action is required to correct the condition. Continued unat- tended operation of the engine, even for a short time, may result in serious engine damage or a fire. Failure to comply may result in death, personal injury, equipment or property damage.

EMERGENCY - Engine is Overheating

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 43

2

WARNING

Removing the fill cap on a hot engine can cause scalding coolant to spray out and burn you badly. If the engine has been in operation within the previ- ous 30 minutes, be very careful in re- moving the fill cap. Protect face, hands, and arms against escaping flu- id and steam by covering the cap with a large, thick rag. DO NOT try to re- move it until the surge tank cools down or if you see any steam or coolant es- caping. Always remove the cap very slowly and carefully. Be ready to back off if any steam or coolant begins to escape. Failure to comply may result in death, personal injury, equipment or property damage.

NOTE

Keep the engine running at idle speed unless a warning icon turns on that re- quires the engine to be shut off.

2. Check to ensure the Oil Pressure Gauge reads normal.

3. Make sure the engine fan is turning by switching the Engine Fan Switch from AUTO to MAN (Manual).

4. Idle the engine to see if this reduces the coolant temperature. If the temperature does not begin to drop, shut off the engine and contact your nearest authorized dealer.

5. If the temperature begins to return to normal, allow the engine to idle 3 to 5 minutes before shutting it off. This allows the engine to cool gradually and uniformly.

6. If overheating came from severe operating conditions, the temperature should have cooled by this time. If it has not, stop the engine and let it cool before checking to see if the coolant is low.

7. Be sure the vehicle is parked on level ground or the readings may be incorrect. Check the coolant level at the coolant surge tank.

Check the coolant level after each trip when the engine has cooled. The coolant level should be visible within the surge tank. Add coolant if necessary.

How to Inspect and Replace a Fuse Turn the ignition off and turn all lights off. Locate the fuses in either the cab, sleeper, or main power fuse box. All the electrical circuits have fuses to protect them from a short circuit or overload. If something electrical on your chassis stops working, the first thing you should check for is a blown fuse.

WARNING

DO NOT replace a fuse with a fuse of a higher rating. Doing so may damage the electrical system and cause a fire. Failure to comply may result in death, personal injury, equipment or property damage.

CAUTION

Never patch fuses with aluminum foil or wire. This may cause serious dam- age elsewhere in the electrical circuit, and it may cause a fire.

EMERGENCY - How to Inspect and Replace a Fuse

44 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

2

CAUTION

If a circuit keeps blowing fuses, have the electrical system inspected for a short circuit or overload by an author- ized dealer as soon as possible. Fail- ure to do so could cause serious dam- age to the electrical system and/or ve- hicle.

CAUTION

Before replacing a fuse, turn OFF all lights and accessories and remove the ignition key to avoid damaging the electrical system.

1. Turn off all lights and accessories and remove the ignition key to avoid damaging the electrical system.

2. Determine from the chart on the fuse panel which fuse controls that component.

If the circuit has a fuse, remove that fuse and see if it is blown.

If the circuit has a polyswitch, have your electrical system

inspected by an authorized dealer.

Blown Fuse

1. Separation (Blown)

3. If it is blown, replace it with a fuse of the same rating. If a fuse of the same rating is not available, a fuse of a lower rating may be temporarily substituted. You can also use a fuse from a circuit you can do temporarily without (for example an accessory circuit or radio).

CAUTION

When replacing a failed polyswitch (circuit breaker), always use an ap- proved polyswitch (circuit breaker) with a current rating equal to or less than the polyswitch (circuit breaker) being replaced. Only use the approved Type II modified reset polyswitch (circuit breaker). NEVER use a Type I (auto- matic reset) or Type III (manual reset) polyswitch (circuit breaker). A fuse with a current rating equal to or less than the polyswitch (circuit breaker) being replaced can also be used.

CAUTION

Always close and latch the engine compartment fuse box cover. A latch- ed cover ensures a water tight seal which can prevent damage to electri- cal components.

EMERGENCY - How to Inspect and Replace a Fuse

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 45

2

Where are the Fuses Located? Fuses for the cab are located in the fuse panel behind the drivers side kick panel. Main power relays are located on the power distribution center, in the engine compartment, mounted to the front wall of the cab. Fuses for the optional sleeper are located on a separate fuse box accessible through the luggage compartment door.

How to Jump Start a Battery

WARNING

Batteries contain acid that can burn and gases that can explode. Ignoring safety procedures may result in death, personal injury, equipment or property damage.

WARNING

Never jump start a battery near fire, flames, or electrical sparks. Batteries generate explosive gases that could explode. Keep sparks, flame, and lighted cigarettes away from batteries. Failure to comply may result in death, personal injury, equipment or property damage.

WARNING

When jump starting using a battery charger/booster, verify that the battery charger/booster is set to the same jump start voltage and amperage specifica- tions as the vehicle electrical system and batteries (i.e., if the vehicle electri- cal system is a 12 volt system, the jump start voltage on the battery charger/ booster shall be set at no higher than a 12 volt setting). Failure to comply may cause an explosion and/or fire resulting in death, personal injury, and/or equip- ment or property damage.

WARNING

Heed all warnings and instructions of the jumper cable manufacturer. Failure to comply may result in death, person- al injury, equipment or property dam- age.

CAUTION

Applying a higher voltage booster bat- tery will cause expensive damage to sensitive electronic components, such as relays, and the radio. Failure to comply may result in equipment dam- age.

CAUTION

Improper hook-up of jumper cables or not following these procedures can damage the alternator or cause seri- ous damage to both vehicles.

EMERGENCY - Where are the Fuses Located?

46 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

2

CAUTION

Vehicles equipped with an Engine Start Module (ESM) should not be jumped using the ESM Starter terminal (S+). Failure to comply may result in arcing or battery damage.

1. Remove any jewelry that may come in contact with the battery terminals.

2. Select a jumper cable that is long enough to attach to both vehicles in a way that ensures neither vehicle touches each other.

3. Position the two vehicles together, but do not allow them to touch.

4. Turn OFF all lights, heater, radio, and any other accessory on both vehicles.

5. Set the parking brake. 6. Shift the transmission into park

position or neutral for manual transmissions.

7. If either vehicle is equipped with battery disconnects ensure they are in the OFF position prior to connecting the two vehicles.

8. Attach one end of a jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of the discharged (dead) battery. This will have a large red + or P on the battery case, post, or clamp.

NOTE

If your vehicle is equipped with an En- gine Start Module (ESM), attach the positive (+) cable to the vehicle battery and not the ESM Starter terminal (S+). See the Maxwell Installation Guide and User Manual for additional infor- mation about LED status conditions, maintenance, and troubleshooting.

9. Attach the other end of the same cable to the positive (+) terminal of the good (booster) battery.

10. Attach the remaining jumper cable FIRST to the negative (-) terminal (black or N) of the good battery.

11. Attach the other end of the negative cable to the negative (-) terminal of the dead battery.

NOTE

Always connect positive (+) to positive (+) and negative (-) to negative (-).

12. If either vehicle is equipped with battery disconnects, ensure that they are in the ON position.

13. Start the vehicle that has the good battery first.

Let it run for 5 minutes, or If charging a system containing

an Engine Start Module (ESM), let it run for 15 minutes. Briefly pressing the Push-to-Test button on the ESM will indicate the ESM's charge state. When the status LED presents a solid green light the ESM is sufficiently charged.

14. Start the vehicle that has the discharged (dead) battery.

The engine should start. If the engine fails to start, do not continue to crank the starter. Instead, contact the nearest authorized dealer.

EMERGENCY - How to Jump Start a Battery

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 47

2

WARNING

When disconnecting jumper cables, make sure they do not get caught in any moving parts in the engine com- partment. Failure to comply may result in death, personal injury, equipment or property damage.

Reverse the above procedure exactly when removing the jumper cables. With engine running, disconnect jumper cables from both vehicles in the exact reverse order, making sure to first remove the negative cable from the vehicle with the discharged battery.

How to Recover a Vehicle

CAUTION

Remove the drive axle shafts or lift the driving wheels off the ground before towing the vehicle. Towing the vehicle with either the wheels on the ground or

the axle shafts in the axles will cause damage to the axle gears.

CAUTION

If your vehicle has a Meritor axle with a driver-controlled main differential lock, install the caging bolt before re- moving the axles for towing, see How to Manually Lock a Differential. Instal- ling the caging bolt prevents damage by locking internal axle components in position.

CAUTION

Connect recovery rigging only to hitch- es intended for that purpose. DO NOT attach to bumpers or brackets. Use only equipment designed for this pur- pose. Failure to comply may result in equipment damage.

WARNING

Before towing a vehicle, test your air brakes to ensure that you have proper- ly connected and inspected the recov- ery vehicles brake system. Failure to do so could lead to a loss of vehicle control which may result in an accident involving death or personal injury.

All lubricating and clutch application oil pressure is provided by an engine-driven pump, which will not work when the engine is stopped. You could seriously damage your vehicle by towing it with the driveline connected and the drive wheels on the ground. Worse, when vehicles are towed, either by wrecker or piggyback, the lubricant in the top front of the drive axle will drain to the rear. This will leave the top components dry. The resulting friction may damage them. Always remove the main drive axle shafts before towing your vehicle.

1. Review and understand all the cautions and warnings of this section.

2. Disconnect the drive axle shafts and cover the open hubs. This is

EMERGENCY - How to Recover a Vehicle

48 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

2

necessary because if the transmission is driven by the driveshaft (rear wheels on the ground), no lubricant will reach the gears and bearings, causing damage to the transmission. .

See How to Prepare the Axles for Towing on page 52

3. Connect the towing chain or cable using best recovery practices .

See Best Practices for Recovery Rigging on page 55

4. Make sure the recovered vehicle's parking brakes are released. .

See Manually Release the Parking Brake on page 49

5. If you desire to use the recovered vehicles brakes, ensure that the vehicles air system is connected to that of the recovery vehicle. Ensure that any air line that has been removed from a driver-controlled main differential lock is firmly capped to prevent loss of air pressure from the recovery vehicle if it is supplying air pressure. If you dont desire to use the recovered vehicles brakes, ensure that you cage the spring brakes before attempting to move the vehicle.

See How to Manually Lock a Differential on page 53

6. Follow state/provincial and local laws that apply to vehicles in tow.

7. Do not tow vehicles at speeds in excess of 55 mph (90 km/h).

For additional information concerning heavy duty truck recovery, refer to the following Technology & Maintenance Council (TMC) literature.

Recommended Practice #602A Front Towing Devices For Trucks and Tractors

Recommended Practice #602B Recovery Attachment Points For Trucks, Tractors, and Combination Vehicles"

Recommended Practice #626 Heavy Duty Truck Towing Procedures

Copies of these can be obtained from the following address: Technology & Maintenance Council 950 N. Glebe Road (703) 838-1763 Arlington, VA 22203 Email: tmc@trucking.org Website: http:// tmc.truckline.com

Manually Release the Parking Brake There may be times when there is not enough air pressure, or the engine's air compressor is not able to produce enough pressure, to release the parking brakes. In such cases, the parking brakes (or Spring Brakes) can be manually released.

WARNING

DO NOT drive vehicle with malfunc- tioning brakes. If one of the brake cir- cuits becomes inoperative, braking distances will increase substantially and handling characteristics while braking will be affected. You could lose control of your vehicle or cause an ac- cident. Have it towed to the nearest dealer or qualified repair facility for re- pair. Failure to comply may result in property damage, personal injury, or death.

EMERGENCY - How to Recover a Vehicle

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 49

2

WARNING

DO NOT operate a vehicle when the spring brakes have been manually re- leased. Driving a vehicle after its spring brakes are manually released is extremely dangerous. The brakes may not function. Failure to comply may re- sult in death, personal injury, equip- ment or property damage.

WARNING

DO NOT disassemble a spring brake chamber. These chambers contain a powerful spring that is compressed. Sudden release of this spring may re- sult in death or personal injury.

WARNING

Releasing the spring brakes on an un- secured vehicle could lead to an acci- dent. The vehicle could roll, which may result in death, personal injury, equip- ment or property damage. Always se- cure the vehicle with wheel chocks,

chains, or other safe means to prevent rolling before manually releasing the spring brakes.

To move a vehicle immobilized by the spring brakes due to loss of air pressure in the brake system, perform the following procedure:

1. Remove the cap from the spring chamber

2. Remove the release stud assembly from the side pocket, and remove the release nut and washer from the release stud.

3. Slide out the release stud.

4. Insert the release stud through the opening in the spring chamber where the cap was removed. Insert it into the pressure plate. Turn the release stud 1/4 turn clockwise in the pressure plate. This secures the cross pin into the cross pin area of the pressure plate and locks it into the manual release position.

EMERGENCY - How to Recover a Vehicle

50 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

2

5. Assemble the release stud washer and nut on the release stud.

6. With a wrench, turn the release stud assembly nut until the compression spring is 90-95 percent caged. While doing this, check to make sure the push rod (adapter push rod or service push rod) is retracting. DO NOT over-

torque the release stud assembly. (S-Cam-type maximum: 50 lb-ft (68 Nm), Wedge-type maximum: 30 lb-ft (41 Nm)). The spring brake is now mechanically released.

Recovery Hitch A removable recovery hitch is a device that attaches to the sockets in the front bumper in the event that the vehicle needs to be recovered. These hitches are designed for short distance and intermittent duty to help pull a vehicle. These hitches are not

designed to be used as towing devices for long distance. Specially designed hitches are required to recover your vehicle. The recovery hitches attach to the frame. Two hitch assemblies, made up of the following parts, are recommended for the proper recovery of your vehicle:

If your vehicle is not equipped with the proper recovery hitch assembly, contact an authorized dealer to obtain the proper equipment.

EMERGENCY - How to Recover a Vehicle

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 51

2

WARNING

DO NOT use parts from other trucks or materials from other sources to repair a hitch or to replace a missing hitch. The parts provided for recovery are made of high strength materials and are specifically designed for vehicle re- covery. Failure to use the correct fac- tory equipment may result in an acci- dent involving death or personal injury.

CAUTION

Connect recovery rigging only to hitch- es intended for that purpose. DO NOT attach to bumpers or brackets. Use only equipment designed for this pur- pose. Failure to comply may result in equipment damage.

How to use a Recovery Hitch

CAUTION

Recovery pull maximums assume the tow rigging evenly distributes the load between both recovery hitches. See examples in Recovery Rigging for de- tails. Serious damage to the vehicle may occur if rigging is not connected properly.

CAUTION

When recovering ditched or bogged vehicles, stay well below Maximum Capacities. Even at loads below maxi- mum, the physical strain of recovering a vehicle could damage axles, suspen- sions, fifth wheels, etc.

Use the following procedure to install the Vehicle Recovery Hitches. See Recovery Hitch Assembly illustration for part identification.

1. Check the square sockets behind lower bumper for obstructions, clear if necessary.

2. With lock pins removed, insert the hitches through the bumper and into the square hitch socket.

3. Align the hole in the tow hitch with the square hitch socket hole.

4. Insert the lock pin into the square hitch socket hole and through the hole in the tow hitch until the lock tab is within the square hitch socket.

5. Rotate the lock pin 90 degrees to secure the pin in place.

6. Ensure that the tow pin and lock clip are installed before using the hitch.

7. Remove the hitches and store all parts after recovering the vehicle.

How to Prepare the Axles for Towing If the vehicle is going to be towed from the front axle and using the rear axle for support, then the axle shafts should be prepared [removed] so that minimal damage is made to the differential during the towing process. Ensure that the recovered vehicle does not have an open air line. An open air line on the recovered vehicle will cause a leak in the air system of the recovery vehicle if

EMERGENCY - How to Recover a Vehicle

52 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

2

both vehicles brake systems are connected. This could cause a loss of system air, which can cause the service brakes not to function, resulting in the sudden application of the spring brakes causing wheel lock-up, loss of control, or overtake by following vehicles.

WARNING

An open air line on the recovered vehi- cle will cause a leak in the air system of the recovery vehicle if both vehicles brake systems are connected. This could cause a loss of system air, which can cause the service brakes not to function, resulting in the sudden appli- cation of the spring brakes causing wheel lock-up, loss of control, or over- take by following vehicles. You could be in an accident involving personal in- jury or death. Ensure that any air line that has been removed from a driver- controlled main differential lock is firm- ly capped to prevent loss of air pres- sure from the recovery vehicle if it is supplying air pressure.

1. Lift driving wheels off the ground or remove the driveline and axle shafts before towing the vehicle.

CAUTION

Failure to lift the driving wheels off the ground or remove the driveline and axle shafts before towing the vehicle could seriously damage your vehicle. All lubricating and clutch application oil pressure is provided by an engine- driven pump, which does not work when the engine is stopped. When ve- hicles are towed either by wrecker or piggyback, lubricant in the top front of the drive axle will drain to the rear. This will leave the top components dry, resulting in friction that will seriously damage these components.

2. If the vehicle has driver controlled differential lock, then manually lock the differential.

3. Remove drive axle shafts. 4. Cover the open ends of the hubs to

prevent dirt and debris from entering the axle.

CAUTION

Water, dirt, and other material can en- ter an open hub or axle. This can con- taminate the axle fluid and cause pos- sible damage to components. Ensure that the hubs are covered with plastic whenever a drive axle shaft is re- moved.

How to Manually Lock a Differential Follow these procedures if the vehicle has a driver controlled differential lock. Always lock the differential when the axles are being removed to aid in re-installation. This procedure should be done before the axle shafts are removed.

CAUTION

Failure to install the caging bolt when towing vehicles with driver-control main differential lock can result in damage by failing to lock internal com- ponents in position.

EMERGENCY - How to Recover a Vehicle

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 53

2

WARNING

An open air line on the recovered vehi- cle will cause a leak in the air system of the recovery vehicle if both vehicles brake systems are connected. This could cause a loss of system air, which can cause the service brakes not to function, resulting in the sudden appli- cation of the spring brakes causing wheel lock-up, loss of control, or over- take by following vehicles. You could be in an accident involving personal in- jury or death. Ensure that any air line that has been removed from a driver- controlled main differential lock is firm- ly capped to prevent loss of air pres- sure from the recovery vehicle if it is supplying air pressure.

CAUTION

A recovered vehicle will have no op- erational brake system. Additionally, the rear axle spring brakes will proba- bly be applied.

If you desire to use the recovered vehicles brakes, ensure that the vehicle's air system is connected to that of the recovery vehicle. Also ensure that any air line that has been removed from a driver- controlled main differential lock is firmly capped to prevent loss of air pressure from the recovery vehicle.

If you dont want to use the recovered vehicles brakes, ensure that you cage the spring brakes before attempting to move the vehicle.

1. Remove the air line and firmly cap the air line from the vehicle. (2)

2. Remove the caging bolt from its storage hole. (1)

3. Screw the caging bolt into the air line hole. (2)

4. When fully engaged, a 0.25-0.5 in. (6.35-12.7 mm) space will remain between the air cylinder and the bolt head. This action will lock the differential by pushing a piston into a lock position.

Recovery Hitch Capacities The maximum rated loads for vehicle recovery varies depending on the direction or angle of pull. These capacities are listed in the table below and are for the two hitches working together, simultaneously.

Direction of Pull Maximum Capacity lbs. (kg)

Directly forward 80,000 (36,000)

Directly vertical or horizontally to the side

14,600 (6,600)

45 degrees in any direction

20,000 (9,000)

EMERGENCY - How to Recover a Vehicle

54 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

2

Best Practices for Recovery Rigging

CAUTION

Recovery pull maximums assume the tow rigging evenly distributes the load between both recovery hitches. See examples in Recovery Rigging for de- tails. Serious damage to the vehicle may occur if rigging is not connected properly.

CAUTION

When recovering ditched or bogged vehicles, stay well below Maximum Capacities. Even at loads below maxi- mum, the physical strain of recovering a vehicle could damage axles, suspen- sions, fifth wheels, etc.

Recovery Rigging Options

Use a double chain or cable setup that distributes the load equally to both hitches (see either example in Recovery Rigging Options illustration):

Never loop a single chain or cable through both hitches, also known as reeving (not shown).

Use a spreader or equalizer bar to distribute the load on both hitches (1), or

If no spreader bar is available, connect the main tow chain or cable no closer than 6 ft. (1.8 m) from the vehicle: (2) to (3).

Secure the towed vehicle using two additional chains or cables (see Safety Chains) (not shown).

Returning to Service After Recovering Once the vehicle is recovered, the axles need to have oil added to prevent gear damage during operation.

1. Into the pinion cage, add 1 pint (.47 liter) of lubricant or into the interaxle differential, add 2 pints (.94 liter) of approved lubricant.

2. After adding the specified type and amount of lubricant, drive the vehicle. It should be unloaded. Drive 1 to 2 miles (1.5 to 3 km) at a speed lower than 25 mph (40 km/h). This will thoroughly circulate the lubricant through the assembly.

3. If the parking brakes were manually released, they will need to be modified back to their normal operating condition.

4. If the differential lock was manually locked, then the caging bolt needs to be put back in its storage location and the differential lock air line needs to be re-installed in its normal position.

Add lubricant back to the axles after recovering the vehicle and before putting it back into service.

EMERGENCY - How to Recover a Vehicle

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 55

2

What to do if the Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Snow or Ice

WARNING

DO NOT spin the wheels faster than 35 mph (55 km/h). Spinning a tire at speedometer readings faster than 35 mph (55 km/h) can be dangerous. Tires can explode from spinning too fast. Under some conditions, a tire may be spinning at a speed twice that shown on the speedometer. Any re- sulting tire explosion could cause in- jury or death to a bystander or passen- ger, as well as extensive vehicle dam- age: including tire, transmission, and/or rear axle malfunction.

These suggestions are provided to improve the ability to free a vehicle if the vehicle gets stuck in sand, mud, snow, or ice:

Move the gearshift lever or selector from First to Reverse

Apply light pressure on the accelerator pedal while the transmission is in gear

Remove your foot from the accelerator while shifting

Do not race the engine

For best traction and safety, avoid spinning the wheels

Follow these practices to avoid transmission damage:

Always start vehicle in motion with the shift lever in first gear.

Be sure that transmission is fully engaged in gear before releasing the clutch pedal (manual only).

Do not shift into reverse while the vehicle is moving.

If the vehicle needs to be recovered from being stuck, do not permit the vehicle to be towed for long distances without removing the driveshaft.

If tire chains are needed, make sure they are installed on both sides of the driving axle. Installing chains on only one side of the axle can cause equipment damage.

CAUTION

Chains on the tires of only one tandem axle can damage the driveline U-joints and the inter-axle differential. Repairs could be costly and time-consuming.

Failure to comply may result in equip- ment damage.

Towing the Vehicle A dealer or commercial towing service will have the necessary equipment to safely tow the vehicle and should be able to make arrangements to limit any damage to the vehicle. The towing service and the dealer should be aware of towing regulations and safety precautions. The towing service will ensure that the following precautions are taken:

Use of a safety chain system Abide by all local towing

regulations Ensure that the towing device does

not contact any surfaces that could be damaged while in transit

If towing from the front, ensure that the rear axles are prepared for towing

If towing from the rear, ensure that all body components such as roof, side, and chassis fairings are secured properly to avoid damage while in transit

EMERGENCY - How to Recover a Vehicle

56 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

2

WARNING

Secure the roof, side, and chassis fair- ings while towing from the rear. An un- secured fairing may come off of the vehicle during transit. Failure to secure the fairings while towing may cause an injurious accident resulting in death or personal injury.

EMERGENCY - How to Recover a Vehicle

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 57

2

Chapter 3 | CONTROLS Instrument Cluster...............................................................................................................................60 Peterbilt Digital Display Controls.........................................................................................................62 Peterbilt Digital Display....................................................................................................................... 63 Selecting a View..................................................................................................................................66 Configure Settings...............................................................................................................................72 Drive Summary................................................................................................................................... 77 Driver Rewards (option)...................................................................................................................... 77 Driver Performance Assistant (option)................................................................................................ 78 Bulb Check..........................................................................................................................................79 Guide to the Warning Symbols............................................................................................................81 Optional Gauges................................................................................................................................. 92 Dash Switches.................................................................................................................................... 93 Ignition Key Switch............................................................................................................................107 Exterior Lighting Self-Test................................................................................................................. 107 Steering Column Controls.................................................................................................................108 Steering Wheel Controls................................................................................................................... 112

CONTROLS -

58 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

3

Door Mounted Mirror Controls...........................................................................................................113 Heating and Air Conditioning.............................................................................................................114 Sleeper Alarm Clock......................................................................................................................... 123 Cab Accessories............................................................................................................................... 124

CONTROLS -

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 59

3

Instrument Cluster For information on using the dash and instrument cluster options while driving,

see the paragraphs that follow. Please remember that each vehicle is custom- made. Your instrument panel may not look exactly like the one in the pictures that follow. We have tried to describe the most

common features and controls available. You can pick out the parts that apply to you and read them to be fully informed on how your particular vehicle operates.

1. Peterbilt Digital Display

2. Compact Trailer Valve

3. Navigation/ Infotainment (or Optional Gauges)

4. Switches 5. Glovebox 6. Parking Brakes 7. Cupholders 8. Air Conditioning 9. Radio

CONTROLS - Instrument Cluster

60 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

3

1. Additional Switches 2. Ignition Switch

CONTROLS - Instrument Cluster

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 61

3

Peterbilt Digital Display Controls

1 2

3

1. Scroll Wheel 2. Shortcut 3. Back/Cancel

The controls located on the right pod of the steering wheel are used to select Drive

View, navigate and select items in the Menu, and view Popup messages. The shortcut button will access items that are configured in the settings, Shortcuts on page 76.

Scroll Wheel Use the Scroll Wheel to navigate through menus and press down to select menu options, change settings when in the menu, and switch between Views.

CONTROLS - Peterbilt Digital Display Controls

62 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

3

For example, press down and then scroll to access the clock menu. Then press down and scroll again to adjust the clock values. Press down to select the menu: Menu Example: main Menu

Press again to select the sub-menu: Menu Example: Settings

Use the Scroll Wheel to scroll through the values then press down to select. Menu Example Set Function

Back Use the Back button to return to the previous menu, suppress a popup , or cancel a selection. Popups on page 81.

Peterbilt Digital Display The digital display will stay visible during all driving situations and in some parked situations. When the parking brake is set

the following actions will wake the display, making it visible:

Opening (or keeping open) the cab doors

Using steering wheel switches Tapping the brake Turning the ignition switch to ON,

ACC, or START Starting the engine.

If after 20 seconds none of these actions are taken, the display will darken to conserve power, but will awaken if any wake action is performed. If the Anti-Theft option is active and you attempt to start the engine, a passcode prompt will appear; the engine cannot be started until the correct passcode is entered (see Anti-Theft on page 76).

CONTROLS - Peterbilt Digital Display

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 63

3

Display Indications Always Shown

4

5

678

3

910

11 12 13 21

1. Active Warnings 2. Outside Air

Temperature 3. Diesel Particulate

Filter Indicator 4. View Indicator 5. Transmission Mode 6. Sub-Trip 7. Trip 8. Driver Profile 9. Odometer 10. Engine Hours 11. Battery 12. Aux Battery

Indicator 13. Clock

Active Warnings Red or amber popups are counted and the total is displayed by the active warning indicator. In addition, these counts are also presented in

Systems Check The Notifications Sub-menu A Drive Summary

The numbers may change without user interaction if individual warnings are intermittent, time based, self correcting, or the situation is rectified.

Outside Air Temperature Outside Air Temperature monitors the ambient temperature outside the truck The display will alert the driver to high and low temperature conditions. When the

outside temperate approaches freezing (36F or 2C) an icon will appear next to the temperature (snowflake for freezing and thermometer for high) and a chime will sound. The system's unit of measure (Fahrenheit or Celsius) can be changed by navigating to the settings menu. The outside air temperature display uses a sensor (located at the bottom of the driver's side mirror assembly) to measure outside air temperature only. It is not

CONTROLS - Peterbilt Digital Display

64 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

3

capable of displaying the temperature of the road surface on either the temperature display or the snowflake icon. Additionally, the outside air temperature reading may be affected by exposure to direct sunlight.

View Indicator The View Indicator identifies which view is currently selected:

Favorites (if enabled) Minimized Minimized with Advance Driving

Assistance (Optional) Basic Enhanced

Drive, Neutral, and Reverse Indicator The Drive, Neutral, and Reverse Indicator reflects the shifter position of an Automatic Transmission. Manual transmissions and certain automatic transmission do not provide feedback to the display. Instead, the transmission shifter indicates the gear condition.

Sub-trip Odometer The Trip Odometer can be split into smaller segments called Sub-trips. Start a Sub-trip by pressing Trip on the steering wheel. The maximum distance that the sub-trip will show is 9,999.9 at which point it will start over at zero. When it maxes out, the current sub-trip ends and begins a new one. Sub-trip information is also found in the settings menu Trip Summary on page 72.

Trip Odometer The Trip Odometer shows how far the vehicle has gone traveled since last it was reset. The maximum distance that can be shown on the Trip Odometer is 99,999.9 at which point the operator needs to reset. Press Trip to set. Press and hold Trip to reset (Item 1 in following image).

Left Switch Pod

4 25 1

3

1. Trip marker 2. Limiter control 3. Cruise control ON/OFF 4. Cruise control set/resume 5. Toggle switch

CONTROLS - Peterbilt Digital Display

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 65

3

The operator may also use the trip summary to view the same information Trip Summary on page 72.

Driver Profile Indicator The number following the icon indicates which driver is active when Driver Profiles are enabled. For information on Driver Profiles, Choosing the Active Driver Profile on page 74.

Odometer The odometer displays the total distance your vehicle has traveled. The maximum distance that can be shown on the odometer is 9,999,999.9. The odometer will roll over to zero if maximum mileage is achieved.

Engine Hours Engine hours will display the total number of hours the engine has been operated. The maximum hours that can be shown are 99,999.9 before the counter rolls over to zero.

Battery Voltage The Battery Voltage indicator shows the battery icon, voltage, and the state of

charge. The battery icon will be replaced with the Low Voltage Disconnect (LVD) icon when Low Voltage Disconnect is active. The battery icon is gray when operating normally, but changes to amber to indicate a low voltage condition and red to indicate a high or very low voltage condition.

Clock The clock can be displayed in a 12-hour or 24-hour format. Clock settings can be altered in the Settings Sub-menu.

Transmission Gear Display Vehicles with PACCAR or Eaton automated transmissions will show the transmission mode, current gear, and diagnostic information associated with the transmission. Vehicles with manual transmissions will show the current gear. This display does not apply for vehicles with Allison transmissions.

Selecting a View The instrument cluster has 5 views for the operator to use.

Favorites Minimized (Optional) Minimized with

Advanced Driver Assistant Basic View Enhanced View

Each view is identified by a specific view indicator on the right side of the display area.

Minimized View A combination speedometer and tachometer will show in the center of the Minimized View.

Speedometer and Tachometer Vehicle and engine speed are presented at the center of the display. Units for vehicle speed can be changed to either Standard or Metric in the Digital Display menu (see Units and Language on page 72) or by using the steering wheel Shortcut button (see )(see Peterbilt Digital Display Controls on page 62).

Minimized View with Driver Assistance (Option)

CONTROLS - Selecting a View

66 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

3

Minimized with Driver Assistance (Option)

30F

9,999.99,999,999.9348.5 M ITrip M I

D

86%12.5V 100%

10:45 P AUX

PTO 1 BMI

11

N

0

5

10 15

20

25 64

RPM

M PH

65 SPEED LIM IT 18

DPF

1 22

3

45

6

1. Optimal RPM Indicator

2. Smart Tach

3. Engine Speed 4. Transmission Gear 5. Driver Assistance

area 6. View Indicator

CONTROLS - Selecting a View

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 67

3

Adaptive Cruise Control Notification (option)

This indication at vehicle start means it is equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) and Collision Mitigation. These features work together to improve driver safety and enhance the driving experience. When Cruise Control is active, ACC will accelerate and slow the truck to maintain a chosen distance from a detected forward vehicle. Collision Mitigation will attempt to

prevent a forward collision when advancing at speeds greater than 15 mph (24 kph). Please review the ACC section of this manual, and the manufacturers manual, prior to driving this vehicle.

Basic View and Enhanced View

CONTROLS - Selecting a View

68 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

3

Enhanced View

2 21

3

1

1. Gauges for Basic View and Enhanced View

2. Gauges for Enhanced View only

Basic View This view combines the instrumentation presented in Minimized View with gauges such as Fuel and DEF level.

Enhanced View This view includes all the gauges present in the Basic View, adding gauges on the left and right in the display. Enhanced View

CONTROLS - Selecting a View

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 69

3

is designated by the bottom icon in the View Indicator.

Gauges

Gauge locations may be customizable and the gauge can react depending on the readout indicated. (Favorites on page 75) Some gauges are a flat bar rather than a typical dial gauge.

NOTE

The instrument cluster gauges may appear, if hidden from view, change brightness and change color to bring attention to a particular system.

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) The diesel exhaust fluid gauge shows the approximate amount of DEF fluid in the DEF tank. DEF Level Gauge

21 MPG8.2 E

F

DEF

1

2

CAUTION

Use Diesel Exhaust Fluid only. Failure to do so may damage components of the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF).

Besides empty and full, the gauge also indicates 1/4, 1/2, and 3/4 of total capacity. DEF fluid is required to meet certain emission requirements. A warning icon and popup message will appear when the DEF level is low. Do not allow your DEF tank to remain empty. Please refer to your emission supplemental manual for more details about DEF fluid.

NOTE

The instrument cluster gauges may appear, if hidden from view, change brightness and change color to bring attention to a particular system.

Fuel Level Fuel Level Gauge

DEF

21

2

1

MPG8.2 E

F

The Fuel gauge(s) indicate the fuel level.

WARNING

DO NOT carry additional fuel contain- ers in your vehicle. Fuel containers, ei- ther full or empty, may leak, explode, and cause or feed a fire. Failure to comply may result in death or personal injury.

CONTROLS - Selecting a View

70 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

3

WARNING

Diesel fuel in the presence of an igni- tion source could cause an explosion. A mixture of gasoline or alcohol with diesel fuel increases this risk of explo- sion. DO NOT remove a fuel tank cap near an open flame. Use only the fuel and/or additives recommended for your engine. Failure to comply may re- sult in death, personal injury, equip- ment or property damage.

CAUTION

Use only Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel (ULSD) Fuel, as recommended by en- gine manufacturers. If you need further information on fuel specifications, con- sult the Engine Operation and Mainte- nance Manual.

NOTE

For Export vehicles, the fuel gauges will not state: ULTRA LOW SULFUR DIESEL FUEL ONLY.

NOTE

This vehicle may be manufactured with different fuel systems and differ- ent draw tube locations. Because of this and the amount of road crown, it is recommended that you do not operate your vehicle with less than one-quarter of your truck's fuel capacity. Allowing the fuel level to go below one-quarter of capacity could result in the lack of fuel to keep the engine running. In ad- dition, you will want to keep the fuel tanks at least half-full to reduce con- densation of moisture in the tanks. This moisture can damage the engine.

NOTE

The instrument cluster gauges may appear, if hidden from view, change brightness and change color to bring attention to a particular system.

Favorites View (optional) Vehicles with Favorites View will allow the operator to customize the arrangement of many of the gauges. Using the Favorites View requires the operator to Scroll to select the Minimized View. Once the Minimized view is showing, Scroll up once more to the star icon the View Indicator. See Favorites on page 75 to customize the Favorites view.

CONTROLS - Selecting a View

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 71

3

Configure Settings Menu Example: main Menu

The following Menus Notifications Trip Summary Settings Truck Information

are accessible when 1. The Parking Brake is set 2. All active popup messages are

viewed and suppressed 3. Press the Select button

These menus allow the operator to configure settings on the vehicle.

Notifications Notifications display system messages related to the condition of your vehicle. It displays

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (optional)

Active messages Systems Check

Trip Summary Presents a summary of details such as fuel economy and distance of the trip, collected during the main trip and/or Sub-trips. These details will be collected until the Trip is reset, or the max trip distance (99,999.9 miles for main, 9,999.9 for Sub-Trips) is reached.

Settings Settings allows the operator to customize the Display.1

General

Time This menu allows the operator to customize the clock.

Automatic Time (optional)

When enabled, trucks with Automatic Time will receive time zone appropriate data.

24-Hour Time

Choose between 12 or a 24 hour format. AM or PM (A or P) shall only be displayed in 12-hour time format.

Set Time Set Time is available when Automatic Time isn't enabled. Set the clock to indicate your local time.

Units and Language Units Use this setting to change the units of measurement between Standard, Metric (Bar), and Metric (PSI). Language Use this setting to change the language.

Features Features allows the operator to enable optional features on the vehicle to customize their experience.

Predictive Cruise Overshoot Configure the Predictive Cruise Control Overshoot through this menu item. See Predictive Cruise Control (Option) on page

1 If Anti-Theft is enabled, Settings will not be accessible until the correct Passcode is entered.

CONTROLS - Configure Settings

72 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

3

148 for more details about Overshoot and Predictive Cruise Control.

LVD Setup Change the LVD battery voltage set point for LVD to turn on Low Voltage Disconnect (LVD) (option) on page 255.

Trailer Detection (Option) The trailer outputs on your vehicle will detect a connected trailer when this feature is enabled. The operator will be notified when a trailer connection is not detected.

Digital RPM (optional) Provides a digital numeric readout of the engine speed in the speedometer.

Windshield Wiper Interlock This activates the headlights when the windshield wipers are turned on.

Dark Cabin Dark Cabin prevents cab interior lights from turning on when a cab door is opened.

Shutdown Timer

WARNING

Never idle your vehicle for prolonged periods of time if you sense that ex- haust fumes are entering the cab. In- vestigate the cause of the fumes and correct it as soon as possible. If the vehicle must be driven under these conditions, drive only with the windows open. Failure to repair the source of the exhaust fumes may result in death, personal injury, equipment or property damage.

CAUTION

DO NOT allow your engine to idle, at low rpm (400-600 rpm), longer than five minutes. Long periods of idling af- ter the engine has reached operating temperatures can decrease engine temperature and cause gummed pis- ton rings, clogged injectors, and possi- ble engine damage from lack of lubri- cation. The normal torsional vibrations

generated can also cause transmis- sion wear.

CAUTION

Do not stay in the vehicle with the en- gine running or idling for more than 10 minutes with the vehicle's Heater and A/C ventilation system in RECIRC or at LOW FAN SPEED. Even with the ventilation system on, running the en- gine while parked or stopped for pro- longed periods of time is not recom- mended.

CONTROLS - Configure Settings

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 73

3

CAUTION

Prolonged periods of idling can result in lower than optimal engine/transmis- sion operating temperatures which could cause increased rates of wear. Do not allow the engine to operate at idle for extended periods at tem- peratures at or below 160F/71C. To help prevent this from occuring on PACCAR engines, an idle shutdown feature can be programmed to shut the engine down after a period of low idle operation with no driver activity. A flashing warning lamp will inform the driver of an impending shutdown. Fail- ure to comply may result in equipment or property damage.

NOTE

If you are required to idle your vehicle for long periods of time, install an aux- iliary heater or automatic idle control. These auxiliary devices can reduce

fuel consumption and save you mon- ey.

When active, the Shutdown Timer will keep the engine running for a period of time after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. This allows the driver to exit the cab while sustaining power to the cab interior. Normally, this would require the key to remain in the ignition, potentially leaving the cab unlocked and accessible. When the timer reaches zero, the engine stops, removing power from certain electrical loads. The timer counts down in the Drive Summary. The Shutdown Timer is enabled or disabled in the Display menu and can be set for up to 30 minutes. This setting can be changed in the Settings Sub-menu or while counting down, in the Drive Summary, using the Scroll and Select (See How to Set the Shutdown Timer on page 140). The Shutdown Timer setting may be limited to less than 30 minutes (See Greenhouse Gas Certified Configuration). If your truck has the Engine Idle Shutdown Timer (EIST) option and it is set for a

shorter shutdown time, the Engine will shutdown at the shorter timer setting.

Driver Profiles This feature saves customizations made as a Driver Profile. Turning Driver Profiles ON for the first time will load current customizations into Driver Profile 1 and make it the active profile. The profile can be changed in this menu. The active Driver Profile can also be changed after setting the park brake and then pressing Back. 2 Changes to Driver Profile will be auto-saved while making customizations. They will not be lost when turning the feature off.

NOTE

The last used active profile, including any changes to that profile, will remain the profile until a new one is selected.

Choosing the Active Driver Profile Press Back when the parking brake is set to change the active Driver Profile.

2 The ignition key may need to be cycled back to OFF and then ON to access the Driver Profiles Settings.

CONTROLS - Configure Settings

74 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

3

Favorites To disable Favorites, contact your authorized dealer. Vehicles with Favorites View enabled allow the operator to create a customized arrangement of all but centrally located gauges. To change the Favorites configuration, stop the truck, set the parking brake and

Access Favorites via the Settings Sub-menu. OR

Scroll to Favorites (represented by a star in the View Indicator) and press Select.

Adding a Gauge to Favorites The truck must have the Parking Brake set to add a gauge. You must be in the Edit Your Favorites menu to perform this procedure. Adding a gauge requires that the gauge is not already assigned a location in Favorites View. If you want to move a gauge already assigned, you must first remove that gauge Removing a Gauge from Favorites on page 76.

1. Scroll the list until you locate the desired gauge or compound gauge.

Edit Your Favorites (Center of Screen)

If the gauge you want to position is already present in the Favorites View (either as a single or compound gauge) it will not appear as a menu option.

2. Select to choose the gauge you want to position.

3. Scroll through the valid locations (this can include positions currently

holding a gauge, which may be replaced) and target that position.

If a position is not valid, the display will read "Not Available."

Edit Your Favorites (Left-side of image)

4. Select to Add or Replace the gauge.

Navigate and Select "Save Configuration" when all gauges have been arranged. The Display will read "Your favorites configuration has been saved." Press Back to exit Editing Favorites.

CONTROLS - Configure Settings

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 75

3

Removing a Gauge from Favorites The Parking Brake must be set and at least one gauge must be in the Favorites View to remove a gauge. The Speedometer/Tachometer, Fuel, and Air pressure gauges located at the Display center cannot be removed. If the gauge you want to remove is part of a multiple gauge group, the whole group must be removed.

1. Select "Remove Gauge." 2. Scroll to highlight the gauge to be

removed and Select. Navigate andSelect "Save Configuration" if this is the last change you want to make to Favorites View. The Display will read "Your favorites configuration has been saved." Press Back to exit Editing Favorites.

Shortcuts Use the Shortcuts option to assign one of the following features to the Shortcut button.

Dark Cabin Toggles Dark Cabin On/Off.

Digital RPM Provides a numeric read-out of RPM within the speedometer.

Dual Speedometer Shows a compound Speedometer with both Standard and Metric Values. .

Favorites Selects the Favorites View on the Display.

Metric Units Switches all measured units used on the Display between Standard and Metric.

Anti-Theft Anti-Theft prevents starting the engine and accessing the settings sub-menu. If Anti- Theft does not show in the settings sub- menu, see your authorized dealer to install Anti-Theft. If Anti-Theft is enabled, turning the ignition switch to START prompts the operator to enter the passcode. Once the correct passcode is entered, you have five minutes to start the engine or the passcode must be re-entered.3 To enable or disable Anti-Theft, change Anti-Theft (ON/OFF) in the settings sub- menu and enter the current passcode.

How to Enter the Passcode The ignition key and the current Passcode are required. The default passcode is set to 0000 at the factory. Please see an authorized dealer if a custom passcode is needed. With the anti-theft feature turned off, the operator will not need a passcode to start the engine.

1. Using the Scroll , scroll to the first number in the code then press Select. Anti-theft first digit

The next digit will be selected.

3 The five minute timer can be postponed in one minute intervals using any steering wheel switch.

CONTROLS - Configure Settings

76 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

3

2. Scroll to the number you want for this digit and press Select. The next digit will be selected.

3. Continue this process until all four digits have been chosen. Anti-theft last digit

The display will read "Turn Key to Start Engine."

Truck Information Truck information stores specifications and data about the vehicle.

Chassis Engine Anti-lock Brake System

Transmission GHG Vehicle Speed Limits Remote Station Interlocks Predictive Cruise Control option Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

option Power Take Off (PTO) option

Information specific to these categories will be shown in the Truck Information Sub- menu.

Drive Summary The Drive Summary presents information about the most recent leg of travel and is shown when the ignition key is turned to off. The Drive Summary consists of

Critical and Non-critical Issues (see Systems Check)

Shut Down Timer (if active) (see Shut Down Timer)

TPMS (option) (see Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (option) on page 37)

Driver Rewards (option) (see Driver Rewards)

Driver Performance Assistant (option) (see DPA)

Three customer-selected reports (i.e. Idle Time, Fuel Economy)

The Drive Summary collects information since the last time the engine was off for at least two hours. When insufficient information has been collected, Drive Summary will show dashes for the monitored component or report. Customer- selected reports can be changed at your local dealership.

Driver Rewards (option) If enabled, Driver Rewards raises or lowers the vehicles max-allowable speed based on whether a programmed, fuel economy goal is met. This goal is defined by the customer and can be based on fuel consumption, engine idle time, or both fuel consumption and idle time. The driver is assigned a score based on how successfully they meet or exceed this goal. Driver Rewards is only available for vehicles equipped with a PACCAR MX engine. The fuel consumption goal is met by reducing the amount of fuel used over a given distance. This is achieved by

Driving slower

CONTROLS - Drive Summary

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 77

3

Minimize Speed Changes Accelerating gently Coasting in gear Using the Cruise Control Maintaining optimal tire pressure. Reducing the trailer gap Running a Warmer Cab. Turning off extra electrical loads

The engine idle time goal is met by reducing the time the engine idles (running the engine when the vehicle is not in motion). The Driver Rewards score is based on driving habits. This score is compared to the goal and a max-speed bonus or penalty is determined. The Driver Rewards score is shown during a Systems Check and in the Driver Summary. When there is a bonus or penalty, it appears below the Cruise Control (CC) indicator on the dash, and the max-allowed speed shows to the right of the CC indicator. Driving habits that reduce fuel use will earn the operator a higher max speed; habits that consume more fuel will lower the max speed. Driver Rewards will never grant a bonus that exceeds programmed federal emission regulated or customer defined speed limits. During the Systems Check, the Driver Rewards and DPA features offer general

driving tips that can increase fuel economy and brake savings. These features also provide feedback in the Driver Summary based on a drivers specific driving habits. This advice if followed can improve future Driver Rewards and DPA scores. Driver Rewards has three customer- determined modes of activation: only when CC is in use, when CC is not being used, or at all times. The Driver Rewards goal and the amount of penalty or bonus is also customer-determined and should be based on reasonable expectations for a known route of travel. The Driver Rewards goal should be reconsidered if the manner of vehicle use or the vehicle route changes significantly. To enable or disable Driver Rewards, or change the mode of activation, reward amounts, or set a new Driver Rewards goal, contact your dealership.

Driver Performance Assistant (option) If enabled, the Driver Performance Assistant (DPA) determines how skillfully the operator uses coasting and the engine brake when reducing vehicle speed.

Coasting and engine brake use, instead of frequent, aggressive use of the service brakes, can extend brake life and increase fuel economy. The DPA assigns the driver a score based on their braking habits and provides suggestions on how to improve these habits. The DPA feature is only available for vehicles equipped with a PACCAR MX engine. The drivers DPA score is determined by comparing their braking and coasting habits against a customer-defined goal for braking use and coasting. A score that meets or exceeds this goal will award positive feedback in the Driver Summary. During the Systems Check, the DPA and Driver Rewards features offer general driving tips that can increase fuel economy and brake savings. These features also provide feedback in the Driver Summary based on a drivers specific driving habits. This advice if followed can improve future DPA and Driver Rewards scores (see Driver Rewards). To enable or disable the DPA or set a new DPA goal, contact your dealership.

CONTROLS - Driver Performance Assistant (option)

78 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

3

Bulb Check When the ignition switch is turned ON multiple warning icons will be displayed in a sequence to test each warning light indicator. The total sequence should take no more than 10 seconds to complete. Have your instrumentation system checked by a qualified service technician if does not successfully complete.

Audible Alarm The audible alarm will sound in conjunction with most warning lights. These events include but are not limited to headlight on, fifth wheel, stop engine, primary/secondary air, and driver door open warnings.

Optional Icons Additional icons may be operational depending on individual vehicle specifications.

NOTE

Some optional lights may illuminate even though your vehicle is not equip- ped with that particular feature.

Physical Telltales

CONTROLS - Bulb Check

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 79

3

These physical telltales will always appear across the top of the display.

Dedicated Telltales Dedicated Telltales always appear in the same location throughout the screen. Some are visible only when active, but

most signify that the monitored component requires operator attention.

CONTROLS - Bulb Check

80 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

3

Dynamic Telltales

These dynamic telltales appear on the display in the rows indicated. A dynamic telltale communicates the status of a monitored component, which may require the operator to respond or take action.

Active Warnings Red or amber popups are counted and the total is displayed by the active warning indicator. In addition, these counts are also presented in

Systems Check The Notifications Sub-menu A Drive Summary

The numbers may change without user interaction if individual warnings are intermittent, time based, self correcting, or the situation is rectified.

Popups Popup: Red Oil Temp

Engine HighOil Temp Reduce Engine Load or Check Oil Level 1/3

A Popup displays information from the vehicle computer. Certain types of popups are indicated by the Warning Indicator in the display area. Mulitple Popups will appear in the display as a stack of messages. Suppressible Popups are those that will move out of the stack when driving. All are suppressible when the Parking Brake is set. The Menu will not be accessible until all Popups have been Suppressed.

Viewing and Suppressing Popups A Popup can be read and Suppressed by pressing the Scroll Wheel. Some situations may require pressing Back instead. For example, the following image is suppressed by pressing the Scroll Wheel (noted with the arrown down) OR by pressing the Back(indicated with the X mark below the roller).

Suppressable Popup Message

Engine HighOil Temp Reduce Engine Load or Check Oil Level 1/2

Guide to the Warning Symbols The warning lamps and audible alarm may indicate a system malfunction. Check the lamps frequently, and respond promptly as soon as you see one go on. These lamps could save you from a serious accident. Additionally, gauges may become visible, may change colors, or may change brightness to raise awareness to the operator. When multiple warning symbols are shown on the instrument cluster, they will appear at first and then minimize. When minimized they will be represented in the active warnings area of the display. A triangle represents a warning registered and a diamond represents a check message.

CONTROLS - Guide to the Warning Symbols

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 81

3

WARNING

DO NOT ignore a warning lamp or au- dible alarm. These signals tell you something is wrong with your vehicle. It could be a failure in an important system, such as the brakes, which could lead to an accident causing

death or injury. Have the appropriate system checked immediately.

Check messages are provided to give the operator additional information regarding systems that require attention due to a system malfunction and/or operating conditions that may hinder safe and proper performance of the vehicle. The system will emit a chime to alert the operator that a

message is appearing on the cluster. Some messages can be managed by the operator while others may require an authorized dealer repair. In the following table is a list of warning lamp/indicator symbols that appear in the instrument cluster. Each symbol has a unique name, color when illuminated, and whether the symbol is standard (STD) or optional (OPT).

Symbol Name Color Standard or Optional

ADAS Camera Fault on page 84 Yellow OPT

Axle, Stability Control (Option) on page 84 Yellow STD

Axle, Traction Control on page 85 Yellow STD

Brakes, Antilock Brake System on page 86 Yellow STD

Brakes, Low Air on page 86 Red STD

Brake, Park Brake on page 86 Red STD

Brakes, Trailer Antilock Brake System on page 86 Yellow STD

Cab, Door Ajar Amber STD

Differential, Inter-Axle Lock on page 87 Yellow OPT

Dump Truck, Body Up on page 87 Red OPT

CONTROLS - Guide to the Warning Symbols

82 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

3

Symbol Name Color Standard or Optional

Dump Truck, Gate on page 87Dump Truck, Gate Yellow OPT

Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Warning Light on page 88 Yellow STD

Emissions, Derate Amber STD

Emissions, High Exhaust System Temperature on page 88 Yellow STD

Emissions, Malfunction Indicator Light on page 88 Yellow STD

Engine, Check Engine on page 89 Yellow STD

Engine, Engine Block Heater on page 89 Yellow OPT

Engine, Low Coolant Level on page 89 Yellow STD

Engine, Overspeed Air Shutdown on page 89 Red OPT

Engine, Retarder (Brake) on page 89 Green OPT

Engine, Stop Engine on page 89 Red STD

Engine Wait-to-Start Light on page 89 Yellow OPT

Fifth Wheel Slide Unlocked on page 90 Red OPT

Fifth Wheel Locked on page 90 Red OPT

Fifth Wheel Unlocked on page 91 Red OPT

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) on page 91 Yellow OPT

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) Fault on page 91 Yellow OPT

CONTROLS - Guide to the Warning Symbols

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 83

3

Symbol Name Color Standard or Optional

Lights, High Beam on page 91 Blue STD

Fast Idle Control on page 91 Yellow OPT

Refrigerator on page 91 Green OPT

Seat Belt Fasten Red STD

Suspension, Lift Axle White OPT

Tire Inflation (TPMS) on page 91 Yellow OPT

Transmission, Auxiliary on page 92 Yellow OPT

Transmission, Check on page 92 Red OPT

Turn Signal, Left on page 92 Green STD

Turn Signal, Right on page 92 Green STD

ADAS Camera Fault

This amber warning light appears when a fault occurs with the camera used by the various Advanced Driver Assist (ADAS) features: Lane Departure Warning (LDW), Lane Keeping Assist (LKA), and Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). The LDW and

optional LKA features are both dependent on the ADAS camera, and both will be disabled when this warning occurs. In addition to issues internal to the camera, please read the topic Lane Departure Warning (LDW) on page 150 for conditions which may limit camera performance, resulting in an ADAS Camera Fault.

Axle, Stability Control (Option)

CONTROLS - Guide to the Warning Symbols

84 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

3

Calculates the drivers intended path of travel from wheel speed and steering angle sensors, then compares calculations to the actual direction of travel. The system uses individual wheel brakes to re-adjust the path of the vehicle.

The Stability Control Icon (ESC or Electronic Stability Control) illuminates during the Bulb Check when the ignition is turned ON. It turns off after a few seconds if no system problems are detected. If a problem is detected, the ESC Warning lamp will turn on and stay on.

Illuminates when the ESC system is regulating individual wheel brakes to correct the vehicles direction of travel. (Refer to Advanced ABS with Stability Control for more information.)

WARNING

If this chassis is equipped with an Electronic Stability Control (ESC) and is modified (e.g. adding or removing an axle, converting from a truck to a tractor, converting from a tractor to a truck, changing the body, lengthening

of the wheelbase and/or frame, relo- cating frame components, or modifying pneumatic or electrical ABS/ESC har- nesses) the ESC must be evaluated by a qualified technician. If you have any questions, contact your authorized dealer. Failure to comply may result in property damage, personal injury, or death.

NOTE

For more information about the stabili- ty control system installed on your ve- hicle, please refer to additional materi- al supplied with this operator manual, included in your glove box information- al packet.

Axle, Traction Control

Monitors wheel speed for poor traction. If a wheel begins to slip due to poor traction, it

may reduce engine power or apply brakes in an effort to regain traction.

Illuminates during the Bulb Check when the ignition is turned ON. It turns off after a few seconds if no system problems are detected. If an ATC problem is detected, the ATC warning light will turn on and stay on.

Illuminates when the ATC is regulating wheel spin and turns off after the traction control event has ended.

Flashes continuously when the ATC/Deep Snow & Mud switch is turned on, indicating that this feature is active.

CONTROLS - Guide to the Warning Symbols

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 85

3

WARNING

If this chassis is equipped with an Electronic Stability Control (ESC) and is modified (e.g. adding or removing an axle, converting from a truck to a tractor, converting from a tractor to a truck, changing the body, lengthening of the wheelbase and/or frame, relo- cating frame components, or modifying pneumatic or electrical ABS/ESC har- nesses) the ESC must be evaluated by a qualified technician. If you have any questions, contact your authorized dealer. Failure to comply may result in property damage, personal injury, or death.

NOTE

For more information about the stabili- ty control system installed on your ve- hicle, please refer to additional materi- al supplied with this operator manual, included in your glove box information- al packet.

Brakes, Antilock Brake System

Illuminates during the bulb check. Have the ABS system checked by an authorized dealer if the ABS Warning Lamp stays on for more than 3 seconds.

Illuminates during normal operating conditions to indicate a problem with the ABS system.

Illuminates when a problem exists with Automatic Traction Control (ATC).

Brake, Park Brake

Illuminates in the status indicator when parking brakes are applied.

Brakes, Low Air

Illuminates when system air pressure falls below 60 psi.

Brakes, Trailer Antilock Brake System

Illuminates during the bulb check and the tractor/truck is connected with a ABS equipped trailer. Illuminates during normal operating conditions to indicate a problem with the Trailer ABS System. This should be checked by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

CONTROLS - Guide to the Warning Symbols

86 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

3

NOTE

Tractors/Trucks and trailers built after 03/01/2001 must be able to turn on an In-Cab Trailer ABS Warning Light (per U.S. FMVSS121). The industry chose Power Line Communication (PLC) as the standard method to turn it on. On trailers built prior to 03/01/2001 verify trailer ABS system status via the re- quired external warning light mounted on the trailer. The indicator light on the trailer should be yellow and identified with the letters ABS.

Cruise Control

This indicator shows the operator which Cruise Control function is currently enabled or active. This includes

Cruise Control Adaptive Cruise Control (optional) Predictive Cruise Control (optional)

Variable Road Speed Limiter (optional)

When a Cruise Control function is enabled, a white indicator will appear. When a Cruise Control function has been activated, the indicator will change from white to green. For more information on use of the various Cruise Control functions, see Cruise Control, Adaptive Cruise Control, Predictive Cruise Control, and Variable Road Speed Limiter.

Differential, Inter-Axle Lock

Illuminates when the inter-axle differential switch is ON thus locking the inter-axle differential. This powers the forward rear and the rear rear differentials equally. When the switch is turned off (inter-axle differential unlocked) the engine power is allowed to flow to any of the four drive tires based on the differential effect (mostly to the forward rear differential). This feature is standard on all tandem axles.

NOTE

Tractors/Trucks and trailers built after 03/01/2001 must be able to turn on an In-Cab Trailer ABS Warning Light (per U.S. FMVSS121). The industry chose Power Line Communication (PLC) as the standard method to turn it on. On trailers built prior to 03/01/2001 verify trailer ABS system status via the re- quired external warning light mounted on the trailer. The indicator light on the trailer should be yellow and identified with the letters ABS.

Dump Truck, Body Up

Illuminates when Truck Dump Body is up.

Dump Truck, Gate

Illuminates when Truck Dump gate is open.

CONTROLS - Guide to the Warning Symbols

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 87

3

Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Warning Light

This icon and related message will appear when the DPF needs to be regenerated and then also during the regeneration cycle. This may also appear if the system is attempting to automatically regenerate while the vehicle is in Power Take Off operation mode. Engine aftertreatment system includes a diesel particulate filter and DPF warning light.

Emissions, High Exhaust System Temperature

WARNING

If this light is on, do not park in an area of combustible vapors or materials. You must keep combustibles at least 5 ft. (1.5 m) away from the exhaust (out- let) stream as it exits the tail pipe while the HEST light is illuminated. Always park your vehicle outside. Failure to do so could ignite an explosion or harm bystanders which could result in seri- ous injury.

WARNING

If this lamp is on, do not park in an area where people are close by. You must keep combustibles at least 5 ft. (1.5 m) away from the exhaust outlet while the HEST lamp is illuminated. Failure to do so could result in serious injury.

WARNING

If this lamp is on, temperature of the tailpipe, exhaust pipes, the diesel par-

ticular filter (DPF)/selective catalytic reduction (SCR) device and surround- ing components including enclosures and steps becomes elevated during engine operation or any regeneration event and can cause serious burns to the skin. Allow adequate cooling time before approaching, working on or near any part of the exhaust system or surrounding components.

Illuminates when the exhaust gas temperature and exhaust components become extremely hot.

Emissions, Malfunction Indicator Light

Illuminates when an engine emissions failure has occurred. The vehicle can be safely driven but should be serviced to correct the problem. The situation should not be considered an emergency. In some cases, the Malfunction Indicator Light will activate in conjunction with the High Exhaust Temperature, Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF), and Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Warning Lights.

CONTROLS - Guide to the Warning Symbols

88 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

3

Engine, Check Engine

Illuminates when a non emissions related problem exists, but the vehicle can still be safely driven. Vehicle should be serviced to correct the problem but the situation should not be considered an emergency.

Engine, Engine Block Heater

Illuminates when the engine block heater is turned on.

Engine, Low Coolant Level

Illuminates with an audible alarm indicating critically low coolant level. The vehicle must be serviced to correct the problem but the situation should not be considered an emergency.

Engine, Overspeed Air Shutdown

Illuminates when the Engine overspeed air shutdown system is activated.

Engine, Retarder (Brake)

Illuminates when the engine retarder (compression brake or exhaust brake) switch is turned on.

Engine, Stop Engine

Illuminates and an audible alarm tone will sound when a major engine system problem exists.

WARNING

If the Stop Engine warning light illumi- nates, it means you have a serious en- gine system problem. This should be considered an emergency. You should stop the vehicle as safely as possible and turn OFF the ignition. The vehicle must be serviced and the problem cor- rected before driving again. Failure to comply may result in death, personal injury, equipment or property damage.

Engine Wait-to-Start Light This warning icon will appear when the system needs some time before attempting to start the engine. The light will illuminate at key ON, and will stay on for a period of up to 30 seconds.

CONTROLS - Guide to the Warning Symbols

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 89

3

NOTE

The length of time the 'Wait-To-Start' lamp remains illuminated depends on the ambient temperature. The lower the ambient temperature, the longer the lamp will be illuminated.

Once the Wait-to-Start light turns off, turn the key to the starting position to start the engine. You may see this appear if the system has detected a situation where the starter is too hot and needs to cool down. Alternatively, you may see it when the engine grid heater is on and needs some time to warm up.

NOTE

Some engines are equipped with an engine starting motor protection fea- ture. If the starting motor is engaged for 30 or more seconds, without the engine starting, the starter will be locked out from operating, allowing for proper cooling of the starting motor. During this time, the 'Wait-To-Start' lamp will flash for 2 minutes. Once the

lamp stops flashing, the starting motor will be allowed to function.

Emissions, Engine Derate

Fifth Wheel Slide Unlocked

Illuminates when fifth wheel slide switch is activated. Indicates fifth wheel can move.

WARNING

DO NOT move the fifth wheel while the tractor-trailer is in motion. Your load could shift suddenly, causing you to lose control of the vehicle. Never operate the vehicle with the switch in the UNLOCK position. Always inspect the fifth wheel after you lock the switch to be sure the fifth wheel slide lock is engaged. Failure to comply may result

in death, personal injury, equipment or property damage.

NOTE

Vehicles having an air slide fifth wheel have a fifth wheel slider lock controlled by a switch on the instrument panel. By placing the switch in the unlock po- sition you can slide the fifth wheel to various positions to adjust weight dis- tribution.

Fifth Wheel Locked

Illuminates when the fifth wheel is in the locked position.

CONTROLS - Guide to the Warning Symbols

90 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

3

Fifth Wheel Unlocked

Illuminates when the fifth wheel is in the unlocked position. Indicates the king pin is disengaged.

Lights, High Beam

Illuminates when the high beams are on. This icon will flash with audible alarm if the headlights are left ON when the door is opened and the key switch is OFF. In addition, this icon will flash, but without an audible alarm, if there is a problem with the low beam headlights or the low beam headlight wiring. In such event, the high beam headlights will turn on at 50% normal brightness.

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)

Illuminates when LDW system is not able to track the vehicle's position within the lane.

NOTE

For vehicles equipped with Lane De- parture Warning, please refer to Lane Departure Warning Driver's Guide for additional information.

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) Fault

This amber warning light will appear when a fault occurs in the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system. If this occurs, the LDW feature will be disabled.

Fast Idle Control The display will show the Fast Idle Control (FIC) indicator when enabled or activated. The indicator shows the set RPM value.

See Indicators around the speedometer on page 135.

Refrigerator

Illuminates to indicate that the refrigerator is on and ignition is off.

Seat Belt Fasten

Illuminates when the ignition key is turned on as a reminder to fasten your seat belt.

Tire Inflation (TPMS)

Illuminates when tire pressures need to be checked.

CONTROLS - Guide to the Warning Symbols

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 91

3

Transmission, Auxiliary

Illuminates to indicate auxiliary transmission is in neutral.

Transmission, Check

Illuminates when transmission has recorded a fault code.

Turn Signal, Left

Blinks when the left turn signal or the hazard light function is operating.

Turn Signal, Right

Blinks when the right turn signal or the hazard light function is operating.

Optional Gauges For vehicles with a telematic navigation screen, optional gauges will be part of the screen functions. Please refer to the navigation system supplement for further details about its functions and how it works. Some vehicles may have optional analog gauges installed at the factory in place of the navigation screen.

Drive Axle Temperature Gauge (Forward and Rear)

These gauges indicate the temperature of the lubricant in your vehicle's axle(s). These temperatures will vary with the kind

of load you are carrying and the driving conditions you encounter. Maximum axle temperature may vary, depending upon the axle and type of lubricant. Very high temperatures signal a need to have your axle lubrication checked.

CAUTION

Driving with very hot temperatures in your rear drive axles can cause seri- ous damage to axle bearings and seals. Have your axle lubrication checked if you notice a sign of over- heating.

Depending on the vehicle configuration, there may be a single gauge for more than just the forward and rear driver. The icon will have an "X" over the representative axle to indicate which axle's temperature is being displayed in the gauge.

Manifold Pressure Gauge This gauge indicates the pressure in the intake manifold. The pressure in the manifold is directly related to the turbo output and is related to the engine power output.

CONTROLS - Optional Gauges

92 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

3

If the pressure indicated by your manifold pressure gauge goes down, there may be something wrong with your engine. Have it checked by a qualified service person.

Dash Switches This custom vehicle will have a wide variety of switch-controlled equipment. However, this particular vehicle may not have every switch identified in this section of the operator manual. Some air device

switches on the dash may require that the vehicle either be at a specific speed, have park brakes set, or another device to be on or off for the air device to operate. The instrument display will show information regarding what needs to change in order for the air device to operate as expected. The following table provides a complete list of icons that may be found on the switch.

Title Standard or Optional

Axle, Differential Lock - Tridrive OPT

Axle, Diff-Lock - Dual OPT

Axle, Diff-Lock - Forward Rear OPT

Axle, Diff-Lock - Rear Rear OPT

Axle, Diff-Lock - Single Rear OPT

Axle, Diff-Lock - Steer OPT

Axle, Inter-Axle Differential Locked (Tandem) OPT

Axle, Two Speed OPT

Back Up Alarm Mute OPT

Batteries, Low Voltage Disconnect (LVD) STD

Brakes, ABS Off-Road OPT

Brakes, Parking Brake Valve STD

CONTROLS - Dash Switches

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 93

3

Title Standard or Optional

Brake, Trailer Hand STD

Cab Dimmer Switch STD

Dump Truck Gate OPT

Electric Steer, Assist Effort OPT

Engine, Fan Override OPT

Engine, Heater OPT

Engine, Overspeed Air Shutdown (Test) OPT

Engine, Overspeed Air Shutdown (Manual) OPT

Engine, Remote Throttle OPT

Engine, Under Hood Air Intake OPT

Exhaust, Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Regeneration STD

Fifth Wheel Slide OPT

Fuel Heater OPT

Generic Air, Accessory OPT

Generic, Spare OPT

Ignition Key Switch STD

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) Disable OPT

Lights, Auto Headlamp STD

CONTROLS - Dash Switches

94 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

3

Title Standard or Optional

Lights, Auxiliary OPT

Lights, Beacon OPT

Lights, Daytime Running (Override) OPT

Lights, Dome STD

Lights, Exterior Lights Self Test STD

Lights, Flood OPT

Lights, Flood ISO 3732 Spare OPT

Lights, Fog OPT

Lights, Hazard STD

Lights, Headlight and Parking Lights STD

Lights, Marker/Clearance/Cab STD

Lights, Marker/Clearance/Trailer OPT

Lights, Park Light STD

Lights, Spot OPT

Mud and Snow Traction Control STD

Pintle Hook OPT

Power Take-off (PTO) OPT

Power Take-off (PTO), Forward OPT

CONTROLS - Dash Switches

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 95

3

Title Standard or Optional

Power Take-off (PTO), Rear OPT

Suspension, Air Retention OPT

Suspension, Axle, Pusher OPT

Suspension, Axle, Tag OPT

Suspension, Dump OPT

Suspension, Third Axle Lift OPT

Trailer Air Supply STD

Trailer, Axle (3rd Axle) Lift OPT

Trailer, Axle Lift Forward OPT

Trailer, Axle Lift Rear OPT

Trailer, Belly Dump OPT

Trailer, Belly Dump Gate Center OPT

Trailer, Belly Dump Gate Front OPT

Trailer, Belly Dump Gate Rear OPT

Trailer, Dump Gate OPT

Trailer, Hotline OPT

Trailer, Suspension Air Dump OPT

Transmission, Transfer Case OPT

CONTROLS - Dash Switches

96 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

3

Title Standard or Optional

Transmission, Transfer Case Two-Speed OPT

Winch Clutch OPT

Axle, Differential Lock - Tridrive

Tridrives will have these axle differential lock controls and are 2 separate switches. FRONT will control the forward rear and REAR will control the center/rear-rear axle differential. In addition, a vehicle with Tridrive will have an interaxle differential lock switch.

Axle, Diff-Lock - Dual

Turn switch on to engage Front and Rear Axle Diff Lock.

Axle, Diff-Lock - Forward Rear

Turn switch on to engage Forward Rear Axle Diff Lock.

Axle, Diff-Lock - Rear Rear

Turn switch on to engage Rear Rear Axle Diff Lock.

Axle, Diff-Lock - Single Rear

Turn switch on to engage Single Rear Axle Diff Lock.

Axle, Diff-Lock - Steer

Turn switch on to engage Front Axle Diff Lock.

CONTROLS - Dash Switches

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 97

3

Axle, Inter-Axle Differential Locked (Tandem)

Turn switch on to engage Inter-Axle Differential Lock.

Axle, Two Speed

If equipped, the two speed axle switch allows you to select axle high and low ranges. The low range (Off) provides maximum torque for operating off-highway. The high range (On) is a faster ratio for highway speeds.

Back Up Alarm Mute

Turn switch on to mute Back Up Alarm.

NOTE

The mute function use is discouraged. Only use mute when legally required.

Batteries, Low Voltage Disconnect (LVD)

If your vehicle is equipped with a Low Voltage Disconnect (LVD) feature, the LVD is integrated into the main load center.

Brakes, ABS Off-Road

Turn switch on to engage ABS Off-Road mode.

Brakes, Parking Brake Valve

Pull yellow knob to activate parking brakes.

Brake, Trailer Hand

This dash mounted switch provides air pressure to apply the trailer brakes only. It operates independently of the foot treadle valve.

Cab Dimmer Switch

This switch is used to alter the brightness of the instrument panel lights.

CONTROLS - Dash Switches

98 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

3

NOTE

The Headlight Switch is an ON or OFF switch. The panel lights are on full in- tensity during the day and dim when headlights are on.

Dump Truck Gate

Turn switch on to open Dump Truck Gate.

Engine, Fan Override

The optional engine fan switch allows you to control the engine fan manually or automatically.

Engine, Heater

Turn switch on to activate the Engine Heater.

Engine, Remote Throttle

Turn switch on to activate Remote Throttle Control.

Engine, Overspeed Air Shutdown (Manual)

Turn switch on to engage the Engine Overspeed Air Shutdown system. A system reset will be required before re- starting engine. See EOAS system manufacturer's instruction manual for details.

Engine, Overspeed Air Shutdown (Test)

Hold down switch and increase engine RPM to test that Engine Overspeed Air Shutdown system functions correctly. A system reset will be required before restarting engine. See EOAS system manufacturer's instruction manual for details.

Engine, Under Hood Air Intake This switch opens a door in the engine air filter housing so that the air is taken from under the hood instead of outside air. This switch can be useful when starting the vehicle in cold weather conditions.

CONTROLS - Dash Switches

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 99

3

CAUTION

Only operate the under hood intake air switch when outside temperatures are below 32F (0C). Engaging the under hood air intake while temperatures are above freezing may result in engine damage.

Exhaust, Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Regeneration

Manually controls the diesel particulate filter (DPF) regeneration process. Refer to Engine Aftertreatment Controls Operator's Manual for additional information.

Fifth Wheel Slide

Turn switch on to unlock Fifth Wheel Slide mechanism. The switch is guarded to protect you from accidentally activating or releasing the lock.

WARNING

DO NOT move the fifth wheel while the tractor-trailer is in motion. Your load could shift suddenly, causing you to lose control of the vehicle. Never operate the vehicle with the switch in the UNLOCK position. Always inspect the fifth wheel after you lock the switch to be sure the fifth wheel slide lock is engaged. Failure to comply may result in death, personal injury, equipment or property damage.

NOTE

Vehicles having an air slide fifth wheel have a fifth wheel slider lock controlled by a switch on the instrument panel. By placing the switch in the unlock po- sition you can slide the fifth wheel to various positions to adjust weight dis- tribution.

Fuel Heater

Turn switch on to activate Fuel Heater.

Generic Air, Accessory

Provides accessory air to the end of the frame connection when switch is turned on.

NOTE

The generic air accessory switch is de- signed by the original equipment man- ufacturer to reset when the ignition power is turned off. When ignition is turned off, this circuit will exhaust air pressure.

Generic, Spare SPARE

Turn switch on to power customer installed accessory.

CONTROLS - Dash Switches

100 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

3

Ignition Key Switch The ignition key switch located to the left of the steering column has four positions: ACC (Accessories), OFF, ON, and START. See also Ignition Key Switch on page 107.

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) Disable

The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) Disable switch disables both audible and visual Lane Departure Warning alerts for 15 minutes (or until the next ignition key cycle) after which time LDW will automatically re-enable. This switch will not affect any audible or visual alerts for the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) feature. This switch lights up green when active.

NOTE

Disabling Lane Departure Warning (LDW) will also disable Lane Keeping

Assist until the LDW system is re-ena- bled.

Lights, Automatic

The Automatic Light switch - when activated - will illuminate the exterior lights of the vehicle when a low light condition is detected, and will extinguish the lights when the lighting conditions brighten. (Do NOT confuse this feature with "automatic high beam control"). When Parked with the ignition switch in the ON position and Auto Switch enabled, the vehicle will turn on the following lights when a low light condition is detected: Park Lamps Tail Lamps License plate lamps When Driving and Auto Switch enabled, the vehicle will turn on the following lights when a low light condition is detected: Low Beam Headlamps Park Lamps Position Lamps Tail Lamps

Marker Lamps Clearance lamps Identification lamps License plate lamps.

Lights, Auxiliary

Turn switch on for Auxiliary Lights.

Lights, Beacon

Turn switch on for Beacon Light(s).

Lights, Daytime Running (Override)

This switch overrides the normal operation of the Day Time Running Light (DRL) system. During normal operation, the DRL

CONTROLS - Dash Switches

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 101

3

will turn on lights when the headlights are turned off, engine is on, and the park brakes are disengaged. The override switch will turn the DRL off in these instances. The DRL is also turned off when the headlights are turned ON.

WARNING

DO NOT use daytime running lights (DRL) during periods of darkness or reduced visibility. DO NOT use DRL as a substitute for headlights or other lights during operations that require lighting of your vehicle. Failure to com- ply may result in personal injury, prop- erty damage or death.

If the headlight switch is turned OFF, the DRL system engages automatically after the engine starts and you release the parking brake. If the headlight switch is ON, the DRL system is overridden, and headlights operate normally. Also, the DRL is temporarily turned off during engine cranking.

Lights, Dome

Turn switch on for Cab Dome Lights.

lights, Exterior lights Self Test

This switch will begin a sequence of turning on and off exterior lights so that the operator can verify functionality. See Exterior Lighting Self-Test on page 107.

Lights, Flood

Turn switch on for cab mounted Flood Lights.

Lights, Flood (Spare)

Turn switch on for trailer mounted Flood Lights.

Lights, Fog

Turn switch on for Fog Lights.

NOTE

Across the U.S.A. and Canada, State/ Provincial requirements vary as to when high beams and fog lights can and cannot be used together. Some states allow only four lights to be used together, while some allow more. How your lights are arranged will affect whether you can operate headlights and fog lights concurrently always comply with the state or provincial re- quirements where you are driving.

CONTROLS - Dash Switches

102 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

3

Lights, Hazard

This switch operates the emergency flashers. With the switch in the ON position, the emergency flasher makes all four turn signals (front and rear) flash simultaneously. The flasher works independently of the ignition switch. You should always use the flasher if the vehicle is disabled or parked under emergency conditions.

WARNING

Use your Hazard Warning Light Sys- tem any time you have to stop off the road or on the side of the road, day or night. A hard-to-see vehicle can result in an injury or accident. Another vehi- cle could run into you if you do not set your flashers and follow the placement of emergency signals per FMCSR 392.22.

Lights, Headlight

Turn switch for park/marker lights and headlights. When the headlights are ON, the dash lights, side, and tail lights are also on. Headlights will turn on if the windshield wipers are turned on. Manually turning the headlights on and then off will override this function until the next time the vehicle is turned on.

CAUTION

If you have confirmed there is a prob- lem in the low beam wiring circuit, pro- ceed with caution to the next available exit/turnoff and safely pull your vehicle completely off the road and call for as- sistance. Driving your vehicle with the headlamps on high beam (at reduced intensity) for a prolonged period could lead to an injury accident. Contact your nearest dealer to have the prob- lem corrected as soon as possible.

If the vehicle has LED headlights, the operator can turn on the mirror heat switch

to heat up the lens of the headlights and remove any condensation. See Door Mounted Mirror Controls on page 113 for the mirror heat switch location.

Lights, Marker/Clearance

Turn switch on to control Cab and Vehicle Marker/Clearance lights.

NOTE

An interrupt switch for the trailer mark- er lights is mounted on the end of the turn signal lever.

Lights, Marker/Clearance/Trailer

Turn switch on to control trailer marker/ clearance lights separately from the vehicle marker/clearance lights.

CONTROLS - Dash Switches

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 103

3

Lights, Park Light

Turn switch on for Park Lights. When the Park Lights are on the dash lights, side and tail lights are also on.

Lights, Spot

Turn switch on for Spot Light.

Mud and Snow Traction Control

Momentarily push switch in to engage Traction Control (TC).

Pintle Hook

Turn switch on to remove the slack from the Tow Hook.

Power Take-off (PTO)

This vehicle may be equipped with a dash mounted switch that controls PTO engagement/disengagement. When the operator activates the switch for the PTO, the status indicator light (located on the switch) will immediately illuminate even though PTO engagement may not have occurred. If the PTO is engaged and the operator turns the switch OFF, the PTO status indicator light (located on the switch) will go out immediately even though PTO disengagement may not have occurred.

NOTE

Actual PTO engagement/disengage- ment may be delayed momentarily since it is controlled by the air system and mechanical movement.

CAUTION

Increasing engine rpm before the PTO is actually engaged could prevent the PTO from engaging and/or cause PTO damage.

Power Take-off (PTO), Forward

Your vehicle may be equipped with a dash mounted switch that controls forward PTO engagement/disengagement.

Power Take-off (PTO), Rear

CONTROLS - Dash Switches

104 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

3

Your vehicle may be equipped with a dash mounted switch that controls the rear PTO engagement/disengagement.

Suspension, Axle, Pusher

Turn switch on to lower Single or Forward Pusher Axle.

Suspension, Axle, Tag

Turn switch on to lower tag axle.

Suspension, Dump

Turn switch on to deflate suspension air bags. The switch is guarded to protect you from accidentally deflating the suspension.

WARNING

DO NOT operate the Air Suspension Deflate Switch (Dump Valve) while driving. Sudden deflation while your vehicle is moving can affect handling and control and could lead to an acci- dent. Use this switch only when your vehicle is not moving.

CAUTION

Operating a vehicle with air suspen- sion bags either overinflated or under- inflated may cause damage to drive- line components. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h). Failure to comply may result in equipment dam- age.

Suspension, Air Retention

Suspension, Third Axle Lift

Turn switch on to raise Third Axle.

Trailer Air Supply

The red octagonal knob controls the air supply to the trailer.

Trailer, Axle (3rd Axle) Lift

Turn switch ON to lift 3rd Trailer Axle.

CONTROLS - Dash Switches

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 105

3

Trailer, Axle Lift Forward

Turn switch on to lift Forward Trailer Axle.

Trailer, Axle Lift Rear

Turn switch on to lift Rear Trailer Axle.

Trailer, Belly Dump

Turn switch on to open Trailer Belly Dump.

Trailer, Dump Gate

Turn switch on to open Trailer Dump Gate.

Trailer, Belly Dump Gate Center

Turn switch on to open Trailer Center Belly Dump Gate.

Trailer, Belly Dump Gate Front

Turn switch on to open Trailer Front Belly Dump Gate.

Trailer, Belly Dump Gate Rear

Turn switch on to open Trailer Rear Belly Dump Gate.

Trailer, Hotline

Turn switch on to supply electrical power to trailer accessories.

Trailer, Suspension Air Dump

Turn switch on to deflate trailer air suspension.

Transmission, Transfer Case

Turn switch on to shift the transfer case.

CONTROLS - Dash Switches

106 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

3

Transmission, Transfer Case Two- Speed

Turn switch on to shift the two-speed transfer case.

Winch Clutch

Turn switch on to engage winch clutch.

Ignition Key Switch The ignition key switch located to the left of the steering column has four positions: ACC (Accessories), OFF, ON, and START.

OFF: In this position all accessories are OFF (except those listed below) and you can remove the key.

The following lights and accessories have power when the key is in the OFF position:

brake lights emergency hazard flasher dome and courtesy lamps

(on doors) electric horn cigarette lighter tail lights marker lamps headlights radio station memory instrument lights auxiliary power

instrument panel memory settings

ACC (Accessory):

With the key in this position you can play the radio, defrost mirrors (if equipped with mirror heat) or use other accessories.

ON: In the ON position all circuits are energized. Panel warning lights will light and the buzzer will sound until (1) the engine is started, (2) normal oil operating pressure is reached, and (3) air brake system pressure is above 65 psi (441 kPa). In this position, the ignition key cannot be removed.

START: Turn the key to this position to start your engine. Release the key after the engine has started.

Exterior Lighting Self-Test When the feature is engaged, via a switch on the dash, it will illuminate the:

Park lights Side marker lights Hazard/turn signals Low beam headlamps First set of fog/driving lights

CONTROLS - Ignition Key Switch

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 107

3

The test will turn those lights off and then illuminate the:

Park lights Side marker lights High beam headlamps Stop/Brake lights

After turning these lights off, the system will resume testing the first set of lights. The light test will eventually stop on its own. The operator may interrupt the test by turning the vehicle off or pressing the switch a second time while the test is running. The operator can verify light functionality by visibly watching the lights from outside the vehicle or by observing the instrument cluster for lighting-related warnings. The ELST will also start the Systems Check (Systems Check on page 37).

Test the Exterior Lights To start the Exterior Light Self Test (ELST) feature:

1. Park the vehicle and set the parking brakes.

2. Insert the key into the ignition and turn the key to the ON position. Allow the vehicle to run through bulb check.

3. Press the momentary switch on the dash to start the ELST.

Steering Column Controls 1

3

2 1. Engine brake (optional

transmission shifter)

2. Tilt/telescope lever 3. Turn signal/wiper/lights

The turn signal lever is mounted on the left side of the steering column. The lever controls several functions: turn signal, high beam, and windshield wiper control. The turn signal lever will only operate when the key is in the ignition in the ACC position.

Tilt/Telescoping Steering Wheel Depending on your vehicles configuration, you may have either a tilt/telescoping feature.

The tilt feature allows forward and rearward movement of the wheel.

The telescoping feature allows you to move the wheel up and down.

WARNING

Make all adjustments to the steering mechanism while the vehicle is stop- ped. Adjusting the Tilt Telescoping Steering Wheel while the vehicle is in motion could cause loss of control. You would not be able to steer proper- ly and could have an accident resulting in death or personal injury.

CONTROLS - Steering Column Controls

108 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

3

How to Spray Windshield Washer Fluid This vehicle is equipped with a function to wash the windshield and simultaneously engage the wipers.

CAUTION

If the electric pump is operated for a long period (more than 15 seconds) with a dry reservoir, the pump motor may be damaged.

If you need to use the windshield washer: 1. Push the Turn Signal Lever Outer

Knob in.

Press and hold will activate the washer fluid and wipers.

Instant press and release will activate the washer fluid only.

Operate the Windshield Wipers This vehicle is equipped with a two speed, intermittent windshield wiper system. The windshield wiper system is integrated with the exterior lights so that the low beam headlights will turn on when the windshield wipers turn on.

WARNING

Clean blades regularly with a damp cloth to remove road film and wax buildup. DO NOT drive with worn or dirty wiper blades. They can reduce visibility, making driving hazardous which may lead to an accident result- ing in death or personal injury.

CAUTION

DO NOT use antifreeze or engine coolant in the windshield washer res- ervoir, damage to seals and other components will result.

To override this function, turn the headlights on and then off again. Permanently overriding this functionality is attainable via the Settings Menu in the

instrument cluster display. Go to Settings > Wiper Interlock and turn this value to OFF. Avoid running the wiper blades over a dry windshield to prevent scratching the glass. Spray on washer fluid first. A scratched windshield will reduce visibility. A seven-position rotary wiper switch (located on the turn signal lever) operates the windshield wipers and washer. If you need to use the windshield wipers:

1. Rotate the end of the turn signal lever to change the wiper mode from off to on.

2. Rotate the outer knob of the turn stalk lever to adjust the wiper speed.

Four levels of intermittent speeds

Low wiper speed High wiper speed

CONTROLS - Steering Column Controls

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 109

3

How to Flash Marker and Clearance Lights A button on the end of the Signal Turn stalk will momentarily flash the marker and clearance lights when pushed.

How to Momentarily Flash High Beams The "flash to pass" high beam function is operated by the same steering column lever for the turn signals. The high beam flash to pass will work if the headlights are not on.

1. Gently push the turn signal lever, away from the steering wheel.

2. The lever will automatically return when the lever is released.

The blue indicator light in the instrument panel will momentarily turn ON and the

high beams will flash. The high beams will not remain on if the lever is still pressed.

NOTE

Continued pressing of the high beam flash will not keep the high beams on.

How to Turn on High Beams The high beam function is operated by the same steering column lever for the turn signals. High beams will not turn on if the headlights are turned off.

1. Gently pull the Turn Signal lever toward the steering wheel until you hear the switch click and the beam changes.

2. To return to previous beam, pull the Turn Signal lever towards the steering wheel again.

The blue indicator light in the instrument panel will turn ON when the high beams turn on.

How to Use the Turn Signal The lever-action turn signal/high beam switch is located on the left side of the steering column. The ignition key must be turned to ON for the signal/switch to operate.

NOTE

If the vehicle turn signals and turn sig- nal indicators in the dash gauge clus- ter ever begin flashing at an accelerat- ed rate (115 cycles per minute) when the turn signal lever is in the OFF (center) position, or when a Right/Left turn has been selected, the problem may be related to a failed turn signal switch or turn signal module. In either case, the problem is not a failed bulb. Contact your nearest authorized deal- er to have the problem corrected as soon as possible.

1. Push the Signal stalk lever up to engage the RIGHT turn signal and

CONTROLS - Steering Column Controls

110 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

3

down to engage the LEFT turn signal.

2. Release the signal stalk. 3. The turn signal will cancel when

the turn is complete. An audible beep is associated with each time a turn indicator is activated.

WARNING

After you complete a turn, shut the system off by returning the lever to the "OFF" (center) position. Failure to shut off a turn signal could confuse other drivers and result in an accident. An indicator lamp in the instrument panel will flash until the turn signal is turned off.

How to Adjust Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column

WARNING

Make all adjustments to the steering mechanism while the vehicle is stop- ped. Adjusting the Tilt Telescoping Steering Wheel while the vehicle is in motion could cause loss of control. You would not be able to steer proper- ly and could have an accident resulting in death or personal injury.

1. Push and hold the Tilt Telescopinglever down fully.

2. Push or pull the steering wheel to the desired height and angle.

3. Push the Tilt Telescoping lever back into the locked position.

Controls on the Right Hand of the Steering Column The lever on the right hand side of the steering column will operate the engine brake for vehicles with manual transmissions and Allison Automatic transmissions.

Vehicles with a PACCAR Transmission This vehicle may be equipped with the PACCAR Transmission. The lever on the right hand side of the steering column will operate the transmission functions in addition to operating the engine brake.

CONTROLS - Steering Column Controls

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 111

3

1. Transmission D - N - R Function 2. Up (+) and Down (-) Shift and Low

Mode 3. Engine Brake and Max Mode 4. Manual (M)/Automatic (A) Mode

Button

Steering Wheel Controls

CAUTION

Under no circumstances should you attempt to service the steering wheel, clockspring, or any of the electrical wir- ing in the multiplex system, or any steering components (steering column, steering driveline or steering gear). Tampering with these components may result in an inoperable multiplex system.

The steering wheel contains controls for commonly used functions so that the operator does not have to take their hands off of the steering wheel to operate. These controls are also used to interface with the display.

21

1. Left switch pod 2. Right switch pod

Switches on the left side of the horn pad, including the toggle switch, manage vehicle speed functions, cruise control, and optional features such as the variable road speed limiter (VRSL), adaptive cruise control (ACC), and predictive cruise control (PCC). See Cruise Control on page 142. Switches on the right side control infotainment (see Cab Accessories on page 124) and navigate and configure the instrument cluster (see ) (see Peterbilt Digital Display Controls on page 62).

CONTROLS - Steering Wheel Controls

112 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

3

City Horn Depressing the horn pad in the center of the steering wheel activates the electric horn. Look for this symbol on the center pad of the steering wheel. To use the electric horn, press the button in the center of the steering wheel, which is the standard location for electric horns. Your vehicle may be equipped with optional air horns. To operate, pull on the lanyard extending from the overhead header panel.

Door Mounted Mirror Controls If your vehicle is equipped with power mirrors, the mirror controls will be located on the driver-side door pad. Mirrors can be adjusted in four directions. To provide good visibility, adjust the mirror so the side of your vehicle appears in the inboard part of the mirror.

NOTE

If your vehicle is equipped with digital side-view mirrors (option) refer to the PACCAR Digital Vision System with Mirrors operator's manual.

1. Mirror heat

2. Mirror adjust 3. Left or right mirror adjust selector 4. Window controls 5. Door lock control

Mirror Heat Switch Your vehicle may be equipped with optional heated mirrors. Mirror heat is controlled by the mirror heat switch button. If the vehicle has optional hood-mounted heated mirrors, this switch will also activate heat to those mirrors. If the vehicles has optional LED headlights, this switch will also activate heat to those headlights.

Power Mirror Switch If your vehicle is equipped with power mirrors, the directional controls for both mirrors are located near the top of the driver-side door trim pad.

Power Door Lock Switch Power door lock rocker switches are located on the door pads. To lock or unlock both cab doors as well as a sleeper door, depress any door lock switch at the end that displays a closed or open padlock symbol, respectively, on the switch face.

CONTROLS - Door Mounted Mirror Controls

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 113

3

Power Window Switch Power window rocker switches are located on the door pads. Depress the switch to open the window or pull up on the switch to close the window. Release the switch to stop window movement. The driver-side window has an express down feature. Pushing on the switch all the way down until the switch bumps will activate the express down feature. Release the button and the window will continue to open until it is completely open.

How to Use Power Mirror Adjustment Switches

WARNING

Adjusting the mirrors while driving may cause you to take your eyes off the road, which could result in an accident. Adjust all mirrors before driving. Fail- ure to do so could lead to serious in- jury or property damage.

WARNING

Convex mirrors can distort images and make objects appear smaller and far- ther away than they really are. You could have an accident if you are too close to another vehicle or other ob- ject. Keep plenty of space between your vehicle and others when you turn or change lanes. Remember that other objects are closer than they may ap- pear.

1. Move the Mirror Selector switch (3) to the right or left from the neutral center position to select the desired mirror for adjustment.

2. Depress the Mirror Directional Control pad (2) in one of its four arrow directions to adjust the mirror in/out or up/down.

3. To provide good visibility, adjust the mirror so the side of your vehicle appears in the inboard part of the mirror.

4. After mirror adjustments have been completed, return the Mirror Selector switch back (3) to the center (neutral) position to prevent

unintentional adjustments to the mirrors.

Heating and Air Conditioning This vehicle's heating and air conditioning system operates in four distinct modes: manual, automatic, semi-automatic, and maximum defrost. Each mode provides the driver with the greatest level of comfort and convenience. The recommended mode for all conditions that do not require windshield defrosting is the automatic mode. This mode is capable of maintaining cab comfort under various driving conditions without driver interaction. The cab heater and air conditioner controls are located together in the center of the dash just to the right of the steering column. The sleeper heater and air conditioner controls are located in the sleeper cabinet.

CONTROLS - Heating and Air Conditioning

114 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

3

WARNING

DO NOT drive with visibility reduced by fog, condensation, or frost on the windshield. Your view may be ob- scured, which may result in death, per- sonal injury, equipment or property damage. For clear visibility and safe driving it is extremely important for you to follow the instructions pertaining to the function and use of the ventilation/ heating and defogging/defrosting sys- tem. If in doubt, consult your dealer. Maximum heating output and fast de- frosting can be obtained only after the engine has reached operating temper- ature.

WARNING

Exhaust fumes from the engine con- tain carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas. DO NOT breathe the en- gine exhaust gas. A poorly maintained, damaged or corroded exhaust system can allow carbon monoxide to enter the cab. Entry of carbon monoxide into the cab is also possible from other ve-

hicles nearby. Failure to properly main- tain your vehicle could cause carbon monoxide to enter the cab, resulting in death or personal injury.

WARNING

Never idle your vehicle for prolonged periods of time if you sense that ex- haust fumes are entering the cab. In- vestigate the cause of the fumes and correct it as soon as possible. If the vehicle must be driven under these conditions, drive only with the windows open. Failure to repair the source of the exhaust fumes may result in death, personal injury, equipment or property damage.

CAUTION

Do not stay in the vehicle with the en- gine running or idling for more than 10 minutes with the vehicle's Heater and A/C ventilation system in RECIRC or at LOW FAN SPEED. Even with the ventilation system on, running the en- gine while parked or stopped for pro-

longed periods of time is not recom- mended.

NOTE

Keep the engine exhaust system and the vehicle's cab ventilation system properly maintained. It is recommend- ed that the vehicle's exhaust system and cab be inspected (1) By a compe- tent technician every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) (2) Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system (3) Whenever the exhaust sys- tem, underbody, or cab is damaged.

NOTE

If you are required to idle your vehicle for long periods of time, install an aux- iliary heater or automatic idle control. These auxiliary devices can reduce fuel consumption and save you mon- ey.

CONTROLS - Heating and Air Conditioning

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 115

3

NOTE

If you are parked next to idling vehi- cles, move your vehicle or do not stay in your vehicle for prolonged periods of time.

Air Conditioner Controls

1

9 8 7 6

2 3 4 5 1. Fan control Dial 2. AUTO mode button 3. Temperature control

dial 4. MAX defrost button 5. Air distribution dial 6. Sleeper override

button (for vehicles with a sleeper)

7. Temperature sensor 8. Air conditioner

button 9. Outside air/

Recirculation air button

CONTROLS - Heating and Air Conditioning

116 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

3

Air Conditioning Functions Short Description: These symbols for the air conditioner operate various system functions.

Symbols for the air conditioning control panel

Image Function

The source of air entering the cab can be set to either outside air or recirculation air using the button inside the fan speed control dial. Recirculated air is automatically selected in defrost modes.

The fan speed is adjusted by rotating the dial clockwise to increase speed or counterclockwise to decrease speed.

Automatic air conditioner function

Image Function

The button inside the temperature control dial engages the A/C compressor. When activated the indicator on the button will illuminate. During AUTO mode, the A/C button indicator will remain illuminated at all times even though the compressor may be cycling.

Max defrost function

Power to the sleeper HVAC unit can be toggled using the button inside the air distribution dial. When activated, the indicator on the button illuminates. The sleeper HVAC unit will function to the settings of the sleeper control.

Floor Vents

Image Function

Defrost Vents (and Fresh air intake)

Panel and Floor Vents

Panel Vents

Floor and Defrost Vents (and Fresh air intake)

How to Manually Control the Cab Air Conditioner

Temperature Control Set Point

The cab temperature is set using the temperature control dial. The operating range is 60F (16C) and 84F (28C). Adjustments are made in two degree increments.

Air Conditioner

The button inside the temperature control dial engages the A/C compressor. When activated the indicator on the button will illuminate. During AUTO mode, the A/C button indicator will remain illuminated at all times even though the compressor may be cycling.

CONTROLS - Heating and Air Conditioning

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 117

3

NOTE

Fan Control Dial must also be in the ON position for A/C to be on. A/C en- gages automatically in AUTO, defrost, and floor/defrost.

The air conditioner defaults to Manual mode when turned on. The fan speed, air temperature, and air outlets are selected using the dials on the controller.

1. To adjust the fan speed, turn the Fan Control dial clockwise to increase speed or counterclockwise to decrease speed.

2. To adjust the temperature setting, turn the Temperature Control dial to the desired temperature. The system automatically adjusts the outlet air temperature to achieve the desired cab temperature.

3. Push the Air Conditioner button if the air temperature needs to be colder, this button will manually turn on the compressor

4. To adjust the air distribution, turn the Air Distribution dial to distribute cab air as indicated by the dial graphics.

5. Press the Recirculation button to use cab air instead of outside air.

The temperature of the air from the vents will fluctuate as the vehicle works to achieve the chosen cab temperature. When idling for short periods of time, keep the fan ON and turn OFF recirculation. For vehicles with a sleeper, the cab control can be used to activate/deactivate the sleeper HVAC using the button inside the mode dial.

Auto Mode for the Air Conditioner The Auto Mode will manipulate the air distribution, air temperature, fan speed, A/C compressor, and cab air recirculation to achieve the comfort level selected on the temperature dial. Depending on the specific environmental conditions, the air temperature can be slightly higher or lower than the set point. This is a normal function of the AUTO mode and is not to be mistaken for a malfunctioning system. The

button that enables automatic mode is labeled AUTO.

The system will remain in automatic mode until the driver adjusts the dials on the control. Adjust the temperature knob and the system will respond to obtain the selected comfort level as quickly as possible.

The cab temperature is set using the temperature control dial. The operating range is 60F (16C) and 84F (28C). Adjustments are made in two degree increments. The AUTO function uses a sun light sensor to measure the amount of sunlight entering the cab. This sensor is located at the base of the windshield on the drivers side of the instrument panel. Do not block this sensor.

Semi-automatic Mode During AUTO mode, the operator may override any setting and operate in a semi-

CONTROLS - Heating and Air Conditioning

118 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

3

automatic mode. This can be done via the dials and/or buttons on the HVAC control. In Semi-automatic mode, the AUTO button indicator will cease to be illuminated. Instead, the indicator of the adjusted setting will illuminate. For example, if the driver adjusts the fan dial while in AUTO mode, the fan dial indicator will illuminate and fan speed will adjust to the setting of the dial. However, the temperature and air outlet settings will continue to function automatically. Similarly, if user adjusts the air distribution setting while in AUTO mode, the air distribution dial indicator will illuminate and the distribution will adjust to the setting of the dial. The fan and temperature settings will continue to function automatically.

Economy Function An economy function is also available in Semi-automatic mode. In this mode, the system will operate in AUTO mode without the use of the A/C compressor. The operator may select economy by initiating AUTO mode and then pressing the A/C button to disengage the compressor. The indicators for A/C compressor and AUTO mode do not illuminate while operating in economy mode.

How to Operate Automatic Cab Air Conditioner Follow these steps to activate the Auto Mode:

1. Press the AUTO button. 2. Rotate theTemperature Control

dial to the desired temperature. The system will achieve the comfort level associated with the temperature selected. Cab temperature can be slightly higher or lower than the selected temperature, which is a normal when in AUTO mode and should not be mistaken for a system malfunction.

MAX Defrost Mode The heating and air conditioning system provides for one touch windshield defrosting. Certain driving conditions will cause fog or ice to form on the windshield. By pressing the MAX defrost button, the system will automatically adjust the blower speed, recirculation, air temperature, and air outlet distribution to maximize clearing of the windshield. The system will remain in this mode until the driver presses the button again or adjusts the dials.

The air temperature in MAX defrost mode will be set to the warmest temperature setting. This setting helps to clear the windshield of ice and fog more quickly. Outside air mode and the air conditioner compressor are also active to maximize performance. The A/C compressor and recirculation switches are disabled in MAX Defrost.

Sleeper Control Panel Vehicles with optional sleeper units will have a control panel next to the bunk to

CONTROLS - Heating and Air Conditioning

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 119

3

operate various functions from the comfort of the sleeper bed. Sleeper Control Panel

1

2

3

4

5

6

10

9

8

7

1. Inverter Control Module (Depending on options selected)

2. Point Light Switch (Depending on options selected)

3. Cab Door Lock Switch

4. 12V Power Port OR Cigarette Lighter (Depending on options selected)

5. 12V Power Port 6. 12V Power Port OR USB Charging

Port (Depending on options selected)

7. Digital Alarm Clock OR Digital Alarm Clock with Sleeper Audio Controls (Depending on options selected)

8. Dome Light Switch 9. HVAC Controls 10. SmartAir/Fuel Fired Heater

Controls (Depending on options selected)

Optional alert switch not shown.

Alert Switch Alert Switch

The alert switch is an optional switch mounted in the sleeper control panel. The truck's exterior lights will start flashing and the city horn will sound when this switch is pressed.

Sleeper Heater and Air Conditioner Controls (Option) Unlike the cabin air temperature controls, the sleeper temperature control will alter the air temperature based on the knob setting.

1 32

1. Air speed 2. Compressor 3. Temperature adjustment

The temperature control is not keyed to specific temperatures. Turning counterclockwise means cooler than it is now. Clockwise means warmer than it is now. Once the desired temperature is reached, the system will maintain it automatically. A separate switch on the dash HVAC unit will send power to the "bunk" or sleeper control unit. The button on the cab HVAC unit must be pressed and in the ON mode to use the sleeper controls. Power to the sleeper HVAC unit can be toggled using the button inside the air

CONTROLS - Heating and Air Conditioning

120 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

3

distribution dial. When activated, the indicator on the button illuminates. The sleeper HVAC unit will function to the settings of the sleeper control.

NOTE

On the Cab Control Unit, the sleeper enable switch must be pressed to turn ON power to the sleeper control unit. In addition, if air conditioning is re- quested in the sleeper, the air condi- tioner switch on the cab control unit will be turned ON and fan in the cab heater and air conditioning unit will be turn on low (if it was OFF) automatical- ly.

NOTE

The sensor is located on the sleeper HVAC control panel and measures the sleeper air temperature at the panel. There will be a time delay between temperature control adjustment and sleeper air temperature change. Also, be careful of any heat source which could affect the air temperature by the

sensor. Avoid hanging items (shirt, jacket, hat, etc.) which could block the airflow to the sensor.

Air Conditioner Operating Tips

CAUTION

During extreme cold weather, DO NOT blow hot defroster air onto cold wind- shields. This could crack the glass. Turn the Air Flow Control Dial to De- frost and adjust the fan speed accord- ingly while the engine warms. If the engine is already warm, move the Temperature Control Dial to "cool," then gradually increase the tempera- ture when you see that the windshield is starting to warm up. Failure to com- ply may result in equipment damage.

Defrosting and Defogging the Windshield The cab windshield and side windows can be cleared of ice and fog in two ways. The first is to use the MAX defrost mode. The second is to manually adjust the air distribution dial to the defrost position.

The manual defrost/defogging mode differs from the MAX defrost mode by allowing the driver to select an air temperature other than full heat. This allows the driver to maintain a constant cab temperature while defrosting the windshield. However, note that performance may be reduced.

Adjust the fan speed to high by rotating the fan control dial clockwise.

Set the air distribution dial to the defrost mode setting. This automatically engages the outside air and the air conditioner compressor.

Adjust the temperature dial to add heat as needed.

For maximum performance, adjust the temperature to maximum heat by rotating the temperature dial clockwise. The driver may also use the floor/defrost setting on the air control

For Maximum Cooling Adjust the fan speed to high by

rotating the fan control dial clockwise.

Set the air distribution dial to the panel setting.

CONTROLS - Heating and Air Conditioning

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 121

3

Adjust the air temperature to maximum cool by rotating the temperature dial counterclockwise.

Engage the air conditioner compressor by pressing the air conditioner button.

Set the air source to recirculation mode by pressing the outside air/ recirculation air button. The button indicator light should be illuminated.

For Maximum Heating Adjust the fan speed to high by

rotating the fan control dial clockwise.

Set the air distribution dial to the floor setting.

Adjust the air temperature to maximum heat by rotating the temperature dial clockwise.

NOTE

The engine must be at operating tem- perature for maximum heating. If oper- ating in AUTO mode, heating airflow is not allowed until the engine warms

sufficiently to provide required coolant temperatures.

Air Dehumidification The air conditioner system can be used to reduce the humidity level of the cab and clear fog from the windshield.

Adjust fan speed to the desired airflow setting.

Engage the air conditioner compressor by pressing the air conditioner button.

Set the air source to outside air mode by pressing the outside air/ recirculation air button. The button indicator light should NOT be illuminated.

NOTE

The A/C compressor may not engage when the outside temperature is below 34F (1C).

Cab Air Distribution Equal distribution of air is important in maintaining a constant cab interior temperature. For best performance, all

vents should remain open to allow AUTO mode to function properly. To maintain the selected cab temperature, AUTO mode may provide an air temperature from the vents that differs from the temperature set point. To ensure proper operation, it is recommended that the driver redirects the air instead of adjusting the temperature set point or closing the vent. The system may have difficulties in obtaining the desired cabin temperature if the temperature setting is repeatedly changed. The mode of air distribution inside the cab is set using the air distribution dial. Five icons on the dial indicate the primary mode options. The driver may also select a secondary mode in between the primary modes indicated by points on the dial. Airflow is provided to the side windows in all modes.

Outside Air/Recirculation Air Selecting air recirculation mode completely isolates the cab interior from the outside air. This mode is helpful in preventing dust, pollen, and odors from entering the cab. Additionally, recirculation mode can reduce the amount of time needed to cool down the vehicle while in maximum cool down. Note that the mode may increase fogging on the windshield. A coarse air filter is

CONTROLS - Heating and Air Conditioning

122 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

3

provided for recirculation air and is located under the IP. The outside air mode provides for 100% outside air into the cab. This mode is helpful with windshield defogging. A pleated air filter located under hood provides filtration for dust, pollen, and debris. If equipped, your vehicle may also provide for ember filtration or fine particulate filtration.

Sleeper Alarm Clock

1. Alarm - press to turn on the alarm 2. Snooze - press to snooze the

alarm bell 3. Dimmer/brighter - press to make

display brighter 4. Dimmer/darker - press to make

display less bright 5. Increase value of setting 6. Decrease value of setting 7. Select - press to choose the setting

being changed while adjusting the either the time or the alarm

8. Time and Alarm value setting - press to change time/date and or alarm setting

9. Active alarm icon - alarm is activated when this icon appears

Turning the Alarm On/Off Press the ALM button to turn the alarm on and off. The icon (9) will illuminate when the alarm is active. When time reaches the set time the alarm will ring. If the SNZ button is not pressed, the alarm will continue ringing for 15 minutes then will automatically stop. Pressing any other button except SNZ (2) will turn the alarm off.

Snooze Operation When the alarm is ringing press the SNZ button (2) to silence the alarm for 9 minutes. The small bell icon (9) will flash until the alarm is shut off. The SNZ button can be used as many times as desired.

Dim Control Operation Press the DIM+ or DIM-buttons (3, 4) to change the brightness of the display.

Set the Sleeper Alarm Clock Time

1. Press the MODE button until the screen begins flashing.

2. Use the UP and DOWN buttons to adjust the value.

3. Press the SEL button to adjust the next setting and use the UP and DOWN buttons to change the value.

4. Repeat this for all settings. The alarm clock will scroll in the following order each time you press the SEL button.

Year Month Day Hours Minutes

5. Press the MODE button once you have set the minutes which will exit and save your settings.

Set the Sleeper Clock Alarm 1. Press the MODE button twice until

the screen displays the AL icon. 2. Use the UP and DOWN buttons to

adjust the setting. 3. Press the SEL button to adjust the

next setting and use the UP and

CONTROLS - Sleeper Alarm Clock

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 123

3

DOWN buttons to change the setting.

4. Repeat this for all areas. The alarm clock will scroll in the following order each time you press the SEL button.

Hours Minutes

5. To exit and save your settings, press the MODE button once you have set the minutes.

Cab Accessories

Radio (Option) Your vehicle has one of two stereo systems. An AM/FM stereo receiver is standard equipment and may have a combination of CD, satellite radio, USB media, or Bluetooth. A stereo system integrated with GPS navigation and telematics is also available (option). For instructions on how to operate your particular radio, see the supplemental operating manual for those units. Controls for the infotainment system are located on the Right Switch Pod of the steering wheel.

Right Switch Pod (Infotainment)

1

4 3 2

5 6

1. Volume increase 2. Mute 3. Volume decrease 4. Previous/cancel 5. Media source 6. Next track

Cigarette Lighter and Ashtray (Option)

NOTE

The 12V accessory power port will op- erate with the ignition key in either the OFF, ACC (accessory), or ON position.

This vehicle comes standard with two cupholders and power ports located in the center of the dashboard. This vehicle may have the optional ashtray insert (for the cupholder) and the optional cigarette lighter instead of a power port. To operate, push in on the knob end of the lighter. After a few moments, the lighter will automatically pop out, glowing hot and ready to use. After use, insert the lighter back into the socket without pushing all the way in. The socket of the cigarette lighter may be used to operate 12V, 15 amp appliances, such as a hand spotlight or small vacuum cleaner.

CONTROLS - Cab Accessories

124 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

3

CAUTION

Do not attempt to operate a cigarette lighter using the 12V power port recep- tacle. A cigarette lighter inserted into the 12V power port will heat up and be expelled into the cab, potentially caus- ing personal injury, fire, and property damage.

WARNING

DO NOT place paper or other combus- tible substances in an ashtray, it could cause a fire. Keep all burnable materi- als, besides smoking materials, out of the ashtray. Failure to comply may re- sult in death, personal injury, equip- ment or property damage.

WARNING

DO NOT exceed the voltage/amper- age capacity of the accessory power port. It could result in a fire. Follow all warnings and instructions in the opera- tor's manual for the appliance you are

using. Failure to comply may result in death, personal injury, equipment or property damage.

Glove Box A glove box is provided to store important documents, the vehicle literature set (including this Operator's Manual), and other related materials. You can choose from a variety of other interior storage options to store your personal supplies or small tools:

center console map pocket on the door overhead storage compartments

WARNING

DO NOT drive with the glove box open, it can be dangerous. In an acci- dent or sudden stop, you or a passen- ger could be thrown against the cover and be injured. To reduce the risk of personal injury during an accident or sudden stop, keep the glove box closed when the vehicle is in motion.

WARNING

DO NOT carry loose objects in your cab, it can be dangerous. In a sudden stop, or even going over a bump in the road, they could fly through the air and strike you or a passenger. You could be injured or even killed. Secure all loose objects in the cab before moving the vehicle. Carry any heavy objects such as luggage in the exterior storage compartment and close it securely.

Appliances If your vehicle is equipped with a television, or other appliance, be sure they are compatible with your vehicle's electrical system. Secure them in the cab so they cannot come loose in a sudden stop.

CONTROLS - Cab Accessories

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 125

3

WARNING

In a sudden stop or collision a heavy object in your cab could strike you or anyone with you. You could be injured or even killed. Secure any appliance (such as a radio, or TV) you add to your sleeper or cab.

Vehicle Telematic System Your vehicle may be equipped with an onboard telematics system. This system is a Global Positioning Satellite (GPS)-linked computer. It receives input from multiple sources to locate your vehicle. Read and understand the Supplemental Telematics and Navigation System Owners Manual and observe the Warnings, Cautions, and Notes that follow before using the system.

WARNING

Verify legal weight and height restric- tions for the route suggested by the telematic system. Failure to verify height restrictions could lead to caus- ing death, personal injury or property damage. Failure to verify weight re-

strictions could result in a traffic infrac- tion.

WARNING

Only glance at the system monitor while driving. Prolonged periods of viewing while driving could result in an accident involving death or personal injury.

WARNING

DO NOT program the telematic sys- tem while driving. Always stop your ve- hicle when programming or changing the settings on the telematic system. Programming the system while driving can cause you to take your eyes off the road, which could result in an acci- dent involving death, personal injury or equipment damage.

WARNING

Regardless of how and where the nav- igation system directs you, it is your

responsibility to operate the vehicle in a safe and legal manner. Failure to comply may result in death, personal injury, equipment or property damage.

WARNING

Ensure the volume level of all audio devices is set to a level that still allows you to hear outside traffic and emer- gency vehicles. Failure to comply may result in death, personal injury, equip- ment or property damage.

CAUTION

DO NOT rely on the telematic system to route you to the closest emergency services. Not all emergency services are in the database.

CONTROLS - Cab Accessories

126 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

3

NOTE

The map database is the most current available at the time of production. The database is designed to provide you with route suggestions and does not take into account the relative safety of a suggested route or of factors that may affect the time required to reach your destination. See the Supplemen- tal Navigation System Owners Manual for more information.

Using the Telematic System Screen Display On/Off

1. Press and hold the Power/ Lightbutton for approximately 1 second.

2. After the display has been turned on, the following Warning/ Informational screen will appear.

Warning/Informational Screen

WARNING

DO NOT let this device distract you while driving. Always

concentrate on your driving. Distractions could cause an

accident resulting in injuries to you or others.

IMPORTANT

Disclaimer: Map data may be inaccurate and navigation routes may not be available for larger size vehicles. Regardless of how and where the navigation system directs you, it is your responsibility to operate the vehicle in a safe and legal manner. Note: Before using this system, read the Owner's Manual and learn how it operates. Some functions of this system will not

WARNING

DO NOT let this device distract you while driving. Always

concentrate on your driving. Distractions could cause an

accident resulting in injuries to you or others.

operate when the truck is moving.

Warning/Informational Screen: DO NOT let this device distract you while driving. Always concentrate on you driving. Distractions could cause an accident resulting in injuries to you or others.

3. After reading the information, touch the T in the upper right corner of the screen with your finger indicating you acknowledge and understand the information. The menu screen will automatically appear next.

CONTROLS - Cab Accessories

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 127

3

4. To turn the system off, press and hold the Power/Light button for 3 seconds. Disclaimer: The vehicle manufacturer is not responsible for erroneous map data, incorrect routing or any downtime or other damages associated with or arising out of the use of the Navigation System.

Passenger Side 'Down' Mirror

NOTE

If your vehicle is equipped with digital side-view mirrors (option) refer to the PACCAR Digital Vision System with Mirrors operator's manual.

A mirror is located above the passenger door that provides a quick view of the blind spot created by the passenger door.

Loosen the screws on the top of the mirror to rotate the mirror up or down to get the

desired view. Tighten the screws when the position is correct.

CONTROLS - Cab Accessories

128 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

3

CONTROLS - Cab Accessories

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 129

3

Chapter 4 | DRIVING Starting and Operating......................................................................................................................131 Starting and Warming Up..................................................................................................................131 Engine Operations............................................................................................................................ 135 Driver Assistance.............................................................................................................................. 141 Transmission.....................................................................................................................................153 Brakes...............................................................................................................................................159 Axle and Suspension........................................................................................................................ 170 Trailer Operations..............................................................................................................................177 Driving Tips and Techniques............................................................................................................. 181 What to Consider when using a Sleeper Bunk..................................................................................184 Stopping the Vehicle......................................................................................................................... 185

DRIVING -

130 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

4

Starting and Operating Since each vehicle is custom-equipped, all engine operation instructions in this manual are general. You will want to consult the manual for your engine to find out details about your specific engines needs. You may need to use a slightly different procedure from the one outlined here.

Systems Check Summary System Check Display with TPMS

84 96105

105 105

21

105

3

105 105 105

105

105 105 105

105

54

105 105

Once the Systems Check has completed, the results will display in a summary. A detailed explanation of this summary can be viewed by accessing the Menu after a Systems Check has completed.

Anti-theft When enabled, the engine cannot be started until the correct passcode has been entered.

NOTE

Be aware that enabling Anti-theft will require drivers that share this vehicle to enter a passcode prior to starting the Engine, entering the Settings sub- menu (where Anti-theft can be disa- bled), or altering the Favorites View.

If after five minutes the engine hasnt been started, the passcode must be reentered this precaution can be postponed in one minute intervals by using any steering wheel switch. If Anti-theft is disabled and then re-enabled in Settings, the passcode used prior to being disabled is still the passcode. Anti-theft allows for only one passcode per vehicle.

Starting and Warming Up

How to Start Vehicle in Normal Weather

CAUTION

Never operate the starter motor while the engine is running. The starter and flywheel gears could clash or jam, se- verely damaging them.

NOTE

Some starters are equipped with over- crank protection. Check the Engine Operation and Maintenance Manual for details.

When the outside temperature is above 50F (10C), you can use the following procedure. If Anti-Theft is enabled, the first time you turn the ignition switch to START, you will need to enter the Passcode.

1. Set the parking brake. 2. Put your main transmission in

Neutral.

DRIVING - Starting and Operating

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 131

4

3. Disengage (depress) the clutch (with manual transmission).

4. Turn the ignition switch to START.

NOTE

If Anti-Theft is enabled, you will need to enter the Passcode in order to start the engine (see Anti-Theft).

5. If the engine does not start within 30 seconds, release the ignition switch. To avoid overtaxing the starter motor or the batteries, dont use the starter for more than 30 seconds. Let the starter motor cool and the batteries recover for two minutes before trying again. If the engine still wont start after a couple of tries, check the fuel lines for possible fuel starvation or air leaks. Starting failure may mean fuel is not reaching the injectors.

6. As soon as the engine starts, begin to watch the oil pressure gauge. Check your engine manufacturers manual for the right pressure for your engine. If the oil pressure doesnt rise within a few seconds, stop the engine. Find out what is wrong before restarting the engine.

7. Slowly engage (release) the clutch after the engine has started.

8. Wait for the oil pressure gauge to reach normal operating pressure before operating the vehicle or idling faster than 1,000 rpm.

Tips to Remember When Starting Vehicle in Cold Weather If you follow a few simple guidelines, you will extend the service life of your engine:

Keep the electrical system in top condition.

Use the best quality fuel of the recommended grade.

Use recommended engine lubricating oil.

For manual transmissions and auxiliary transmissions, leave the transmission in neutral and allow the transmission lubricating oil to warm up (approximately 3-5 minutes) before operating vehicle.

Engine Block Heater (Option) To preheat the engine before starting, plug the optional engine block heater into a properly grounded AC electrical source.

DO NOT start the engine with the heater plugged in.

WARNING

Engine block heaters can cause fires which may result in property damage, personal injury, or death if not properly maintained and operated. Regularly in- spect the engine block heater wiring and connector for damaged or frayed wires. DO NOT use the heater if there are any signs of problems. Contact your authorized dealer or the manufac- turer of the heater if you are in need of repairs or information.

CAUTION

Always unplug heater before starting the engine. Damage to the cooling system could occur if the heater is not turned OFF (unplugged).

Depending on engine make, when the temperature falls below -10F (-24C), the block heater is required.

DRIVING - Starting and Warming Up

132 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

4

Engine, Under Hood Air Intake This switch opens a door in the engine air filter housing so that the air is taken from under the hood instead of outside air. This switch can be useful when starting the vehicle in cold weather conditions.

CAUTION

Only operate the under hood intake air switch when outside temperatures are below 32F (0C). Engaging the under hood air intake while temperatures are above freezing may result in engine damage.

Engine Warm Up Engine warm-up allows oil film to be established between pistons and liners, shafts and bearings while your engine gradually reaches operating temperature.

1. After youve started your engine, idle it at approximately 600 rpm while you check:

Oil pressure Air pressure Alternator output

2. After a few minutes of idling at 600 rpm, increase your idle speed to 900 or 1,000 rpm. Continue your warm-up. This procedure allows oil to warm and flow freely while pistons, liners, shafts, and bearings expand slowly and evenly. In extremely cold temperatures, you may have to increase idle speed.

NOTE

In colder climates where the tempera- ture is often below freezing, the warm- up for turbocharged engines is espe- cially important. Chilled external oil lines leading to the turbocharger will slow the oil flow until the oil warms, re- ducing oil available for the bearings. Watch the engine oil temperature or pressure gauge for a warming trend before increasing engine idle speed (rpm).

3. Continue the engine warm-up until the coolant temperature reaches at least 130F (54C). At this temperature, you can use partial throttle. Wait until the coolant temperature is at least 160F (71C) before operating at full throttle.

NOTE

Under most circumstances, idling your engine for long periods merely wastes fuel. In severe arctic weather condi- tions, however, you may need longer idling to be sure all parts of your en- gine are fully lubricated.

DRIVING - Starting and Warming Up

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 133

4

WARNING

Exhaust fumes from the engine con- tain carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas. DO NOT breathe the en- gine exhaust gas. A poorly maintained, damaged, or corroded exhaust system can allow carbon monoxide to enter the cab. Entry of carbon monoxide into the cab is also possible from other ve- hicles nearby. Failure to properly main- tain your vehicle could cause carbon monoxide to enter the cab, resulting in personal injury or death.

WARNING

Never idle your vehicle for prolonged periods of time if you sense that ex- haust fumes are entering the cab. In- vestigate the cause of the fumes and correct it as soon as possible. If the vehicle must be driven under these conditions, drive only with the windows open. Failure to repair the source of the exhaust fumes may result in death, personal injury, equipment or property damage.

WARNING

To reduce the chance of personal in- jury, vehicle damage, and/or death from overheated engines, which can result in a fire, never leave the engine idling without an alert driver present. If the engine does overheat, as indicated by the engine coolant temperature lamp, immediate action is required to correct the condition. Continued unat- tended operation of the engine, even for a short time, may result in serious engine damage or a fire. Failure to comply may result in death, personal injury, equipment or property damage.

CAUTION

The use of a winterfront can result in excessive coolant, engine oil, and in- take air temperatures, which may lead to overheating and possible engine damage.

CAUTION

DO NOT allow your engine to idle, at low rpm (400-600 rpm), longer than five minutes. Long periods of idling af- ter the engine has reached operating temperatures can decrease engine temperature and cause gummed pis- ton rings, clogged injectors, and possi- ble engine damage from lack of lubri- cation. The normal torsional vibrations generated can also cause transmis- sion wear.

NOTE

Keep the engine exhaust system and the vehicle's cab ventilation system properly maintained. It is recommend- ed that the vehicle's exhaust system and cab be inspected (1) By a compe- tent technician every 15,000 miles (24,140 km); (2) Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system; or (3) Whenever the exhaust system, underbody, or cab is dam- aged.

DRIVING - Starting and Warming Up

134 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

4

NOTE

If you are parked next to idling vehi- cles, move your vehicle or do not stay in your vehicle for prolonged periods of time.

How to Warm Up the Transmission In cold weather (below 32F (0C), you may find shifting sluggish when you first start up. Transmission warm-up is especially important at this time, but it is always a good idea to warm-up your transmission before starting out on the road. To warm-up the transmission lubricating oil during engine warm-up, with a single transmission (manual and automatic):

1. Put the transmission in Neutral. 2. Release the clutch pedal (manual

only) and operate the transmission in neutral for 3 to 5 minutes prior to operating the transmission in either forward or reverse range.

3. If you have a two-transmission combination:

a. Put the main transmission in gear.

b. Put the auxiliary transmission in Neutral. This will allow the transmission countershaft to turn, agitating the oil and warming it.

Engine Operations

Indicators around the speedometer Indicators around the Speedometer

M A X

1. Engine Brake 2. Speed Limit (Option see Lane

Departure) 3. Cruise Control, Adaptive Cruise

(Option), Predictive Cruise (Option)

DRIVING - Engine Operations

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 135

4

4. Power Take Off

Engine Brake Operation

Moving the lever clockwise will engage the engine brake. Increase the amount of engine brake by moving the lever further clockwise. Each position has a corresponding level of engine brake.

Position Amount of Engine Brake

Off 0%

1 33%

Position Amount of Engine Brake

2 66%

3 100%

Engine Brake Operation for a Vehicle with Automated Transmission

Position Amount of Engine Brake

Off 0%

1 33%

2 66%

3 100%

4* 100% AND will engage transmission low gear

*This position is momentary and will revert back to position 3 when the lever is released.

The corresponding engine brake level (or MAX mode) will be illuminated in the instrument cluster.

DRIVING - Engine Operations

136 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

4

Engine Brake Operation for a Vehicle with Automated Transmission

Moving the lever clockwise will engage the engine brake. Increase the amount of engine brake by moving the lever further clockwise. Each position has a corresponding level of engine brake.

Position Amount of Engine Brake

Off 0 %

1 33%

Position Amount of Engine Brake

2 66%

3 100%

4* 100% AND will engage transmission low gear

* This position is momentary and will revert back to position 3 when the lever is released.

The corresponding engine brake level (or MAX mode) will be illuminated in the instrument cluster. Related tasks

How to Activate MAX Mode Vehicles with PACCAR automated or Eaton Endurant transmsission have a MAX mode. Use this operation when the situation requires 100% eninge brake and additional resistance from using the low gear of the transmission.

1. Move the Transmission Shifter to the 3rd position, representing 100% engine brake.

2. Pull the Transmission Shifter down once more and allow the

shifter to move back up to the previous location

MAX mode is now active and the instrument display will show the indicator in the view.

How to Deactivate MAX Mode Vehicles with automated transmissions will have the engine brake function integrated with the transmission controls. Follow these steps to deactivate MAX engine brake mode.

1. Accelerate with the throttle pedal. 2. Upshift,Up or Down Shifting on

page 157 see . 3. Wait for the transmission coast

down gear to engage. 4. Reduce engine brake level. 5. Re-initiate MAX mode. 6. Select Neutral N, see Drive Neutral

Reverse Selector on page 158. 7. Select LOW mode.

DRIVING - Engine Operations

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 137

4

Engine Brake Indicator Engine Brake Icon (1 bar)

M A X

Engine Brake Icon (3 bar+MAX)

M A X

The vertical bars represent the amount of engine brake, up to and including MAX mode. When Engine Braking is active, the indicator will change from white to green.

How to change Fast Idle Control (FIC) Speed The truck must be stationary, the transmission in Neutral, and the Park Brake set.

CAUTION

Do not let the engine RPM operate be- yond the maximum governed RPM. Operating the engine above the maxi- mum governed RPM may result in En- gine damage.

1. Press the Cruise Control ON/OFF. The white FIC indicator will appear near the Speedometer/ Tachometer, indicating the FIC is enabled.

2. To set the FIC speed Press RES to resume last

used FIC speed, or Use the Accelerator to increase

RPM, then press SET +, or Press and hold SET + to

increase and set the new FIC speed, or

Press and hold RES to reduce FIC speed, then press SET +.

The FIC indicator will turn green, signifying that the FIC is activated.

How to Start the PTO PTO Mode can be activated in a number of different ways. If your vehicle is equipped with the MX engine, PTO Mode is typically activated by engaging a PTO, or by using the Dash PTO Mode Control Switch. For the Cummins engine, PTO Mode is typically activated by engaging a PTO, or by setting the Cruise Control Switch to ON but while the vehicle is stationary. The

following information below provides the basic process of enabling and activating PTO engine speed control, and what the operator should observe during this process.

NOTE

Actual PTO engagement/disengage- ment may be delayed momentarily since it is controlled by the air system and mechanical movement.

CAUTION

Increasing engine rpm before the PTO is actually engaged could prevent the PTO from engaging and/or cause PTO damage.

1. Toggle the PTO ON/OFF switch, or the Dash PTO Mode Control Switch, to the ON position. Text indicating PTO engagement and/or PTO Mode control location will appear inside the speedometer. (Vehicles equipped with a PACCAR or Eaton automated transmission will display the letters AN in the

DRIVING - Engine Operations

138 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

4

transmission gear indicator when the PTO is engaged).

2. Press the Cruise Control (CC) ON/OFF switch to enable PTO speed control operations. A white speed control enabled icon will appear.

3. Optional: If your PTO has designated PTO presets located on the dash:

If you have dash mounted PTO preset switches, toggle the desired PTO Preset switch, or

Using the dash mounted PRESET Increment and Decrement switch, cycle through the PTO presets to select the desired preset.

PTO Speed Control is now active. Vehicles with an MX engine will display a green PTO indicator with a target PTO engine speed.

4. Optional: If you don't have dash mounted PTO preset switches, press the SET + and RES buttons located on the steering wheel to command a desired engine speed. PTO Speed Control is now active. Vehicles with an MX engine will

display a green PTO indicator with a target PTO engine speed.

5. To increase or decrease PTO engine speed use a combination of short and long presses of the SET + and RES - buttons located on the steering wheel (the cruise control buttons when the vehicle is moving).

Vehicles powered with PACCAR MX Engines will display the PTO engine speed above the PTO indicator. PTO Active Gauge

Engine Fan Control The engine fan switch on the dash has a manual and an automatic mode. In the manual mode, the engine fan will engage until the switch is back into automatic mode. In automatic mode, the engine fan

operation is controlled by the engine computer.

WARNING

DO NOT work on or near the fan with the engine running. Anyone near the engine fan when it turns on could be injured. If it is set at MANUAL, the fan will turn on any time the ignition key switch is turned to the ON position. In AUTO, it could engage suddenly with- out warning. Before turning on the igni- tion or switching from AUTO to MAN- UAL, be sure no workers are near the fan. Failure to comply may result in death or personal injury.

CAUTION

DO NOT operate the engine fan in the MANUAL position for extended peri- ods of time. The fan hub was designed for intermittent operation. Sustained operation will shorten the fan hubs service life as well as reduce fuel economy.

DRIVING - Engine Operations

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 139

4

CAUTION

The fan or equipment near it could be damaged if the fan turns on suddenly when you do not expect it. Keep all tools and equipment away from the fan.

Using a Winterfront

CAUTION

The use of a winterfront can result in excessive coolant, engine oil, and in- take air temperatures, which may lead to overheating and possible engine damage.

CAUTION

A winterfront should only be used at temperatures below 40F (4C). Use of a winterfront above 40F (4C) can decrease life of cooling module com- ponents. Remove winterfront as soon

as the ambient temp reaches 41F (5C). The use of a winterfront above 40F (4C) can result in excessive coolant, engine oil, and intake air tem- peratures, which may lead to over- heating and possible engine or coolant module damage and emissions non- compliance.

The winterfront is designed to minimize the temperature differences across the radiator and reduce the possibility of cooling module damage. Aftermarket winterfronts may not provide the proper airflow distribution and could cause cooling module damage.

How to Set the Shutdown Timer The Shut Down Timer must first be enabled. Enabling the shutdown timer is located in the Settings Sub-menu. Follow these steps to turn on the engine idle shutdown timer. The shutdown timer will default to 5 minutes (or the last value used) and can be set up to 30 minutes unless limited by the Engine Shutdown System (Clean Idle on page 314)

WARNING

Never idle your vehicle for prolonged periods of time if you sense that ex- haust fumes are entering the cab. In- vestigate the cause of the fumes and correct it as soon as possible. If the vehicle must be driven under these conditions, drive only with the windows open. Failure to repair the source of the exhaust fumes may result in death, personal injury, equipment or property damage.

CAUTION

DO NOT idle the engine for excessive- ly long periods. Long periods of idling, more than 10 minutes, can cause poor engine performance.

1. Using the Scroll Wheel, target the number of minutes and press Select.

2. Back to return to the Settings menu.

DRIVING - Engine Operations

140 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

4

Engine Aftertreatment System

This vehicle has an Engine Aftertreatment System (EAS), to control vehicle exhaust emissions. The Engine Aftertreatment system consist of a Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF), Selective Catalyst Reduction (SCR), DPF Switch and warning lights. The DPF will trap soot from the engine exhaust gases. The SCR uses Diesel Exhaust Fluid to reduce the levels of NOx in the engine exhaust. The EAS will periodically clean (regenerate) the DPF. Your vehicle may be equipped with an additional feature designed to alert a remote operator that the aftertreatment system requires a regeneration. When the EAS detects a heavily loaded DPF it will sound the city horn for 10 seconds while continuously flashing the vehicle

headlamps. The operator can resolve and reset the alert by performing a parked regeneration. Alternatively, the notification can be dismissed by pressing the clutch or the service brake. Dismissing the alert does not reset it, the next alert will occur at the next higher soot level if a parked regeneration is never performed. Engine Aftertreatment System Detail

1 2

3

4

1. Hydrocarbon doser from turbo 2. Aftertreatment unit (DPF, DEF

doser and SCR) 3. Filtered/treated exhaust 4. Diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) tank

Please refer to the Engine Aftertreatment System Supplement provided with the

vehicle for more detailed description of functionality and warnings.

Driver Assistance Driver Assistance (or Advanced Driver- assistance Systems (ADAS)) defines a variety of electronic features which assist the operator while driving. These features use automated technology to improve operator and vehicle safety by alerting the operator (and in some cases taking actions) to the driving environment. The Driver Assistance features use electronic and hardware improvements in order to accomplish this task: cameras, radar, sensors, driving automation, and in-cab notifications. The features described in this section should supplement the explanations, warnings, and preventative maintenance information located in the ADAS OEM operators manuals for the equipment particular to the vehicle. It is important that the operator familiarize themselves with the OEM manuals associated with their ADAS equipment prior to driving the vehicle.

DRIVING - Driver Assistance

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 141

4

ZF WABCO Advanced Driver- assistance Systems (ADAS)

Product Feature

ZF WABCO

OnLane ALERT Lane Departure Warning (LDW)

ZF WABCO

OnGuard ACTIVE Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

Collision Mitigation

Bendix Advanced Driver- assistance Systems (ADAS)

Product Feature

Bendix Wingman Advanced

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

Collision Mitigation

Bendix Wingman Fusion

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

Collision Mitigation

Product Feature

Speed Limit Recognition

Highway Departure Braking

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)

Cruise Control

WARNING

DO NOT operate the cruise control when operating on road surfaces with poor traction (wet, icy, or snow cov- ered roads) or in heavy traffic. Acceler- ations caused by the normal operation of the cruise control could cause you to lose control of the vehicle resulting in an injury accident.

Cruise control functions and features may vary depending upon which engine you have. For a specific explanation of your cruise control, see the cruise control or

engine manual included with your vehicle. This vehicle's electronic system will perform a rationality check every time the vehicle is started. This check is to ensure that the service brakes are working before allowing cruise control to function. This safety feature is designed to ensure that a driver is able to cancel the cruise set speed by using the service brake pedal. The system will not allow cruise control operation if it does not pass the rationality check. The display will prompt you to press the service brake pedal if it has not been pressed since the vehicle has been started. In vehicles with Eaton transmissions, the cruise control switches may be located on the shift control knob.

DRIVING - Driver Assistance

142 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

4

The left switch pod on the steering wheel contain buttons for the cruise control. Left Switch Pod

4 25 1

3

1. Trip 2. Variable Road Speed Limiter

(VRSL) LIM+ and LIM- 3. Cruise Control ON/OFF

4. Cruise Control (CC) SET+ and RES-

5. Toggle The switches on the left side of horn pad manage vehicle speed functions like cruise control and variable road speed limiter (option). If the vehicle has adaptive cruise control (option), predictive cruise control (option), etc., the toggle switch is also used to operate that system.

Cruise Control Indicator

This indicator shows the operator which Cruise Control function is currently enabled or active. This includes:

Cruise Control Adaptive Cruise Control (optional) Predictive Cruise Control (optional)

NOTE

PCC not offered on 1.9m mod- els.

The indicator will appear white when the system is on and it will appear green when the cruise control set speed is active. For more information see Cruise Control on page 142.

How to Use Set Cruise Control Speed When Driving These instructions DO NOT apply to Adaptive Cruise Control. While the buttons are also used to control PTO operations, these instructions are specifically for vehicle speed. The vehicle speed must be greater than 19 mph (30 kph) for PACCAR powered vehicles or 30 mph (49 kph) for Cummins powered vehicles and the engine speed must be over 1,100 rpm for the cruise set speed to work. To Set the Cruise Speed

1. Turn the cruise function on by using the ON/OFF button The cruise icon will appear in the display.

2. Accelerate the vehicle via accelerator pedal to the desired cruise speed.

DRIVING - Driver Assistance

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 143

4

3. Press the "SET +" button to set the cruise speed.

NOTE

Cruise Control may not hold the set speed going down hills. If the speed increases going down a hill, use the brakes to slow down. This will cancel Cruise Control.

The cruise set speed will appear in the display.

How to Change Cruise Set Speed The vehicle cruise control must be ON and the cruise speed engaged.

1. To increase vehicle speed Press or long press SET + until

you reach the desired speed, or Use the Accelerator Pedal to

reach the desired speed, and then press the Set +

2. To decrease vehicle speed, press or long press RES until you achieve the desired speed, and then press SET +.

The new cruise speed can be seen next to the Cruise Control Indicator.

Canceling and Resuming Cruise Control There are four ways to cancel the set speed in cruise control:

1. Tap the brake pedal 2. Tap the clutch pedal 3. Turn the cruise control system OFF

(ON/OFF button on steering wheel) 4. Press the Variable Road Speed

Limit buttons Using the brake or clutch pedal to cancel set speed allows the operator to use the RESUME feature. Pressing the "- RES" button will resume the vehicle speed previously set. Pressing ON/OFF once will deactivate cruise control, and pressing it twice will turn off the system. When turning the system OFF, the previous set speed is removed from memory. The operator will have to manually reset the vehicle's cruise speed.

Variable Road Speed Limiter (option) The Variable Road Speed Limiter (VRSL) prevents the vehicle from exceeding a chosen vehicle speed limit. This limit is selected by the operator and can be changed while driving. VRSL uses various

braking methods to enforce the limit including ignoring further input from the accelerator pedal, but will only use engine braking if available and enabled. VRSL replaces the Cruise Control indicator when active and will show the VRSL limit to the right of the indicator. This limit is shown in gray but turns white when actively limiting vehicle speed. MX engines, additionally, show "LIMITED" on the speedometer. When active, the VRSL speed limit can be changed using the LIM+ and LIM- buttons in the right, steering wheel switch pod. See How to Set the Variable Road Speed Limiter. Enabling VRSL will disable Cruise Control. VRSL can be canceled by

A long press of the Cruise Control ON/OFF.

Stopping then parking the vehicle. Activating the PTO (option) (MX

engine only).

How to Set the Variable Road Speed Limiter The Variable Road Speed Limiter (VRSL) cannot establish a limit while the parking brake is set or the PTO is in operation. The minimum VRSL setting is 25 mph (40 kph).

DRIVING - Driver Assistance

144 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

4

Enabling VRSL will disable Cruise Control if Cruise Control is active.

1. Press the Cruise Control ON/OFF button in the left, steering wheel switch pod.

Indicates that the VRSL feature is awaiting input.

2. Press, or press and hold, LIM+ or LIM- to incrementally, or continuously, raise or lower the VRSL limit. The green VRSL indicator will replace the Cruise Control indicator, indicating that VRSL is enabled. VRSL (like Cruise Control) will use the current vehicle speed as the VRSL limit until changed.

Pressing either LIM+ or LIM- will adjust the VRSL limit while this feature is active.

Adaptive Cruise Control (Option)

WARNING

The driver must remain alert, react ap- propriately, and use safe driving practi- ces while using this Driver Assistance feature. Ultimate responsibility for safe operation of the vehicle remains with the driver at all times. Failure to do so may result in death, personal injury, or property damage.

WARNING

The driver must remain visually aware of the roadway and traffic and not rely solely on Drivers Assistance features to identify and respond to the variety of vehicles or objects sharing the road. The driver must read the ADAS opera- tors manual associated with this fea- ture and understand its limitations prior to driving the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in death, personal injury, or property damage.

WARNING

Driver Assistance features respond dif- ferently to specific road, weather, and traffic conditions. The operator must read the ADAS operators manual as- sociated with this feature and under- stand how it responds to these specific conditions prior to driving the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in death, personal injury, or property damage.

Following Distance Five Bars

When Cruise Control is active, ACC will accelerate and slow the truck to maintain a chosen distance from a detected forward vehicle. Collision Mitigation will attempt to prevent a forward collision when advancing at speeds greater than 15 mph (24 kph). Please review the ACC section of this manual, and the manufacturers manual, prior to driving this vehicle.

DRIVING - Driver Assistance

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 145

4

Adaptive Cruise Display The display area for Active Cruise will contain dynamic visuals related to whether a tracked vehicle is in front and the amount of following distance set for Active Cruise. It will show an outline of a car in the display area when the radar is tracking a vehicle. Once it locks on to a tracked vehicle, it will display horizontal bars to represent the amount of following distance from the tracked vehicle. Once it locks and tracks a target vehicle, the system will adjust the speed to accommodate the speed of the tracked vehicle in front of it. No Tracked Vehicle

The operator can set the amount of following distance from the tracked vehicle. There are five preset distances to choose from, represented by horizontal bars between the hood and the forward car. One bar represents the nearest following distance.

Following Distance One Bar

Five bars represents a farther distance. Following Distance Five Bars

See Set ACC Following Distance on page 146.

Set ACC Following Distance Follow these steps to adjust the following distance for Adaptive Cruise Control:

1. Press the Toggle until the following distance bars illuminate in the view.

If the vehicle has Predictive Cruise Control, you may have to press multiple times to cycle through the other settings for PCC.

2. Rotate the Toggle up or down to choose the amount of following distance.

3. Push the Toggle again to set the following distance.

Following Distance Alerts The display will be white when the tracked vehicle in front is at a proper following distance. If the following distance decreases (less than 1.5 seconds), the following distance bars will turn amber. When the following distance decrease more (0.5 seconds), the following distance bars will turn red.

Object Detected Alert When Collision Mitigation instrumentation detects a roadway object not recognized as a vehicle, the following graphic will show in the Driver Assistance area of the Digital Display: Adaptive Cruise - Object Detected

Because ACC doesn't classify the forward object as a vehicle, Collision Mitigation braking will not occur (see Collision Mitigation); instead, this graphic is accompanied by an audible alert, allowing the operator to decide how to best respond to the detected object.

DRIVING - Driver Assistance

146 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

4

For more information on the characteristics of the Adaptive Cruise Control feature, please read the ADAS OEM Operators Manual specific for your vehicle.

Collision Mitigation

WARNING

The driver must remain alert, react ap- propriately, and use safe driving practi- ces while using this Driver Assistance feature. Ultimate responsibility for safe operation of the vehicle remains with the driver at all times. Failure to do so may result in death, personal injury, or property damage.

WARNING

The driver must remain visually aware of the roadway and traffic and not rely solely on Drivers Assistance features to identify and respond to the variety of vehicles or objects sharing the road. The driver must read the ADAS opera- tors manual associated with this fea- ture and understand its limitations prior to driving the vehicle. Failure to do so

may result in death, personal injury, or property damage.

WARNING

Driver Assistance features respond dif- ferently to specific road, weather, and traffic conditions. The operator must read the ADAS operators manual as- sociated with this feature and under- stand how it responds to these specific conditions prior to driving the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in death, personal injury, or property damage.

Collision Mitigation (also Automated Emergency Braking) will attempt to prevent or lessen the impact of a forward collision where Collision Mitigation has determined impact with a vehicle is likely. Although the Driver Assistance instrumentation can detect a non-vehicular, forward object, only a recognized vehicle can trigger Collision Mitigation. Unlike Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), Collision Mitigation is always on (at speeds greater than 15mph) and does not depend on Cruise Control being active. When Collision Mitigation determines that a forward vehicular impact is likely, Collision

Mitigation will apply the service brakes and present the following warning in the Driver Assistance area of the display (see Minimized View with Driver Assistance) along with an audible warning:

BRAKE

Additionally, this popup will appear instructing the operator to take control:

Collision Mitigation should not be used to stop or slow the vehicle without operator intervention. A Collision Mitigation braking event will temporarily disable both ACC and standard Cruise Control, requiring these features to be reactivated by the operator. Collision Mitigation will continue to slow the vehicle until the potential for a collision has been averted, whether the potential collision be the vehicle that triggered the braking event or another forward vehicle the system has determined may likely result in an impact. The operator can cancel the braking event by using either

DRIVING - Driver Assistance

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 147

4

the accelerator pedal or the service brake. This lets Collision Mitigation know that the triggering event has been acknowledged. To prevent abuse of this emergency feature, after three Collision Mitigation braking events, ACC and Collision Mitigation will be disabled until the next time the ignition switch is cycled. This is to prevent using Collision Mitigation irresponsibly or in a manner for which it was not intended. Please read the ADAS operators manual specific for your vehicle to become familiar with the limitations of Collision Mitigation (Automated Emergency Braking).

Predictive Cruise Control (Option)

Predictive Cruise Control (PCC) uses satellite technology and GPS maps to look at upcoming roads to dynamically calculate optimal fuel-efficient speed over a given terrain.

NOTE

There are many other factors that may influence the overall fuel economy of your vehicle (i.e., head wind and slope terrain, etc.).

Predictive Cruise Control operates similarly to standard cruise control. With PCC, vehicle speed is maintained without holding down the accelerator and can be used at 19 mph (30 km/h) or more. PCC will also actively recalculate and change the target cruising speed for best fuel economy rather than maintaing a constant set speed. The range of the PCC target cruise speed is defined by an overshoot and undershoot speed values. These values are adjustable by the operator.

NOTE

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) has the ability to override Eco cruise. This is because ACC is designed to deceler- ate the vehicle to match the speed of

traffic in front of the ACC equipped truck.

PCC Behavior As the vehicle approaches the top of a hill, PCC will decrease the vehicle speed (up to 8%below the set speed) to prevent the vehicle from exceeding the set speed while traveling downhill. This will result in a smoother, more fuel efficient ride as the vehicle approaches the crest of the hill. Once over the crest, momentum takes over and the system allows a predetermined amount of speed over the set speed. PCC can also activate Neutral Coast (NC) mode. NC mode disengages the vehicle's driveline, reducing fuel consumption while maintaining overall vehicle speed. Once the vehicle can no longer maintain speed while coasting, NC is deactivated and the driveline re-engages. If the driver has activated one of the vehicle's retarder systems (Engine, transmission, or driveline), the vehicle speed may increase until it reaches the cruise control set speed plus the retarder offset. For more information about engine retarders, see your vehicle Operator's Manual.

DRIVING - Driver Assistance

148 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

4

If the vehicle drops outside the speed range, PCC will accelerate the vehicle back to the minimum PCC speed. As the vehicle reaches flat ground after the hill, PCC will maintain the set-speed until the crest of the next hill. If the vehicle is equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) and senses traffic slowing, it will overrule PCC and slow the vehicle. This event will cancel PCC only if the service brakes are required to slow the vehicle. If the service brakes are not used by ACC to maintain a safe following distance, PCC will remain engaged and resume automatically after the ACC event.

NOTE

PCC was calibrated using a loaded ve- hicle. Your results may vary, depend- ing on your vehicle's configuration.

PCC Interrupt There are three conditions that will automatically deactivate PCC:

If there is no data for the current road.

If the GPS signal is lost. If the PCC system detects a fault.

When this happens, the vehicle will revert to standard cruise control. This CC state will be standard cruise control which will maintain the same cruise speed that was selected for PCC. Once the system regains GPS signal and road data, PCC will resume.

NOTE

PCC Map coverage will include most interstate and state highways. If you happen to leave a supported roadway, the PCC will deactivate. Standard cruise control will automatically step in to maintain the vehicle speed.

Troubleshooting The display will show a message if it detects an error with the PCC system. PCC faults may result from the unavailability of map, slope, vehicle position, etc. To effectively diagnose and clear the fault codes, the truck must be taken to your local dealership.

Fuel Economy Savings Not Achieved Certain conditions may cause the optimal vehicle speed, calculated by PCC, to be overruled. For example, PCC will be overruled in the following scenarios:

Greenhouse Gas functionality Adaptive Cruise Control Following

Event (if equipped) Adaptive Cruise Control Error State

(if equipped)

Disabling Predictive Cruise Control To disable PCC and enable standard cruise control, the truck must be taken to an authorized dealer.

Software Information The PCC ECU Software version and Map Data Version number can be found in the Menu Truck Information on page 77. . It may take up to two minutes for this information to be displayed after the truck has been keyed-on.

PCC Controls PCC uses the same buttons as Cruise Control. See Cruise Control on page 142.

DRIVING - Driver Assistance

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 149

4

PCC Undershoot Follow these steps to adjust the undershoot value for Predictive Cruise Control:

1. Press the Toggle twice.

+

- The bottom value below the set speed will illuminate.

2. Rotate the Toggle up or down to set the value.

3. Push the Toggle again to confirm the value.

If you want to set the Overshoot value, see Predictive Cruise Overshoot on page 72.

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)

WARNING

The driver must remain alert, react ap- propriately, and use safe driving practi- ces while using this Driver Assistance feature. Ultimate responsibility for safe

operation of the vehicle remains with the driver at all times. Failure to do so may result in death, personal injury, or property damage.

WARNING

The driver must remain visually aware of the roadway and traffic and not rely solely on Drivers Assistance features to identify and respond to the variety of vehicles or objects sharing the road. The driver must read the ADAS opera- tors manual associated with this fea- ture and understand its limitations prior to driving the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in death, personal injury, or property damage.

WARNING

Driver Assistance features respond dif- ferently to specific road, weather, and traffic conditions. The operator must read the ADAS operators manual as- sociated with this feature and under- stand how it responds to these specific conditions prior to driving the vehicle.

Failure to do so may result in death, personal injury, or property damage.

Using a windshield-mounted, forward facing camera, the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) feature monitors the road for lane markings and alerts the driver when the vehicle departs its lane without the use of the turn signal. Lane departure warning is only active at speeds greater than 37 MPH (60 km/h).

LDW is not available when the system cannot accurately detect lane markings; therefore, the camera should be clear of potential obstructions for the LDW feature to operate properly.

DRIVING - Driver Assistance

150 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

4

The following lists some conditions that can limit the performance of the features that use the camera:

Buildup of dirt, mud, water, snow, ice, bugs, etc. on the windshield. These should be able to be resolved with proper use of the windshield washer/wiper system as the camera is intentionally installed in the wiper path.

Windshield damage directly in front of the camera. This should be fixed as soon as possible.

Items on the windshield like stickers, paint, window tint, etc. These should not be placed in front of the camera.

Items on the exterior of the truck such as aftermarket visors, wind deflectors, hood ornaments, car racks, crane booms / hooks / buckets, snowplows, mirrors, etc.

The Driver Assistance area of the Digital Display indicates if the LDW system recognizes lane markings as follows:

White lines indicate detected lanes. Gray lines indicate where the road

is monitored for lane markings, but none are detected.

Black lines mean that the LDW feature is disabled.

A yellow line indicates an active lane departure event.

A lane departure event occurs when the vehicle tire crosses a lane marking without the use of the turn signal. A lane departure event is accompanied by an audible alert. Lane Departure Active Warning Left

The LDW feature provides audible and visual alerts only and does not attempt to correct the vehicles position in the lane. The operator can temporarily disable LDW (disabling audible and visual alerts) by using the dash mounted Lane Departure Warning Disable switch (See Lane Departure Warning Disable). For more information on Lane Departure Warning, see the ADAS OEM operators manual specific for your vehicle.

Highway Departure Braking (option)

WARNING

The driver must remain alert, react ap- propriately, and use safe driving practi- ces while using this Driver Assistance feature. Ultimate responsibility for safe operation of the vehicle remains with the driver at all times. Failure to do so may result in death, personal injury, or property damage.

WARNING

The driver must remain visually aware of the roadway and traffic and not rely solely on Drivers Assistance features to identify and respond to the variety of vehicles or objects sharing the road. The driver must read the ADAS opera- tors manual associated with this fea- ture and understand its limitations prior to driving the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in death, personal injury, or property damage.

DRIVING - Driver Assistance

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 151

4

WARNING

Driver Assistance features respond dif- ferently to specific road, weather, and traffic conditions. The operator must read the ADAS operators manual as- sociated with this feature and under- stand how it responds to these specific conditions prior to driving the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in death, personal injury, or property damage.

Highway Departure Braking (HDB) will slow the vehicle when the feature determines the vehicle has unintentionally left the roadway. HDB is only active at speeds above 37 mph (60 kph). When the midpoint of the vehicle crosses the solid white, outside lane line (also called the Fog Line) without use of the turn signal or hazards, HDB presumes an unplanned road departure and applies the service brakes. HDB will not bring the vehicle to a stop on its own (however, see Collision Mitigation), but is capable of reducing vehicle speed by up to 30 mph (48 kph). The digital display will notify the operator of a Highway Departure Braking event with a popup and show this graphic in the Driver

Assistance area accompanied by an audible alert:

HDB works along with Lane Departure Warning (LDW). LDW can warn of a highway departure prior to the braking action taken during a HDB event (see Lane Departure Warning). The operator can acknowledge and cancel a Highway Departure Braking (HDB) event by

Applying the service brake and braking more than that applied by HDB.

Pressing the accelerator pedal and pressing more than 90% of the pedal range.

Activating the turn signal. Activating the hazards. Steering the vehicle back into the

lane. To prevent abuse of this feature, after six Highway Departure Braking events, HDB will be disabled until the next time the ignition switch is cycled. This is to prevent using HDB irresponsibly or in a manner for

which it was not intended. Please read the ADAS OEM operators manual specific for your vehicle for more information about Highway Departure Braking.

Speed Limit Recognition Using the forward camera of your Driver Assistance instrumentation, your vehicle can read most North American speed limit signs. The detected, posted speed limit is presented on the display using a road sign located in the Driver Assistance area (see Minimized View with Driver Assistance):

When vehicle speed exceeds the posted speed limit by 5 mph (8 kph) or more, the operator is notified using alternating red and blue cop lights, indicating above the sign on the display. This is accompanied by an audible alert. Please read the ADAS OEM operators manual specific for your vehicle for more information about Speed Limit Recognition.

DRIVING - Driver Assistance

152 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

4

Transmission

Transmission Tips Riding the Clutch The clutch is not a footrest. DO NOT drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal. It will allow your clutch to slip, causing excessive heat and wear, damage could result.

Release Bearing Wear When you must idle your engine for any period of time, shift your transmission to neutral and disengage the clutch (take your foot OFF of the pedal). This helps prevent unnecessary wear to your clutch release bearing, and is less tiring for you, too.

More Tips Always use the clutch when

making upshifts or downshifts. Always select a starting gear that

will provide sufficient gear reduction for the load and terrain.

Never downshift when the vehicle is moving too fast.

Never slam or jerk the shift lever to complete gear engagement.

Never coast with the transmission in neutral and the clutch disengaged. To provide smooth gear engagements while shifting, use proper coordination between shift lever and clutch.

Double clutching is a very effective means to increase the service life of your transmission. Double clutching refers to a technique where the clutch pedal is used twice per shift instead of once. It also requires that you adjust the engine rpm in the middle of the shift which ultimately synchronizes the gears during shifting. Synchronizing reduces wear on the gears.

Operating Manual Transmissions The transmission shift pattern for your vehicle may be located on the shift control knob. In addition to understanding the shift pattern and its location, you should read the transmission manufacturers manual provided with your vehicle before operating the vehicle. After making sure the vehicle's oil and air pressure are correct and all

other parts and systems are in proper working condition:

1. For vehicles with a clutch pedal, locate the clutch pedal and engage the clutch brake.

2. Shift into a low gear.

CAUTION

Always use first gear or a low speed range to start the vehicle in motion. The use of a higher gear or speed range forces undue strain on the en- gine, clutch, and other transmission components, and may cause damage.

3. Evaluate the road surface conditions and terrain your vehicle is on. Select a gear low enough to let your vehicle start forward with the throttle at idle.

4. Push the parking brake valve handle (yellow) against the dash panel to release the brakes.

5. Release the clutch pedal (manual only), then gradually accelerate to permit smooth starting.

6. DO NOT allow your vehicle to roll (even a little) in the opposite direction during clutch

DRIVING - Transmission

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 153

4

engagement. If you need to start up on an incline, apply your service brakes before you release the parking brake. Then release your service brakes as you engage the clutch and apply throttle.

For further instructions on operating your transmission, see the transmission manufacturer's Driver/Operator's Instruction Manual. If you want to shift directly into any gear other than first or reverse, depress the clutch pedal only far enough to release the clutch. Fully depressing the pedal applies the clutch brake and could cause gear hang-up. If you have a misaligned gear condition in your vehicle's transmission and cannot start, gradually release the clutch, allowing the drive gear teeth to line up properly. Then the drive gear can roll enough to allow the teeth to line up properly and complete the shift. The best engine performance and maximum economy is obtained if gears are properly selected. This efficiency is achieved by always selecting gears within optimum engine rpm, which is where maximum torque and power are obtained. Shift carefully in a new vehicle. The transmission may be a little stiff at first.

Avoid gear clashing, by closely following these procedures. When you are operating a new vehicle or one that has been exposed to cold weather, you want the transmission lubricant (fluid) to circulate and coat the contacting surfaces of the gears. Metal contacting metal in moving parts may seriously damage your transmission, do not drive in one gear for long periods of time until the transmission lubricant has a chance to coat all contacting surfaces.

Always select a starting gear that will provide sufficient gear reduction for the load and terrain.

Never downshift when the vehicle is moving too fast.

Never slam or jerk the shift lever to complete gear engagement.

Never coast with the transmission in neutral and the clutch disengaged.

How to Use the Hydraulic Clutch

CAUTION

Be careful not to apply the clutch brake while the vehicle is moving. The

purpose of the clutch brake is to stop the transmission so that you can shift into a starting gear without grinding gears. Applying the clutch brake when the vehicle is moving causes a braking effect on the drivetrain and shortens the service life of the clutch brake.

CAUTION

DO NOT push the clutch pedal com- pletely to the floor when shifting while the vehicle is in motion. using the clutch brake while shifting a vehicle in motion will damage the clutch brake. A non functioning clutch brake will make shifting very difficult when the vehicle is stationary.

1. Depress the clutch pedal past the first 1/2 in. (13 mm) for approximately 5 1/2 in. (139.7 mm) of total pedal travel.

2. Depress the clutch pedal another 1/2 in. (13 mm) to engage the clutch brake.

The clutch brake is used for stopping transmission gears, allowing you to easily shift into first gear or reverse without

DRIVING - Transmission

154 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

4

grinding gears. The clutch brake is not necessary when shifting into other gears while in motion. If the clutch pedal is pressed completely to the floor and the transmission is not shifting, then it is time to have the clutch adjusted or serviced. If the transmission has a butt-tooth condition and you cannot engage a gear, gradually release the clutch. Then the drive gear can roll enough to allow the teeth to line up properly and complete the shift. The clutch is not a footrest. Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal. It will allow your clutch to slip, causing excessive heat and wear, damage could result. When you must idle your engine for any period of time, shift your transmission to neutral and disengage the clutch (take your foot OFF of the pedal). This helps prevent unnecessary wear to your clutch release bearing, and it is less tiring for you, too.

Always use the clutch when making upshifts or downshifts.

Never coast with the transmission in neutral and the clutch disengaged.

To provide smooth gear engagements while shifting, use

proper coordination between shift lever and clutch.

How to Shift Using Double Clutch Method Double clutching is easier on the transmission and on the engine, helping match your vehicle's engine speed with driveline speed to achieve clash-free shifts. The manual transmission in your vehicle is not equipped with gear synchronizers. Whether you are upshifting or downshifting, it is best to double clutch. To double clutch:

1. Push the clutch pedal down to disengage the clutch.

2. Move the gear shift lever to neutral. 3. Release the pedal to engage the

clutch. This lets you control the rpm of the transmission mainshaft gears, allowing you to match the rpm of the mainshaft gears to those of the output shaft.

Upshifts: let the engine and gears slow down to the rpm required for the next gear.

Downshifts: press accelerator, increase engine and gear speed to the rpm required in the lower gear.

4. Now quickly press the pedal to disengage the clutch and move the gear shift lever to the next gear speed position.

5. Release the pedal to engage the clutch.

Automated Transmissions This vehicle may have a PACCAR or Eaton automated transmission. It remains important to completely understand how to operate the transmission to optimize its efficiency. Please read the manual for the automated transmission included with your vehicle. Not all automated transmissions have a "park" position, so you will need to apply the parking brake before leaving the cab.

DRIVING - Transmission

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 155

4

WARNING

If your vehicle has an automated transmission, be aware that it can roll backwards when stopped on a hill or grade, or when starting from a stop on a hill or grade. Failure to comply may result in death, personal injury, equip- ment or property damage. Observe the following guidelines: (1) When stopped on a hill or grade, press the brake ped- al. (2) When starting from a stop on a hill or grade, quickly remove your foot from the brake pedal and firmly press on the accelerator pedal.

WARNING

DO NOT leave the cab of your vehicle without applying the parking brake. The truck could roll and cause an acci- dent resulting in death or personal in- jury. Always apply the parking brake before you leave the cab.

Hill Hold

The hill hold feature is available as an option with certain automated transmissions. This feature holds the vehicle while on a hill to allow the operator to release the service brakes and press the accelerator. This feature will hold the vehicle if the vehicle is attempting to go up a hill from a stop in either drive or reverse.

Shift Configuration Some transmissions are equipped with more than one shifting configuration to match various operating conditions. Please read the automated transmission manual included with your vehicle for instructions on how to change shift configurations.

Transmission Gear Display Gear Display Icon (gear number)

This indicator will show the transmission mode and current gear.. This does not apply to vehicles with Allison Automatic transmissions.

Max mode Low gear mode Manual Mode Neutral Coast Driver Shift Aid Configuration 2

Inside the gear icon, the indicator normally show the current gear number and may at times show:

AN - Auto Neutral CA - Clutch Abuse GI - Grease Service Interval ! - Error State

Gear Display Icon (Error State)

This icon indicates an error in the transmission.. Attempt to reset the transmission by turning off the vehicle. After two minutes, restart the engine and see if the same icon appears in the display. Please contact your nearest Authorized dealership if the condition persists.

Controls for Vehicles with an Eaton Automated or a PACCAR Transmission This vehicle may be equipped with either an Eaton Automated or a PACCAR

DRIVING - Transmission

156 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

4

Transmission. The Automated or PACCAR Transmission controls are located on the right hand side of the steering column.

Using the Manual - Automatic Button

This button will put the transmission into manual mode. Manual mode will allow the operator to select the gear. See Up or Down Shifting on page 157. To activate, put the gear selector in the D (drive) mode and then depress the M/A button. The instrument cluster will display the corresponding selection in the transmission mode area of the display. See Drive, Neutral, and Reverse Indicator on

page 65 and Peterbilt Digital Display on page 63. Gear Display Icon (Gear shift assist)

Up or Down Shifting

When in the Manual mode, the transmission gears can be manually selected by pushing or pulling on the lever. Pushing the lever forward will down shift. Pushing and holding the lever forward will engage the LOW gear range. Pulling the lever towards the driver will upshift the transmission.

Some vehicles may have a feature that prompts the operator to shift for optimal fuel economy. If the prompt appears in the instrument cluster, use the manual gear selector lever to change gears. Gear Display Icon (Gear shift assist)

The instrument cluster will illuminate with the corresponding gear. Gear Display Icon (gear number)

DRIVING - Transmission

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 157

4

Drive Neutral Reverse Selector

Transmission mode is selected by rotating the lever outer knob. There is a position for Drive (D), Neutral (N), and Reverse (R). The Digital Display will indicate the corresponding mode. See Drive, Neutral, and Reverse Indicator on page 65 and Peterbilt Digital Display on page 63.

NOTE

Selector (the transmission) must be in Neutral (N) to start the truck.

Auto Neutral Gear Display Icon (Auto Neutral)

AN

The Auto Neutral feature will automatically shift to Neutral if the vehicle is left in forward or reverse mode and the parking brake is set. The driver must then select the desired forward or reverse mode with the service brake applied.

Neutral Coast Mode Neutral Coast Mode allows the transmission to disengage the driveline by pulling out of gear on slight downhill grades, where little to no engine power is required, when the vehicle is in cruise control and the transmission is in Drive mode.

When Neutral Coast Mode is active, the engine will drop to idle speed and the transmission will disengage.

The gear display may flash a gear number or indicate Neutral when Neutral Coast Mode is active.

If a flashing number is indicated in the gear display, this represents the gear that the transmission will

select when it is necessary to engage a gear.

The transmission will exit Neutral Coast Mode and reengage an appropriate gear under any of the following conditions:

Vehicle brake is applied

Driver depresses accelerator pedal

Cruise control is canceled

A mode other than Drive is selected

Driver performs upshift/ downshift requests

Cruise high or low set speeds are exceeded

Maximum vehicle grade is exceeded

Request by an adaptive cruise system

DRIVING - Transmission

158 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

4

Clutch Abuse Protection The clutch can overheat and slip with improper use.Select the lowest possible start gear for the application.

If moving slowly is required, select 1st or R1.

Use the Service Brake and let Hill Start Aid assist you when launching on an incline.

Do NOT use the throttle to hold the vehicle on an incline. (Use Service Brake).

Do NOT use the throttle to stop roll back on an incline after Hill Start Aid disengages. (Use Service Brake and then relaunch).

Gear Display Icon (Clutch Abuse)

If the clutch does start to overheat, the display will show CA along with a warning tone. Full clutch actuation must be completed quickly. If not, the system will either open the clutch if not on the throttle or close the clutch if on the throttle. If the abuse continues, the system will open the clutch and take away throttle control for a short period of time to allow the clutch to cool down.

Automatic Transmissions An automatic transmission makes shifting much easier. It remains important to completely understand how to operate the transmission to optimize its efficiency. Please read the manual for your automatic transmission included with your vehicle.

WARNING

DO NOT leave the cab of your vehicle without applying the parking brake. The truck could roll and cause an acci- dent resulting in death or personal in- jury. Always apply the parking brake before you leave the cab.

Auxiliary Transmission If you have an auxiliary transmission, see your transmission manufacturers manual for its proper operation.

Brakes

Air Brake System

WARNING

DO NOT drive through water deep enough to wet brake components, as it may cause the brakes to work less ef- ficiently than normal. The vehicle's stopping distance may be longer than expected, and the vehicle may pull to the left or right when brakes are ap- plied, which could contribute to an ac- cident involving death or personal in- jury.

Compressed air is delivered to the brake system through the valve at the brake pedal and is controlled with various valves and braking circuits. The brake system is designed with separate front, rear, and (when applicable) trailer circuits so that if one circuit is compromised and loses air, the other circuits will not be affected. Safety valves in each circuit will protect the other circuits in the event that a circuit loses air.

DRIVING - Brakes

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 159

4

The air compressor on the engine will typically provide 100-130 psi (690-896 kPa) to the air tanks. The vehicle is also designed with an air dryer, which removes moisture from the compressed air in order to protect all components in the air system. The brake system may be further enhanced by additional devices such as brake proportioning valves, antilock braking systems, or sensors designed to let you know if your brake pads need to be serviced. Certain conditions may result in the brake surfaces getting wet. Brake surfaces that are wet do not perform as well as when they are dry. There may be situations where wet brake surfaces cannot be avoided. In such situations, apply the brakes while in motion, to dry the brake surfaces. Certain conditions may result in your brake surfaces becoming overheated (above 800F or 427C). Overheated brakes will damage linings and drum surfaces, ultimately decreasing brake performance. Refer to Retarders and Descending a grade to avoid overheating the brakes.

Parking Brake

1

2

3

1. Normal run position 2. Trailer park with vehicle released 3. System park or trailer charge with

vehicle parked Parking brakes work in reverse action of the regular brakes. When the parking brakes are engaged, air is exhausted from the spring chambers, which allows the spring to engage the brakes. This design also provides a safety function if a brake

circuit has a leak and loses air. In such a scenario, the parking brakes will apply. The vehicles parking brake controls are the yellow diamond shaped knob on your dash board. If the vehicle is equipped to tow a trailer, then there will be an additional red octagon shaped knob for the trailer parking brakes. Parking brakes will be engaged when either of these knobs are pulled OUT. (If one knob is pulled out, the other knob will automatically pop out.) Pushing IN a knob will disengage the respective parking brakes. If you push in the yellow knob only, you will disengage the vehicles parking brakes but will not disengage the trailer parking brakes (if applicable). Either knob will pop back out if the system pressure is not above 60 psi (414 kPa). The instrument panel display will provide a message any time the parking brakes (vehicle or the trailer) are set and the vehicle is put into motion.

DRIVING - Brakes

160 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

4

Engage Trailer Hand Brakes

Press the lever down to engage the Trailer Hand Brakes. Push the lever back up to release the Trailer Hand Brakes.

Automatic Traction Control

Your truck/tractor ABS is equipped with an automatic traction control (ATC) feature. This feature is controlled by a switch on the dash. Do not allow the traction control lamp to remain on continuously for an extended length of time. Extended continuous use of the ATC can cause overheating of the drive wheel brakes. Engine torque or vehicle

speed should be reduced to eliminate wheel spin and prevent excessive application of the ATC system. Except for checking for proper illumination of the ABS and traction control warning lamps when first starting the vehicle, and for monitoring these lamps while driving, no special operating procedures are required. For detailed system description, see literature for your specific ABS that was provided with your vehicle.

Antilock Brake Systems (ABS) This vehicle may be equipped with an ABS, which reduces the possibility of wheel lock-up. If a wheel is about to lock during braking, the ABS will automatically adjust air pressure to the brake chambers on the appropriate wheel(s) to prevent wheel lock-up. The ABS is automatically turned on when the ignition switch is turned on.

WARNING

The antilock brake system is a critical vehicle safety system. For the safety of you and others around you, have the vehicle submitted for periodic pre- ventive maintenance checks as well as

having any suspected problems imme- diately checked by an authorized deal- er. Failure to properly maintain your brake system can lead to serious acci- dents. Failure to comply may result in- property damage, personal injury, or death.

WARNING

DO NOT rely on an antilock brake sys- tem that is functioning improperly. You could lose control of the vehicle result- ing in a severe accident, causing per- sonal injury or death. If your ABS lamp goes on while you are driving or stays on after the self-check, your anti-lock system might not be working. The ABS may not function in an emergency. You will still have conventional brakes, but not antilock brakes. If the lamp indi- cates a problem, have the ABS checked.

Vehicles without ABS are typically equipped with a bobtail brake proportioning system. When a trailer is not connected, the drive axle brake application pressure will automatically be limited by the proportioning system. When driven in a

DRIVING - Brakes

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 161

4

bobtail mode, these tractors will require greater brake pedal application to provide the equivalent braking to a bobtail tractor not equipped with a proportioning system.

Trailer ABS Power Line Communication (PLC) North American on-highway vehicles are equipped with a separate electrical circuit to power the ABS on towed vehicle(s). In most cases, the ABS power will be supplied through the Auxiliary circuit on the primary 7-way trailer light line connector. If the vehicle was manufactured with a switchable Auxiliary circuit for trailer accessories, an additional 7-way connector would have been provided for trailer ABS power. In either case, the ABS power line on the vehicle will be PLC equipped.

CAUTION

DO NOT splice into the non-switchable Auxiliary circuit on the primary 7-way trailer light line. Doing so may cause the trailer ABS to malfunction. This cir- cuit is dedicated for trailer ABS power. To add a switchable auxiliary circuit, contact a dealership.

NOTE

Tractors/Trucks and trailers built after 03/01/2001 must be able to turn on an In-Cab Trailer ABS Warning Light (per U.S. FMVSS121). The industry chose Power Line Communication (PLC) as the standard method to turn it on. On trailers built prior to 03/01/2001 verify trailer ABS system status via the re- quired external warning light mounted on the trailer. The indicator light on the trailer should be yellow and identified with the letters ABS.

For doubles or triples, the lamp does not distinguish between trailers. An ABS problem in any of the trailers will activate the Trailer ABS Warning Lamp. If you change the intended service in any way (e.g., number of axles, multiple trailers, add switchable trailer accessories, etc.) from the date the vehicle was manufactured, you should contact your trailer manufacturer and/or trailer antilock brake manufacturer to determine if the power available at the 7-way trailer light line is adequate. Failure to do so might result in insufficient power to the trailer

ABS system, which may affect its operation.

CAUTION

The center pin of the 7-way trailer light line may be constantly powered for ABS. Make sure it will not accidentally turn on trailer equipment.

Special Trailer ABS Without PLC (Option) If a trailer does not have PLC, but it does have ABS that is powered through an optional second trailer connector (ISO 3731) and that trailer ABS is designed to control the Trailer ABS Warning Lamp in the cab and the vehicle has been ordered with the option to turn on this lamp for these types of trailers, then this lamp will turn on when that trailer ABS has a system problem. This should be checked by a dealer as soon as possible. The Trailer ABS Warning Lamp will not turn on for the power-on test when connected to these types of trailers.

DRIVING - Brakes

162 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

4

NOTE

Very few trailers built before 03/01/2001 have this option. Trailers built after 03/01/2001 are built with PLC technology.

Advanced ABS with Stability Control Advanced ABS with Stability Control is a feature that reduces the risk of rollovers and other loss of control situations. For vehicles towing trailers, the feature can reduce the risk of a trailer jackknifing. During operation, the system constantly compares performance models to the vehicles actual movement, using the wheel speed sensors of the ABS system, as well as lateral, yaw, and steering angle sensors. If the vehicle shows a tendency to leave an appropriate travel path, or if critical threshold values are approached, the system will intervene to assist the driver.

Electronic Stability Control may reduce the vehicle speed automatically. To minimize unexpected deceleration and reduce the risk of a collision the operator must:

Avoid aggressive driving maneuvers, such as sharp turns or abrupt lane changes at high speeds, which might trigger the stability system.

Always operate the vehicle safely, drive defensively, anticipate obstacles and pay attention to road, weather, and traffic conditions. ABS, ATC, and ESC stability systems are no substitute for prudent, careful driving.

Roll Stability

A Real World Example of How the System Operates Excessive speed for road conditions creates forces that exceed the threshold at which a vehicle is likely to roll over on a higher-friction surface. The system automatically reduces engine torque and applies the service brakes (based on the projected rollover risk) to reduce the vehicle speed, thereby reducing the tendency to roll over.

Roll Stability Example

Yaw Stability Yaw stability counteracts the tendency of a vehicle to spin about its vertical axis.

DRIVING - Brakes

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 163

4

During operation, if the friction between the road surface and the tires is not sufficient to oppose lateral (side) forces, one or more of the tires can slide, causing the truck/ tractor to spin. These yaw events are referred to as either "under-steer" (where there is a lack of vehicle response to steering input due to tire slide on the steer axle) or "over-steer" (where the tractor's rear end slides out due to tire slide on the rear axle) situation. Generally, shorter wheelbase vehicles (tractors, for instance) have less natural yaw stability, while longer wheelbase vehicles (straight trucks, for instance) have greater natural yaw stability. Factors that influence yaw stability are: wheelbase, suspension, steering geometry, weight distribution front to rear, and vehicle track width.

Yaw Control Yaw Control responds to a wide range of low- to high-friction surface scenarios including rollover, jackknife and loss of control. In the case of vehicle slide (over- steer or understeer situations), the system will reduce the throttle and then brake one or more of the "four corners" of the vehicle (in addition to potentially applying the trailer brakes), thus applying a counter- force to better align the vehicle with an

appropriate path of travel. For example, in an over-steer situation, the system applies the "outside" front brake; while in an under- steer condition, the "inside" rear brake is applied.

A Real World Example of How Yaw Control Operates Excessive speed exceeds the threshold, creating a situation where a vehicle is likely to spin and, where applicable, jackknife. The system reduces engine throttle and selectively applies brakes to reduce the vehicle speed, thereby reducing the tendency to jackknife.

Yaw Control Example

Automatic Traction Control

Your truck/tractor ABS has an automatic traction control (ATC) feature. This feature is controlled by a switch. This feature is monitored by a warning lamp located on the switch. The Traction Control warning lamp will briefly illuminate and then go out when the ignition switch is first turned on. The traction control warning lamp will illuminate whenever the ATC system detects drive wheel spin. The lamp will remain illuminated as long as wheel spin is detected and the ATC system is applying the drive wheel brakes or reducing engine torque. Engine torque or vehicle speed should be reduced to eliminate wheel spin and prevent excessive application of the ATC system. Except for checking for proper illumination of the ABS and traction control warning lamps when first starting the vehicle, and for monitoring these lamps while driving, no special operating procedures are required. For detailed system description, see literature for your specific ABS that was provided with your vehicle.

DRIVING - Brakes

164 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

4

This feature helps improve traction when vehicles are on slippery surfaces or surfaces with poor traction (i.e. mud or snow) by reducing drive wheel overspin. Automatic traction control works automatically in two different ways:

If a drive wheel starts to spin, ATC applies air pressure to brake the wheel. This transfers engine torque to the wheels with better traction.

If all drive wheels spin, ATC reduces engine torque to provide improved traction.

ATC turns itself on and off, you do not have to select this feature. If drive wheels spin during acceleration, the ATC Warning Lamp comes on, indicating wheel spin control is active. Do not allow the ATC Warning Lamp to remain on continuously for an extended length of time. Extended, continuous use of the ATC can cause overheating of the drive wheel brakes.

Deep Snow and Mud Switch A deep snow and mud switch is included with Automatic Traction Control (ATC). The Deep Snow and Mud feature is helpful during acceleration. This function increases available traction on extra soft surfaces like snow, mud, or gravel, by slightly increasing the permissible wheel

spin. When this function is in use, the ATC Warning Lamp blinks continuously.

Off-Road ABS Function Switch (Optional) Your vehicle may be equipped with a separate switch to activate an Off-Road ABS function. This function is NOT to be used for On-Highway driving but is intended to be used to improve stopping performance in Off-Highway conditions (e.g., loose gravel and mud). The Off-Road ABS function is accomplished by allowing a "wedge" of material to build-up in front of momentarily locked wheels.

Changes the ABS control limits to allow for a more aggressive ABS function while off-road.

Improves vehicle control and helps reduce stopping distances in off- road conditions or on poor traction surfaces such as loose gravel, sand, and dirt.

Allows retarders to function independently of the ABS function.

If your vehicle does not have an engine retarder, the Off- Road ABS switch will function the same.

WARNING

While the off road mode can improve vehicle control and shorten stopping distances, some steering ability may be reduced on certain surfaces result- ing from the momentarily sliding tires. Always operate your vehicle at safe operating speeds. Failure to do so may cause you to lose control of the vehicle and could result in an accident or personal injury.

CAUTION

Never drive your vehicle on improved roads/highways with the Off-Road ABS function turned on. When you drive your vehicle onto an improved road surface or highway, immediately turn off the Off-Road ABS switch. Fail- ure to do so will cause the ABS sys- tem to not function properly in an ABS event under 25 mph (40 km/h) and could result in an accident or personal injury.

DRIVING - Brakes

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 165

4

The ABS lamp flashes slowly during off- road mode engagement. This is done to alert you of a modification to the ABS control software. At speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h), the ABS controller operates in the normal on-highway mode. At speeds between 10 and 25 mph (16 and 40 km/h), the ABS control software is modified to allow short periods (0.25 seconds) of locked-wheel cycles. At speeds below 10 mph (16 km/h), the ABS control software is turned off to allow locked wheels. When the Off-Road ABS function is enabled, the Retarder Disable output is turned off. That is, the engine retarders are left to function without ABS intervention. For additional information, see the Off-Road ABS pamphlet in your vehicles glove box.

Effectiveness and Limitations ESC is designed and optimized for trucks and for tractors that tow single trailers. If a tractor equipped with ESC is used to power multiple trailer combinations (known as "doubles" or "triples") the effectiveness of the ESC system may be greatly reduced.

WARNING

Exercise extreme care when towing doubles or triples with a vehicle equip- ped with Electronic Stability Program. Excessive speed and aggressive ma- neuvers, such as sharp turns, sudden steering inputs or abrupt lane changes should be avoided because these ma- neuvers could cause loss of vehicle control possibly resulting in an acci- dent involving death or personal injury.

Additionally, the ESC stability systems effectiveness may be greatly reduced if:

The load shifts due to improper retention, accident damage or the inherently mobile nature of some loads (for example, hanging meat, live animals or partially laden tankers).

The vehicle has an unusually high or offset center of gravity (CG).

One side of the vehicle drops off the pavement at an angle that is too large to be counteracted by a reduction in speed.

The vehicle is used to haul double or triple trailer combinations.

If very rapidly winding steering inputs are inputted at high speeds.

There are mechanical problems with suspension leveling of the tractor or trailer resulting in uneven loads.

The vehicle is maneuvering on a high banked road creating either additional side forces due to the weight (mass) of the vehicle or a deviation between expected and actual yaw rates.

Gusty winds are strong enough to cause significant side forces on the vehicle and any towed vehicles.

To maximize the effectiveness of ESC: Loads must be properly secured

and evenly distributed at all times. Drivers need to exercise extreme

caution at all times, and avoid sharp turns, sudden steering inputs or abrupt lane changes at high speeds, particularly if:

The vehicle hauls loads that could shift

The vehicle or load has a high or offset center of gravity (CG) when loaded

The vehicle tows doubles or triples

DRIVING - Brakes

166 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

4

The ESC system was specifically calibrated and validated only for your vehicles original factory-built configuration. If your vehicles chassis components are altered (for example; a wheelbase extension or reduction, tag axle addition or removal, tractor to truck conversion or steering system component change) the ESC system must be disabled immediately by a qualified mechanic.

WARNING

Failure to disable ESC "Electronic Sta- bility Control" when modifying a vehi- cle could result in a loss of vehicle control possibly resulting in an acci- dent involving death or personal injury.

WARNING

For vehicles equipped with ESC (Elec- tronic Stability Control) do not replace the vehicles steering wheel with an af- termarket or different part number than originally supplied. Using a different steering wheel could cause ESC to malfunction causing a loss of vehicle

control possibly resulting in an acci- dent involving death or personal injury.

Whenever maintenance or repair work is performed to the steering mechanism, linkage, gear, adjustment of the wheel track, or if the steering angle sensor is replaced or the steering wheel is changed or re-centered, the Steering Angle Sensor must be re-calibrated.

WARNING

If the Steering Angle Sensor is not re- calibrated, the Yaw Control system will not function properly. An uncalibrated sensor could result in a loss of control of your vehicle which can lead to an accident involving death or personal injury.

Towing Doubles Or Triples May Reduce The Effectiveness Of Stability Systems ESC is designed and optimized for trucks and for tractors that tow single trailers. If a tractor equipped with ESC is used to power multiple trailer combinations (known as

"doubles" or "triples") the effectiveness of the ESC system may be greatly reduced.

WARNING

Exercise extreme care when towing doubles or triples with a vehicle equip- ped with Electronic Stability Program. Excessive speed and aggressive ma- neuvers, such as sharp turns, sudden steering inputs or abrupt lane changes should be avoided because these ma- neuvers could cause loss of vehicle control possibly resulting in an acci- dent involving death or personal injury.

Additionally, the ESC stability systems effectiveness may be greatly reduced if:

The load shifts due to improper retention, accident damage or the inherently mobile nature of some loads (for example, hanging meat, live animals or partially laden tankers).

The vehicle has an unusually high or offset center of gravity (CG).

One side of the vehicle drops off the pavement at an angle that is too large to be counteracted by a reduction in speed.

DRIVING - Brakes

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 167

4

The vehicle is used to haul double or triple trailer combinations.

If very rapidly winding steering inputs are inputted at high speeds.

There are mechanical problems with suspension leveling of the tractor or trailer resulting in uneven loads.

The vehicle is maneuvering on a high banked road creating either additional side forces due to the weight (mass) of the vehicle or a deviation between expected and actual yaw rates.

Gusty winds are strong enough to cause significant side forces on the vehicle and any towed vehicles.

To maximize the effectiveness of ESC: Loads must be properly secured

and evenly distributed at all times. Drivers need to exercise extreme

caution at all times, and avoid sharp turns, sudden steering inputs or abrupt lane changes at high speeds, particularly if:

The vehicle hauls loads that could shift

The vehicle or load has a high or offset center of gravity (CG) when loaded

The vehicle tows doubles or triples

The ESC system was specifically calibrated and validated only for your vehicles original factory-built configuration. If your vehicles chassis components are altered (for example; a wheelbase extension or reduction, tag axle addition or removal, tractor to truck conversion or steering system component change) the ESC system must be disabled immediately by a qualified mechanic.

WARNING

Failure to disable ESC "Electronic Sta- bility Control" when modifying a vehi- cle could result in a loss of vehicle control possibly resulting in an acci- dent involving death or personal injury.

WARNING

For vehicles equipped with ESC" Elec- tronic Stability Control" do not replace the vehicles steering wheel with an af- termarket or different part number than originally supplied. Using a different

steering wheel could cause ESC to malfunction causing a loss of vehicle control possibly resulting in an acci- dent involving death or personal injury.

Whenever maintenance or repair work is performed to the steering mechanism, linkage, gear, adjustment of the wheel track, or if the steering angle sensor is replaced or the steering wheel is changed or re-centered, the Steering Angle Sensor must be re-calibrated.

WARNING

If the Steering Angle Sensor is not re- calibrated, the Yaw Control system will not function properly. An uncalibrated sensor could result in a loss of control of your vehicle which can lead to an accident involving death or personal injury.

Retarders Various retarders are available, which function against the engine, driveline, or transmission. These are devices that use your engines power to slow down your

DRIVING - Brakes

168 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

4

vehicle. They reduce brake wear and tear and the need for continuous brake use, which can lead to your service brakes overheating. Ideally, you should always slow your vehicle with your retarder (where permitted by law) and use your service brakes only for stopping completely. Operating this way will greatly prolong the life of your brakes.

WARNING

DO NOT use the vehicles engine compression brake or exhaust brake in any situation that requires an immedi- ate stop and/or in situations of poor traction (such as wet, icy, or snow cov- ered roads). Trying to use the engine compression brake or exhaust brake instead of the service brakes may cause a loss of vehicle control, which may result in an accident involving death or personal injury.

WARNING

The service brakes must be used in an emergency. The retarder alone might not stop you fast enough to prevent an

accident. Failure to comply may result in death, personal injury, equipment or property damage.

The retarder is NOT intended as the primary brake for the vehicle, nor is it an emergency brake. The retarder only helps the service brakes by using pressure to slow the drivetrain. Use the service brakes for quick stops. Do not use the retarder when operating on road surfaces with poor traction (such as wet, icy, or snow covered roads or gravel). Retarders can cause the wheels to skid on a slippery surface. We recommend that you do not use your engine retarder to slow down when you are bobtailing or pulling an empty trailer.

WARNING

Using an engine retarder can cause a wheel lockup. The trailer is not loading the tires enough to give the traction you may need. When you are bobtail or unloaded, you can have a serious accident if your wheels lock suddenly during braking. You could be killed or injured. DO NOT use your retarder

when you are driving bobtail or with an unloaded trailer.

This vehicle may have a transmission retarder. Take your foot off the throttle and operate the retarder switch. When you do not need full retarder effect, you can apply it intermittently (off and on) to cause gradual or partial slowing. Continuous application of your retarder will cause your hydraulic fluid to get hotter. Intermittent application will help prevent overheating.

WARNING

DO NOT rely on your automatic trans- mission hydraulic retarder to stop your vehicle. If your engine shuts down, the vehicles retarder will cease to operate which may lead to an accident involv- ing death or personal injury. Always be ready to suddenly apply the service brakes.

DRIVING - Brakes

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 169

4

Axle and Suspension

Differential Lock

The vehicle may be equipped with switches to lock the either of the rear axle differentials. Depending on how the vehicle is specified, a combination of individual switches may be available that can lock the interaxle driveline and/or any combination of the forward rear or rear-rear driving axles. The interaxle differential switch allows each axle to turn independently. In certain situations, engaging the interaxle differential lock relieves stress on the rear axles and reduces tire wear. Engaging this switch will also provide better traction in slippery or loose gravel conditions. In the LOCK position, continuous operation on paved, dry surfaces, put stress on the axles, and can possibly damage the internal gears. The switch has a guard to prevent accidental operation of the switch. Locking the differentials is typically used during ice or snow conditions and without tire chains, unpaved roads that have loose

sand, mud or uneven surfaces. Look ahead and predict when the differential needs to be locked. Stop the vehicle and lock the differentials before approaching. While using the differential in the locked position, do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h). When disengaging the differential lock, reduce the throttle to prevent drivetrain damage.

WARNING

DO NOT put the differential lock in the LOCK position while the wheels are spinning freely (slipping), you could lose control of the vehicle or cause axle damage. Switch to LOCK only when the wheels are not spinning. Failure to comply may result in death, personal injury, equipment or property damage.

Dual Range (Two-Speed) Rear Axle

Your vehicle may be equipped with a two- speed or dual range axle (option). The low range provides maximum torque for hauling heavy loads or traveling over rough terrain. The high range is a faster ratio for highway speeds and general over-the-road conditions. A switch on the accessory switch panel controls the dual range rear axle. You will notice that the switch has a guard to protect you from activating it accidentally. Always park your vehicle with the range selector in LOW. Important tips on operating a dual range axle with inter-axle differential:

Shift the axle with the inter-axle differential in the unlocked position only.

When you are driving with poor traction, lock the differential. When you have the differential locked, drive with the axle in LOW range only.

When you are driving on a surface with good traction, keep the inter- axle differential unlocked. You can drive with the axle in the LOW or HIGH range.

Always UNLOCK the inter-axle differential before shifting the axle speed range.

DRIVING - Axle and Suspension

170 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

4

WARNING

Never shift the axle when moving downhill. Engine driveline disengage- ment may occur, eliminating engine re- tardation and allowing the wheels to spin faster than the current speed of the engine. This may require severe braking to slow the vehicle down and can result in an accident. Failure to comply may result in death, personal injury, equipment or property damage.

CAUTION

If you shift the axle range with the in- ter-axle differential in LOCK, you could seriously damage the axles. Never shift the axle range with the differential locked.

Proper shifting of the axle depends on the synchronization of engine/driveline and wheel speed. When you shift the axle, the connection between the engine and wheels is momentarily disengaged while the gearing is synchronized. Normally when the axle is shifted the speed of the engine,

axle, and wheels adjust, allowing for proper gear engagement. When going downhill the wheels will not slow down, but will tend to speed up, which makes gear synchronization almost impossible. As a result, the axle is neither in HIGH nor LOW range and all engine/ driveline retardation is lost. Without engine retardation it is more difficult to slow the vehicle down and greater stress is put on the brake system.

CAUTION

To avoid damaging your vehicle shift the axle at slower travel speeds until you are used to driving with a dual range axle.

How to Operate Two-Speed Axle - Low to High These steps should be used if operating a two-speed axle in LOW range on rough terrain and preparing to drive on an improved surface. When you go from rough terrain to highway driving, shift the axle to the HIGH range following this procedure:

1. Be sure the differential is UNLOCKED.

2. Maintain your vehicle speed (accelerator depressed) and move the Range Selector lever to HIGH.

3. Keep driving with the accelerator depressed until you want the axle to shift.

4. To make the axle shift, release the accelerator until the axle shifts. You are now in the HIGH axle range for highway speeds. Shift the transmission normally to reach your desired cruising speed.

How to Operate Two-Speed Axle - High to Low These steps should be used if operating a two-speed axle in HIGH range on improved roads and preparing to drive on rough terrain. When you go from highway driving to rough terrain, shift the axle to the LOW range following this procedure:

1. Maintain vehicle speed (accelerator depressed) and move the Range Selector lever to LOW.

2. Keep driving with the accelerator depressed until you want the axle to downshift.

DRIVING - Axle and Suspension

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 171

4

3. To make the axle downshift, release and depress the accelerator quickly to increase the engine rpm. The axle will shift to LOW range.

4. You are now in the LOW axle range for rough terrain and heavy loads. Shift the transmission normally to maintain the desired speed.

Auxiliary Axle

Adjustable auxiliary axles (commonly known as Pusher or Tag axles) can add to the productivity of the vehicle by increasing the load capabilities of the vehicle when they are in the deployed (down) position. There are different configurations of axles with different functionality (liftable versus steerable). Without the extra axle, the excessive weight can reduce the service life of vehicle components such as, but not limited to, the frame rail, axles, suspension and brakes. Operation of the auxiliary axles includes the proper maintenance of the system and

calibration of its controls. Operating the auxiliary axles will also require a firm understanding of the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) and the load that is being carried. The vehicle will have switches on the dash to control the position of the auxiliary axles. In certain situations, however, the system will override the controls to protect the axle system. For Self Steering Lift Axles, the axle will raise when the park brakes are applied or if the vehicle is placed in reverse. For Non-Steer Lift Axles, the axle will only automatically raise if the park brakes are applied and there are no park brakes on the lift axle. Non-Steer Lift Axles do not automatically raise when the vehicle is placed in reverse. Operating the auxiliary liftable axles must be performed in a manner that does not exceed the axle creep rating. Axle creep ratings are weight and speed limits that are allowed while the vehicle is fully loaded (in excess of the vehicles standard GAWR) and the axle is in its up position. Axle creep ratings are assigned by the axle manufacturer and are based on axle model and intended service of the vehicle. Contact an authorized dealership if you are unable to identify the axle creep rating of this vehicle.

Liftable/steerable (axle lift calibration required)

Liftable/non-steerable (axle lift calibration required)

Non-liftable (some suspensions require dump valve calibration)

WARNING

DO NOT operate or park the vehicle with auxiliary axles in the down/loaded position when vehicle is unladen, or is being unloaded. Raise or dump air into driver controlled auxiliary axle(s) prior to unloading vehicle. Failure to do so can result in loss of vehicle control or roll-away that may result in personal injury, property damage or death.

Auxiliary Axle Pressure Regulator Vehicles with liftable auxiliary axles will have knobs available to adjust the pressure in the auxiliary axle suspension. These knobs are in addition to the tag and pusher axle switches that control the axle position. Adding more pressure to the auxiliary axle will increase the pressure the auxiliary axle pushes down. Increasing pressure will

DRIVING - Axle and Suspension

172 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

4

decrease load on the drive axles and will decrease traction. Decreasing pressure will transfer more weight to the drive axles and will result in more traction from the drive axles. Deflate the auxiliary axle suspension before coupling or uncoupling a trailer. After the trailer is coupled or uncoupled, then increase pressure to balance traction and axle load requirements. Inflate air springs of the auxiliary axles to the desired pressure after coupling to a loaded trailer while still maintaining proper traction of the drive axles. Adjust the pressure regulator control knob to a lower pressure until desired traction is obtained. By reducing air pressure at pusher or tag axle, load will be transferred to drive axles. Do not overload drive axles. Always deflate air springs of the auxiliary axles before attempting to unload vehicle. This allows maximum traction of the drive axles to control the vehicle. Depending on the suspension, various calibrations may be required. Contact your authorized dealer or axle/suspension manufacturer for specific calibration procedures. Some suspensions require dump valve calibration. For example, some dead axles do not lift, but the air can be dumped out of

them to unload them when empty. Air pressure is controlled via an adjustable regulator. These axles need to be calibrated for load. Contact your authorized dealer or axle/ suspension manufacturer for dump valve calibration procedures.

Axle Creep Rating Vehicles outfitted with auxiliary axles and full truck configuration will have an axle creep rating which defines how much load is allowed when the vehicle has a full load and maneuvering the vehicle, at very slow speeds, with auxiliary axles in the up position. In these situations, the load exceeds the gross axle weight rating of the axles. Operator's using vehicles equipped with liftable auxiliary axles must consider creep ratings when any liftable axle is unloaded or in the raised position. Liftable auxiliary axles should only be raised (or unloaded) to improve maneuverability in an off-road use or when vehicle is unloaded.

WARNING

NEVER operate the vehicle with more pressure in the lift axles than is neces-

sary to carry the load, as determined by the calibration procedure described. Failure to do so can result in loss of traction and stability at the steer and/or drive axles and can result in increased braking distance, which could cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident. Failure to comply may result in death, personal injury, equipment or property damage.

NOTE

Axle Creep ratings MUST NOT be ex- ceeded.

CAUTION

Always lower the axles as soon as possible after receiving a load. Never exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving with a load with the auxiliary axle(s) raised/unloaded. Failure to lower the axle(s) can overload the frame and re- maining axles, and could cause equip- ment damage.

DRIVING - Axle and Suspension

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 173

4

CAUTION

DO NOT modify the air system and/or control functionality on a factory instal- led auxiliary axle(s). Modifying the fac- tory operation of the pusher and/or tag axle(s) will void your warranty, and can cause equipment damage.

CAUTION

A change in tire size on either the aux- iliary axles or the drive/steer axles can change the calibration of the auxiliary axles. If tires are installed with a differ- ent loaded radius, the calibration pro- cedure must be repeated. Failure to do so can cause equipment damage.

Contact your dealer or axle manufacturer to determine what the creep rating is for your particular axle(s) and configuration. Creep ratings are generally limited to the following:

Tandem rear axles only Straight trucks only Maximum spring mount centers per

axle manufacturers specifications

Maximum tire static loaded radius (SLR) per axle manufacturers specifications

Pusher or Tag Suspension Calibration Perform this procedure at or near a weight scale. Procedure can be performed while parked on the weight scale if scale is available. To obtain the desired axle load distribution, you must correlate the suspension air gauge pressure to the actual axle load by scaling the axle weight(s) and adjusting the pressure to obtain the desired load. Once the desired load or load range is achieved, document the pressure-to-load ratio or setting for future use.

NOTE

This procedure must be performed pri- or to placing the vehicle into service.

Add: Perform this procedure at or near a weight scale. Procedure can be performed while parked on the weight scale if scale is available.

Setting the Pressure-to- Load Ratio

To obtain the desired axle load distribution, you must correlate the suspension air gauge pressure to the actual axle load by scaling the axle weight(s) and adjusting the pressure to obtain the desired load. Once the desired load or load range is achieved, document the pressure-to-load ratio or setting for future use.

These instructions are general in nature. For more specific instructions, review the pusher or tag suspension manufacturers maintenance manual or contact the nearest authorized dealer.

1. Park the loaded vehicle on a level surface with the wheels blocked.

2. Release vehicles spring brakes. (Do not release for Liftable/Non- Steerable pusher or tag axles)

3. Lower the pusher/tag axles with the Axle Lift Control flip valve. (For some non-liftable axles, inflate air suspension)

4. Adjust the amount of load on each axle by turning the Pressure Regulator clockwise to increase the load, or counterclockwise to decrease the load. (The suspension manufacturer may publish pre-established Pressure- to-Load Ratio Pressure Settings to

DRIVING - Axle and Suspension

174 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

4

assist you in achieving an estimated ground load).

5. After setting the pressure to obtain the desired axle load, verify proper ground loading with the weight scale.

NOTE

Exceeding local, state, or federal weight limits may result in citations. Contact your local commercial weight enforcement office for limits in your area.

NOTE

Steerable-pusher and/or tag axle(s) will raise when the transmission is shifted into reverse or when the park- ing brakes are applied.

Air Suspension Ride Height Vehicles equipped with rear or front air suspensions have their ride height and axle (pinion) angle(s) preset at the factory. These are precision settings and should not be altered. Incorrectly adjusted ride

height may result in improper interaxle U- joint working angles. This can result in premature driveline wear and driveline vibration. If it becomes necessary to reset the ride height, you may temporarily set it by following the next procedure. Proper ride height measurement and values are shown in the illustration and table below.

CAUTION

Completing this procedure will enable you to safely reach the nearest author- ized dealer or repair facility to have ride height and pinion angle reset us- ing the proper equipment and techni- que. Do this as soon as possible to avoid potential driveline damage.

NOTE

Suitable wheel chocks are at a mini- mum an 18-inch (46 cm) long 4x4.

1. Park the vehicle, engage the parking brakes and clock the wheels.

2. Locate the air suspension ride height valve.

3. Ensure that the tractor is fully laden during this procedure. Do not use these procedures on a vehicle that is not laden (bobtail).

4. Ensure the air supply and delivery plumbing of the height control valve is consistent with the following illustrations.

5. Loosen the fasteners mounting the height control valve to its bracket.

DRIVING - Axle and Suspension

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 175

4

6. Rotate the valve either clockwise or counterclockwise until air pressure in the air springs provides the ride height specified for that suspension. Measure the ride height from the bottom of the frame rail to the approximate centerline of the rearmost drive axle hub:

For tandem axles, make the vertical measurement at the centerline of the suspension.

For a single axle, make the measurement in front of the axle, in the area forward of the tires but not past the suspension bracket.

7. When at the correct ride height, ensure that the height control valve lever is in the neutral position, then install either the built-in alignment pin or a 1/8 in. (3 mm) dowel.

8. Torque the mounting fasteners to 55-75 lb-in. (6.2-8.5 Nm).

9. Remove the alignment pin or dowel.

10. Repeat Steps 2 through 6 above for the right-hand valve on vehicles with a dual-valve system.

Air Ride Height Data These are factory settings for ride height of the rear air suspension.

1. Ride height 2. Centerline of suspension

Single Axle Laden Ride Height -in. (mm)

Air Trac 11.00 (279)

Low Air Leaf 6.50 (165)

Single Axle Unladen Ride Height -in. (mm)

Air Trac 11.39 (289)

Low Air Leaf 6.75 (171)

Tandem Axle Laden Ride Height - in. (mm)

Air Leaf 11.70 (297)

Air Trac 11.00 (279)

Low Air Leaf 8.50 (216)

Low Low Air Leaf 6.50 (165)

FLEX Air 8.50 (216)

Tandem Axle Unladen Ride Height -in. (mm)

Air Leaf 12.0 (305)

Air Trac 11.38 (289)

Low Air Leaf 8.75 (222)

Low Low Air Leaf 6.75 (171)

FLEX Air 8.75 (222)

DRIVING - Axle and Suspension

176 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

4

What to do if an Air Spring Ruptures If an air spring has ruptured, drive the vehicle to a safe stop off the highway to investigate the problem.

WARNING

DO NOT continue to drive with rup- tured air springs. The air loss can cause the spring brakes to apply al- lowing your brakes to drag and burn up the linings, which could lead to an accident causing death or personal in- jury. DO NOT continue to operate the vehicle in this condition.

WARNING

DO NOT drive the vehicle if the air pressure is less than 100 psi (690 kPa). Driving the vehicle with less than 100 psi (690 kPa) could make the brakes unsafe to use which could cause an accident involving death or personal injury.

CAUTION

Operating a vehicle with air suspen- sion bags either overinflated or under- inflated may cause damage to drive- line components. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h). Failure to comply may result in equipment dam- age.

You can get to a repair facility by removing the height control link connected to the axle and to the suspension air valve control arm. This will cause the air valve control arm to center in the closed position. Removing the link will allow the air system of the truck to operate normally so that the vehicle can be driven to a service center.

Suspension Air Pressure Gauge & Switch

Your vehicle may have an air suspension and a deflation switch which allows the air

in the suspension to be exhausted from a switch on the dash. The normal purpose of this feature is to allow you to lower the vehicle for loading. A guard on the switch prevents you from accidentally deflating the suspension. The Suspension Air Pressure gauge (optional) indicates the amount of air pressure in the air suspension springs in pounds per square inch (psi). Air pressure in the spring is related to the rear axle load. The greater the rear axle load, the greater the air pressure in the air bags. Therefore, the air pressure displayed will vary, depending upon the rear axle load.

Trailer Operations

How to Lock the Kingpin Ensure that the fifth wheel lock is in the unlocked position.

DRIVING - Trailer Operations

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 177

4

WARNING

Always inspect the fifth wheel for prop- er locking after coupling the tractor to a trailer. Failure to properly couple the tractor to a trailer (the kingpin is en- gaged in a closed lock jaw with the lock jaw secured by a closed plunger) may cause trailer separation which could result in an accident involving death or personal injury.

To lock the fifth wheel around the kingpin: 1. Ensure trailer brakes are locked

and the landing gear is down. 2. Back the tractor fifth wheel into the

trailer kingpin to engage and lock. JOST Fifth Wheel Indication

If equipped with JOST fifth wheel 3. Pull the tractor forward to ensure

the kingpin has been locked in place.

4. Set the tractor parking brake. 5. Connect the tractor brake air and

electric lines to the trailer. Conduct a pre-trip inspection prior to releasing the brakes, raising the landing gear, and driving the vehicle.

How to Release the Kingpin Remotely (option)

CAUTION

Do not deflate the rear suspension be- fore unlocking the fifth wheel. Deflating the rear suspension before unlocking the fifth wheel could cause difficulty during uncoupling and result in dam- age to the fifth wheel and kingpin.

1. Set both the vehicle and trailer parking brakes.

2. Lower the landing gear. 3. Disconnect the tractor brake air

and electric lines from the trailer. 4. Flip up cover, then press and hold

the Kingpin Release switch for 3 seconds. A countdown timer popup will appear on the display, and the

unlock symbol on the Kingpin Release switch will illuminate. The popup will inform the operator when to release the switch.

JOST Fifth Wheel Indication

If equipped with JOST Fifth Wheel

NOTE

The fifth wheel will not unlock unless the vehicle is stopped and the parking brake is set. In this situation, a red-col- ored popup appears, informing the op- erator that kingpin release is not avail- able and to set the parking brake. This will require restarting this procedure.

5. Release the switch. The unlock symbol on the Kingpin Release switch will turn off.

6. Ease tractor forward enough for the kingpin to clear the fifth wheel (about 12 to 18 inches).

DRIVING - Trailer Operations

178 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

4

NOTE

Do not drive tractor free of trailer.

7. If the tractor has a rear air suspension, deflate (dump) the rear suspension enough so that the fifth wheel will smoothly separate from the trailer.

Suspension Dump Symbol

8. Ease tractor forward, clearing the trailer.

9. If the rear suspension was deflated, return rear suspension to its normal height.

How to Release the Kingpin Manually

CAUTION

Do not deflate the rear suspension be- fore unlocking the fifth wheel. Deflating the rear suspension before unlocking the fifth wheel could cause difficulty during uncoupling and result in dam- age to the fifth wheel and kingpin.

NOTE

The specific method required to oper- ate the fifth wheel release handle will depend on the fifth wheel manufactur- er and model. The operator should be familiar with this method prior to at- tempting this procedure.

To release the kingpin and separate tractor from trailer

1. Position the tractor and trailer in a straight line on firm, level ground.

2. Set both the tractor and trailer parking brakes.

3. Exit cab and lower the trailer landing gear.

4. Disconnect brake air and electric lines from trailer, and secure lines.

5. Unlock the fifth wheel release handle if necessary, then unlock the fifth wheel.

NOTE

Operating the release handle and un- locking the fifth wheel will depend on the fifth wheel manufacturer.

6. Return to cab and release tractor parking brake.

7. Ease tractor forward enough for the kingpin to clear the fifth wheel (about 12 to 18 inches).

NOTE

Do not drive tractor free of trailer.

8. If the tractor has a rear air suspension, deflate (dump) the rear suspension enough so that the

DRIVING - Trailer Operations

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 179

4

fifth wheel will smoothly separate from the trailer.

Suspension Dump Symbol

9. Ease tractor forward, clearing the trailer.

10. If the rear suspension was deflated, return rear suspension to its normal height.

Air-Controlled Sliding Fifth Wheel (option)

Vehicles that have an air-controlled sliding fifth wheel have a fifth wheel slider lock controlled by a switch on the accessory switch panel. To operate this type of lock, move the switch to the appropriate position. By placing the switch in the UNLOCK position, you can slide the fifth wheel to various positions to adjust weight distribution. There is a guard on this switch

to protect you against accidentally activating or releasing the lock.

WARNING

Do not move the fifth wheel while the tractor-trailer is in motion. Your load could shift suddenly, causing you to lose control of the vehicle, which can result in an accident. Never operate the vehicle with the switch in the UN- LOCK position. Always inspect the fifth wheel after you lock the switch to be sure the fifth wheel lock is engag- ed. Failure to comply may result in property damage, personal injury, or death.

How to Slide the Fifth Wheel

WARNING

DO NOT move the fifth wheel while the tractor-trailer is in motion. Your load could shift suddenly, causing you to lose control of the vehicle. Never operate the vehicle with the switch in the UNLOCK position. Always inspect the fifth wheel after you lock the switch

to be sure the fifth wheel slide lock is engaged. Failure to comply may result in death, personal injury, equipment or property damage.

WARNING

Do not attempt to slide the fifth wheel until all persons and obstacles are clear of the vehicle.

NOTE

This procedure assumes a connected trailer. The trailer kingpin must be locked within the fifth wheel when changing slide positions.

1. Position the tractor and trailer in a straight line on firm, level ground.

2. Place the tractor in neutral, and set the tractor and trailer parking brakes.

3. Unlock the slide by repositioning the Fifth Wheel Slide switch.

DRIVING - Trailer Operations

180 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

4

CAUTION

Ensure the tractor and trailer brakes are engaged prior to sliding the fifth wheel. Failure to engage the brakes could result in uncontrolled sliding of the fifth wheel and possibly damage components on the tractor or trailer.

Fifth Wheel Slide Symbol

4. Inspect and verify that locking plungers have fully withdrawn from the fifth wheel slide tracks.

a. If locking plungers did not fully withdraw, move tractor slightly to reposition plungers and reinspect.

b. If plungers are still not fully withdrawn, lower the landing gear and deflate the rear suspension (if available) to lessen pressure on the slide.

Suspension Dump Symbol

5. Release the tractor parking brake, but keep the trailer brakes engaged.

6. Slowly ease tractor forward or backward, and stop at the desired position.

7. Lock the slide by returning the Fifth Wheel Slide switch to its previous position.

8. Inspect and verify that the locking plungers are fully inserted into the fifth wheel slide tracks.

a. If the locking plungers are not fully inserted in the track, move the tractor slightly to reposition plungers and reinspect.

WARNING

Do not operate the vehicle un- less the locking plungers are

fully inserted into the fifth wheel slide track. Operating the vehicle while the plungers are not fully inserted could lead to the slide moving unex- pectedly, resulting in a loss of vehicle control and potentially causing property damage, seri- ous injury, or death.

9. If the landing gear was lowered, raise the landing gear.

10. If the rear suspension was deflated, return rear suspension to its normal height.

Driving Tips and Techniques This section covers additional driving tips and techniques on how to drive your vehicle more efficiently.

DRIVING - Driving Tips and Techniques

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 181

4

Coasting

WARNING

DO NOT coast with the transmission in neutral or with the clutch pedal de- pressed, it is a dangerous practice. Coasting in neutral may result in dam- age to your drivetrain when you try to re-engage the transmission. You could lose control of the vehicle which can lead to an accident involving death or personal injury.

Do not coast with the transmission in neutral or with the clutch pedal depressed. Besides being illegal and dangerous, coasting is also expensive. It causes premature failure or damage to the clutch and transmission and overloads the brake system. Coasting with the transmission in neutral also prevents proper transmission component lubrication. During coasting the transmission is driven by the rear wheels, and the countershaft gear (which lubricates the transmission components by oil splash) will only be turning at idle speed.

Descending a Grade

WARNING

DO NOT hold the brake pedal down too long or too often while going down a steep or long grade. This could cause the brakes to overheat and re- duce their effectiveness. As a result, the vehicle will not slow down at the usual rate. To reduce the risk of an ac- cident which could cause death or per- sonal injury, before going down a steep or long grade, reduce speed and shift the transmission into a lower gear to help control your vehicle speed. Failure to follow procedures for proper downhill operation could result in loss of vehicle control.

Engine Overspeed

CAUTION

To avoid engine damage, do not let the engine rpm go beyond the maximum governed rpm. Engine damage may result if overspeed conditions occur.

NOTE

Often these recommendations are secondary to maintaining an adequate and safe speed relative to the sur- rounding traffic and road conditions.

Operate the engine within the optimum engine rpm range and do not allow the rpm to exceed the maximum governed speed. See your Engine Operation and Maintenance manual for information regarding engine rpm. When the engine is used as a brake to control vehicle speed (e.g., while driving down a grade), do not allow the engine rpm to exceed maximum governed speed. Under normal load and road conditions operate the engine in the lower end of the range. The tachometer is an instrument that aids in obtaining the best performance of the engine and manual transmission, serving as a guide for shifting gears. Refer to the Engine Operation and Maintenance manual for optimum engine rpm.

If the engine rpm moves beyond the maximum governed speed, indicating an overspeed condition, apply the service brake or shift to a

DRIVING - Driving Tips and Techniques

182 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

4

higher gear to bring engine rpm within the optimum speed range.

When driving downhill: shift to a lower gear, use the engine brake (if so equipped), and use the service brake, keeping the engine speed below 2,100 rpm.

When the engine speed reaches its maximum governed speed, the injection pump governor cuts off fuel to the engine. However, the governor has no control over the engine rpm when it is being driven by the vehicle's transmission, for example, on steep downgrades. Apply service brakes or shift to a higher gear. Fuel economy and engine performance are also directly related to driving habits:

The best results in trip time and fuel economy are obtained while driving the vehicle at a steady speed.

Shift into higher or lower gears (or apply the service brake) to keep engine rpm near the lower end of the optimum operating range.

Avoid rapid acceleration and braking.

WARNING

DO NOT look at the Instrument Cluster Display for prolonged periods while the vehicle is moving. Only glance at the monitor briefly while driving. Failure to do so can result in the driver not being attentive to the vehicles road position or situation, which could lead to an ac- cident and possible death, personal in- jury, or equipment damage.

The Instrument cluster display provides information to help the driver optimize vehicle efficiency. See Optimal Engine Speed Indicator on page 184 for more information. A driver will find the section describing Trip Information and the rpm detail useful.

Fuel Consumption The vehicle's fuel consumption is connected to five important factors: maintenance, driving habits, general condition of the road, traffic conditions, and vehicle load. Proper maintenance will keep the vehicle running like new even after long periods of

use. The driver must perform the daily and weekly checks of the vehicle. Maintenance factors affecting fuel consumption:

Air and/or fuel filters partially clogged

Engine valves out of adjustment Injection pump improperly

synchronized Injection nozzles defective or

uncalibrated Improperly inflated tires Wheel bearings improperly

adjusted Clutch improperly adjusted or worn

(slipping) Fuel leaks

Wrong driving habits must be corrected and the recommendations on economic driving should be followed. Driving factors affecting fuel consumption:

Excessive speed and unnecessary fast acceleration

Long periods of idling Driving with foot resting on the

(manual transmission) clutch pedal

DRIVING - Driving Tips and Techniques

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 183

4

General Condition Other factors affecting fuel consumption are related to loads and the type of roads on which the vehicle operates. It is not always possible to choose the most adequate road, but the ideal road is the one that allows a steady speed in high gear, without requiring frequent braking and acceleration. The following general conditions can affect fuel consumption:

Overload Unbalanced load Very high load Inadequate roads Traffic conditions

Optimal Engine Speed Indicator The tachometer displays a green bar just below the most efficient engine speed for the vehicle. The placement and size of this bar is dependent on the engine as installed at the factory. The drivers general goal should be to select a gear that keeps the tachometer needle positioned over the green light as much as possible during steady state driving. In addition to proper maintenance and good driving habits, this visual cue can help minimize the fuel consumption.

What to Consider when using a Sleeper Bunk If your vehicle has an upper and lower bunk, the upper bunk can be folded up out of the way to provide you with more dressing area in the sleeper cab. The lower bunk has storage underneath it to stow your luggage and other belongings. The upper bunk weight limit is 320 lb (145 kg).

WARNING

Always keep the lower bunk in its down (latched) position while the vehi- cle is moving. If left open, stored items could become loose during an acci- dent and strike you. Before you move the vehicle, check to be sure the lower bunk is latched securely. Failure to comply may result in death or personal injury.

WARNING

Be sure the latch that holds the upper bunk in the folded position is working properly so the bunk will not fall down. If the bunk falls, you could be injured.

WARNING

Any loose items on the upper or lower bunk should be moved to a secured place before driving the vehicle. Fail- ure to comply may result in death, per- sonal injury, equipment or property damage.

WARNING

Be sure the restraint system is used when anyone is occupying the sleeper while the vehicle is moving. In an acci- dent, an unrestrained person lying in a sleeper bunk could be seriously in- jured. He or she could be thrown from the bunk. Failure to comply may result in death, personal injury, equipment or property damage.

DRIVING - What to Consider when using a Sleeper Bunk

184 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

4

WARNING

Be sure no one ever rides in the upper bunk. That person could be thrown out in an accident and could be very seri- ously injured. The upper bunk is not equipped with a restraint system. DO NOT use the upper bunk while you are moving. Failure to comply may result in death, personal injury, equipment or property damage.

The sleeper restraint is stored in a compartment on the rear sleeper cab wall. Sleeper Bunks and Restraints on page 30, for more information on cab/seat restraint systems.

WARNING

Failure to properly use the sleeper re- straint when an individual is located in the sleeper bunk and the vehicle is moving can result in death or personal injury.

To Lower Upper Bunk

Pull on the lanyard in the upper left corner of the bunk to release the bunk.

This will free it from the anchored position and allow you to lower the bunk.

To Raise Upper Bunk

Fold the upper bunk up and push it against the retaining latch until you hear a click. Pull on the bunk to be sure it is latched securely.

Upper Bunk Ladder Considerations If your vehicle is equipped with the upper bunk ladder, ensure that you follow the safety tips as detailed in How to Access the Upper Bunk on page 14.

Stopping the Vehicle A hot engine stores a great amount of heat. It doesnt cool down immediately after you shut it off. Always cool your engine down before shutting it off. You will greatly increase its service life. Idle the engine at 1,000 rpm for five minutes. Then low idle for 30 seconds before shutdown. This will allow circulating coolant and lubricating oil to carry away heat from the cylinder head, valves, pistons, cylinder liners, turbocharger, and bearings. This way you can prevent serious engine damage that may result from uneven cooling.

Turbocharger This cooling-down practice is especially important on a turbocharged engine. The turbocharger contains bearings and seals that are subjected to hot exhaust gases. While the engine is operating, heat is carried away by circulating oil. If you stop the engine suddenly, the temperature of the turbocharger could rise as much as 100F (55C) above the temperature reached during operation. A sudden rise in temperature like this could cause the bearings to seize or the oil seals to loosen.

Refueling Air space in your fuel tanks allows water to condense there. To prevent this condensation while you are stopped, fill your tanks to 95 percent of capacity. When refueling, add approximately the same amount to each fuel tank on vehicles with more than one tank.

DRIVING - Stopping the Vehicle

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 185

4

WARNING

DO NOT carry additional fuel contain- ers in your vehicle. Fuel containers, ei- ther full or empty, may leak, explode, and cause or feed a fire. Failure to comply may result in death or personal injury.

WARNING

Diesel fuel in the presence of an igni- tion source could cause an explosion. A mixture of gasoline or alcohol with diesel fuel increases this risk of explo- sion. DO NOT remove a fuel tank cap near an open flame. Use only the fuel and/or additives recommended for your engine. Failure to comply may re- sult in death, personal injury, equip- ment or property damage.

CAUTION

Use only Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel (ULSD) Fuel, as recommended by en-

gine manufacturers. If you need further information on fuel specifications, con- sult the Engine Operation and Mainte- nance Manual.

If your vehicle is equipped with fuel shut off valves for the take-off and return lines, they are located on the fuel lines entering the top of the fuel tank. Fuel shut off valves for the fuel crossover line are on the bottom of the fuel tank, at the crossover line connection.

Final Stopping Procedures Your vehicle will be easier to start driving when you are ready, and it will be safer for anyone who might be around it. Please remember, too, that in some states it is illegal to leave the engine running and the vehicle unattended.

WARNING

Using the trailer hand brake or air brakes to hold a parked vehicle is dan- gerous. Because they work with air pressure, these brakes could come loose. Your vehicle could roll, causing an accident involving death or person-

al injury. Always set the parking brakes. Never rely on the trailer hand brake or truck air brakes to hold a parked vehicle.

WARNING

Lift axles that are not equipped with parking brakes should be fully raised when parking the vehicle. Lift axles, that are not equipped with parking brakes, left in the down position while parked, in certain cases, could cause the parked vehicle to roll, causing an accident involving death or personal injury.

1. Set the parking brake before leaving the drivers seat. To hold your vehicle while it is parked, DO NOT rely on:

Air Brakes Hand Control Valve for Trailer

Brakes Engine Compression

2. If you are parked on a steep grade, block the wheels.

DRIVING - Stopping the Vehicle

186 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

4

3. Drain water from the air reservoirs. While the engine and air supply system are still warm, drain moisture from the air reservoirs. Open the reservoir drains just enough to drain the moisture. Dont deplete the entire air supply. Be sure to close the drains before leaving the vehicle.

4. Secure the vehicle. Close all the windows and lock all the doors.

DRIVING - Stopping the Vehicle

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 187

4

Chapter 5 | MAINTENANCE New Vehicle Maintenance Schedule.................................................................................................191 First Day............................................................................................................................................191 First 50-100 mi / 80-160 km.............................................................................................................. 192 First 500 mi / 800 km.........................................................................................................................192 First 2,000 mi / 3,218 km...................................................................................................................192 First 3,000-5,000 mi / 4,800-8,000 km.............................................................................................. 193 Maintenance Schedule......................................................................................................................194 At first 15,000 mi / 24,000 km or at first PM......................................................................................195 Component Specific Intervals........................................................................................................... 199 Every 15,000 mi / 24,000 km / Monthly.............................................................................................203 Every 25,000 mi / 40,000 km / 6 Months...........................................................................................208 Every 30,000 mi / 48,000 km............................................................................................................ 209 Every 60,000 mi / 96,000 km / 6 Months...........................................................................................213 Every 120,000 mi / 192,000 km / Annually........................................................................................222 Every 240,000 mi / 384,000 km........................................................................................................ 227 Every 300,000 mi / 480,000 km / 6,750 Hours / 3 Years...................................................................228

MAINTENANCE -

188 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

Every 500,000 mi / 800,000 km / 5 years..........................................................................................229 Every 750,000 mi / 1,200,000 km/ 24,000 Hours / 8 years...............................................................229 Lubricants..........................................................................................................................................230 Checking Oil Level............................................................................................................................ 231 Air System.........................................................................................................................................232 Dual Air System Function Test..........................................................................................................234 Air Dryer Maintenance...................................................................................................................... 234 Air Tanks........................................................................................................................................... 236 Air Gauges and Air Leaks................................................................................................................. 236 Air Compressor................................................................................................................................. 238 Brake System....................................................................................................................................239 Cab Maintenance..............................................................................................................................241 Cab Structure, Doors and Hoods......................................................................................................247 Safety Restraint System - Inspection................................................................................................247 Cooling System Maintenance........................................................................................................... 250 Electrical System...............................................................................................................................254 Engine Maintenance......................................................................................................................... 264 Frame................................................................................................................................................271 Fuel System...................................................................................................................................... 273

MAINTENANCE -

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 189

5

Front Axle and Suspension...............................................................................................................273 Heater and Air Conditioner Maintenance..........................................................................................276 Noise and Emission Control..............................................................................................................279 Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank Straps...........................................................................................282 Rear Axle and Suspension................................................................................................................282 Steering System................................................................................................................................288 Driveline............................................................................................................................................ 290 Tires.................................................................................................................................................. 290 Wheels.............................................................................................................................................. 294 Windshield Wiper/Washer.................................................................................................................297 Transmission Maintenance............................................................................................................... 297 Hydraulic Clutch................................................................................................................................298 Specification Reference Charts.........................................................................................................299

MAINTENANCE -

190 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

New Vehicle Maintenance Schedule First Day

First Day

Perform a total vehicle alignment once a body is installed on the truck chassis.

Steering U-joint Pinch Bolt Refer to Steering Shaft Bolt Torque Specifications on page 290 for maintenance instructions.

Front Suspension - U-bolts Check the general condition and the tightness of the nuts. Tighten the U-bolts using a calibrated torque wrench to the specified

torque value. (Refer to Suspension U-Bolts, Grade 8 on page 306 for maintenance instructions.)

Front Suspension - SOFTEK NXT (Hendrickson) - Shock Absorbers Inspect for leaking, body damage, and damaged or worn bushings. Replace as required. Check the shock mounting stud

torque. (Refer to Front Axle and Suspension on page 273 for maintenance instructions.)

Front Suspension - SOFTEK NXT (Hendrickson) - Spring Pins and Shackles Inspect for worn parts and excessive joint clearance. Shim or replace as required. (Refer to Front Axle and Suspension on page

273 for maintenance instructions.)

Front Suspension - SOFTEK NXT (Hendrickson) - Ride Height Inspect that ride height is within specifications. (Refer to Air Suspension Ride Height for maintenance instructions)

Front Axle - SOFTEK NXT (Hendrickson) - Axle Clamp Through Bolts Check the tightness of the through bolts at the bolt head. Tighten the fasteners using a calibrated torque wrench to the specified

torque value. (Refer to the Hendrickson operators manual for torque specifications.)

MAINTENANCE - New Vehicle Maintenance Schedule

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 191

5

First 50-100 mi / 80-160 km First 50-100 mi / 80-160 km4

Wheel Mounting Refer to Wheels on page 294 for maintenance instructions.

First 500 mi / 800 km First 500 mi / 800 km5

Front Axle U-Bolt Torque Refer to Suspension U-Bolts, Grade 8 on page 306 for maintenance instructions.

Charge Air Cooler and Air Intake Pipe Clamps Retorque fasteners. Refer to Pipe and Hose Clamp Torque Values on page 266 for maintenance instructions.

First 2,000 mi / 3,218 km

4 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

5 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

MAINTENANCE - First 50-100 mi / 80-160 km

192 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

First 2,000 mi / 3,218 km6

Rear Suspension Fasteners Refer to Rear Axle and Suspension on page 282 for maintenance instructions.

First 3,000-5,000 mi / 4,800-8,000 km First 3,000-5,000 mi / 4,800-8,000 km 7

Transmission Lubrication For Fuller transmission, refer to Fuller Transmission Lubrication on page 297 for maintenance instructions. For Allison transmission, refer to Allison Transmission Lubrication on page 298 for maintenance instructions.

Axle Lubrication. For Meritor axle, refer to Meritor Axle Lubrication on page 286 for maintenance instructions. For Eaton/Dana axle, refer to Eaton/Dana Axle Lubrication on page 285 for maintenance instructions.

6 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

7 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

MAINTENANCE - First 3,000-5,000 mi / 4,800-8,000 km

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 193

5

Maintenance Schedule Preventive maintenance program begins with the daily and weekly routine checks Daily Checks on page 35. Routine vehicle checks can help avoid many large, expensive, and time consuming repairs. The vehicle will operate better, be safer, and last longer. Neglect of recommended maintenance can void your vehicles warranty. Some maintenance operations demand skills and equipment you may not have. For such situations, please take your vehicle to an authorized Service Center.

WARNING

Before attempting any procedures in the engine compartment, stop the en- gine and let it cool down. Hot compo- nents can burn skin on contact. Failure to comply may result in death, person- al injury, equipment or property dam- age.

WARNING

If the engine must be operating to in- spect, be alert and cautious around the engine at all times. Failure to com- ply may result in death, personal in- jury, equipment or property damage.

WARNING

If work has to be done with the engine running, always (1) set the parking brake, (2) block the wheels, and (3) ensure that the shift lever or selector is in Neutral. Failure to comply may re- sult in death, personal injury, equip- ment or property damage.

WARNING

Exercise extreme caution to prevent neckties, jewelry, long hair or loose clothing from getting caught in the fan blades or another moving engine parts. Failure to comply may result in death, personal injury, equipment or property damage.

WARNING

Always support the vehicle with appro- priate safety stands if it is necessary to work underneath the vehicle. A jack is not adequate for this purpose. Failure to comply may result in death, person- al injury, equipment or property dam- age.

WARNING

When working underneath the vehicle without appropriate safety stands but with the wheels on the ground (not supported), make sure that (1) the ve- hicle is on hard level ground, (2) the parking brake is applied, (3) all wheels are blocked (front and rear) and (4) re- move the ignition key so that the en- gine cannot be started. Failure to com- ply may result in death, personal in- jury, equipment or property damage.

MAINTENANCE - Maintenance Schedule

194 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

WARNING

NEVER start or let the engine run in an enclosed, unventilated area. Ex- haust fumes from the engine contain carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas. Carbon monoxide can be fatal if inhaled. Failure to comply may result in property damage, per- sonal injury, or death.

WARNING

Disconnect the battery ground cable whenever you work on the fuel system or the electrical system. When you work around fuel, do not smoke or work near heaters or other fire haz- ards. Keep an approved fire extin- guisher near to you. Failure to comply may result in death, personal injury, equipment or property damage.

The following pages contain a table of maintenance tasks with the related intervals for each task on the right side of the table. The top of the table displays a guide to a maintenance interval and its schedule. Some tasks are dependent on

the vehicle application. These tasks will be shown as separate tasks and will have the words ON HIGHWAY, CITY DELIVERY or OFF-HIGHWAY after the description. These tasks are differentiated because they are dependent on the vehicles operating environment. On highway is defined for applications where the vehicle is NOT used off of a paved road during normal operation. City Delivery is defined for applications where frequent start and stopping is required during normal operation and the highway is used infrequently and for short periods of time. Off highway is defined for applications where the vehicle may be driven off the pavement on a regular basis, even if it is an infrequent basis and/or for a brief time period. Please contact an authorized service dealership if there are questions regarding which interval to follow. Consult the supplier for specific recommendations where discrepancies develop between these recommendations in this table and component supplier recommendations.

Engine lubricating oil change intervals arent listed here. Refer to your engines operating manual for recommendations. For specific information on maintenance

procedures consult your vehicle maintenance manual.

The initial fill of drive axle lubricant must be changed before the end of the first scheduled maintenance interval. See the axle manufacturer's operator's manual for recommended lubrication specifications and service intervals.

The initial fill of lubricant in manual transmissions must be changed before the end of the first maintenance interval. See the transmission manufacturer's operator's manual for recommended lubrication specifications and service intervals.

If your vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission, consult the owners manual for it that came with your vehicle to obtain lubricant check and change intervals.

At first 15,000 mi / 24,000 km or at first PM

MAINTENANCE - At first 15,000 mi / 24,000 km or at first PM

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 195

5

At first 15,000 mi / 24,000 km or at first PM8

Front Suspension U-bolts (ON HIGHWAY) Check the general condition and the tightness of the nuts. Tighten the nuts to the specified torque value as

required; (Refer to Suspension U-Bolts, Grade 8 on page 306 for maintenance instructions.) (VOCATIONAL) Check the general condition and the tightness of the nuts. Tighten the U- bolts after the first day or two of

operation. Then tighten the nuts to the specified torque value as required; (Refer to Suspension U-Bolts, Grade 8 on page 306 for maintenance instructions.)

Drive Axle (SISU) - Axle Housing Drive Axle (SISU) Oil Servicing on page 287 Drive Axle (SISU) Inspection on page 287 Drive Axle (SISU) Inspection on page 287

Rear Suspension - U-bolts Check the torque. Tighten to specified torque value as required.(Refer to Suspension U-Bolts, Grade 8 on page 306 for

maintenance instructions.)

Rear Suspension - Mounting Brackets and Fasteners Check the condition and the fastener torque. Tighten to the specified torque value as required; (Refer to Rear Axle and

Suspension on page 282 for maintenance instructions.)

Main and Auxiliary Transmission (including Eaton Automated or PACCAR Transmission) - Main and Auxiliary Transmission and Transfer Case Inspect for visible damage, signs of overheating, and leaks. (Refer to Transmission Maintenance on page 297 for maintenance

instructions.)

8 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

MAINTENANCE - At first 15,000 mi / 24,000 km or at first PM

196 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

At first 15,000 mi / 24,000 km or at first PM8

Main and Auxiliary Transmission (including Eaton Automated or PACCAR Transmission) - Main and Auxiliary Transmission (OFF HIGHWAY) Drain lubricant while warm. Flush each unit with clean flushing oil. (Refer to Transmission Maintenance on page 297 for

maintenance instructions.)

Auxiliary Transmission - Cotta Transfer Case TR2205 Fabco Transfer Case TC142/TC143/ TC170/ TC270 Marmon-Harrington Transfer Case MVG2000/ MVG2000SD Initial oil change: Drain oil while warm: flush case with gear oil-compatible fluid, clean magnetic drain plug, and refill. Do not

flush the case with any solvent.

Cooling - Hoses Check the radiator and heater hoses for leaks. (Refer to Cooling System Maintenance on page 250 for maintenance

instructions.)

Cooling - Fan Clutch Check for air leaks. Check the fan drive bearings (turn the sheave in both directions to check for worn hub bearings.)(Refer to

Engine Fan on page 267 for maintenance instructions.)

Cooling - Solenoid Valve Check the fan drive for proper engagement and disengagement. (Refer to Engine Fan on page 267 for maintenance

instructions.)

Power Steering - Reservoir (ON HIGHWAY) Drain, replace the filter, and refill; (Refer to Check Power Steering Fluid Level on page 289 for maintenance instructions.)

8 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

MAINTENANCE - At first 15,000 mi / 24,000 km or at first PM

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 197

5

At first 15,000 mi / 24,000 km or at first PM8

Power Steering - Reservoir (OFF HIGHWAY) Drain, replace the filter, and refill. (Refer to Check Power Steering Fluid Level on page 289 for maintenance instructions.)

Steering Components - Drag link Tube Clamp and Ball Socket Check the torque: tighten to specified torque value as required. (Refer to Steering System on page 288 for maintenance

instructions.)

Steering Components - Pitman Arm Clamp Bolt and Nut Check the torque: tighten to specified torque value as required. (Refer to Steering System on page 288 for maintenance

instructions.)

Steering Components - Steering Intermediate Shaft Check the torque on the pinch bolt and nut. (Refer to Steering Shaft Bolt Torque Specifications on page 290 for maintenance

instructions.)

Steering Components - Steering Intermediate Shaft U-joints (ON HIGHWAY) Lubricate [EP NLGI #2 HD grease, -10 to 325F (-23 to 163C) range]. (Refer to Steering System on page 288 for maintenance

instructions.)

Steering Components - Steering Intermediate Shaft U-joints (OFF HIGHWAY or CITY DELIVERY) Lubricate [EP NLGI #2 HD grease, -10 to 325F (-23 to 163C) range]. (Refer to Steering System on page 288 for maintenance

instructions.)

Steering Components - Drag link and Tie Rod Arm Ball Sockets (ON HIGHWAY, OFF HIGHWAY or CITY DELIVERY) Lubricate (EP NLGI #2 lithium-based, HD grease.) (Refer to Steering System on page 288 for maintenance instructions.)

8 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

MAINTENANCE - At first 15,000 mi / 24,000 km or at first PM

198 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

At first 15,000 mi / 24,000 km or at first PM8

Fuel and Tanks - Fuel Tank Straps Check the strap tightness: tighten to proper torque value as required; aluminum tank - 30 lb-ft (41 Nm) cylindrical steel tank - 8

lb-ft (11 Nm.) (Refer to Fuel Tank on page 273 for maintenance instructions.)

Driveshafts - Models SPL-90, 1710 and 1810 Slip Member and U-joints Lubricate*

Driveshafts - Models SPL- 140/140HD/170/170HD/250/250HD Slip Members and U- joints (OFF HIGHWAY) Lubricate*

Electrical and Lights - Fuel and Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank Sending Unit Check the mounting screws and electrical connections for worn or damaged wires and connectors. (Refer to Diesel Exhaust

Fluid (DEF) Tank Straps on page 282 for maintenance instructions.)

Component Specific Intervals These maintenance tasks should be reviewed at each maintenance interval. They are not specific to one interval.

8 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

* Use only Spicer Driveshaft approved lubricants when greasing Spicer U-joints.

MAINTENANCE - Component Specific Intervals

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 199

5

Component Specific Intervals9

Drive Axle (Dana) - Axle Housing Drive Axle - Dana on page 285

Drive Axle (Meritor Line Haul / ON HIGHWAY) Drive Axle - Meritor on page 286

Drive Axle (Meritor City Delivery / OFF HIGHWAY) Drive Axle - Meritor on page 286

Front Axle - Vocational (PACCAR) - Kingpin Bushings, Thrust Bearings, and Tie Rod Ball Ends (OFF-HIGHWAY) Lubricate with approved grease. Weekly regardless of mileage. (Refer to Front Axle and Suspension on page 273 for

maintenance instructions.)

Front Axle - Vocational (PACCAR) - Steering Knuckle Spindles, Thrust Bearings, Kingpins, Drawkeys, Tie Rod Ends, Steering Stops, and Bushings (OFF-HIGHWAY) Inspect for wear and damage and for endplay. Shim or replace as required. Weekly regardless of mileage. (Refer to Front Axle

and Suspension on page 273 for maintenance instructions.)

Eaton Automated or PACCAR Transmission (Only) - Lubrication (OFF-HIGHWAY) Perform maintenance on the air dryer - 360,000 miles/576,000 km (Refer to Air Dryer Maintenance on page 234 for

maintenance instructions.) Drain lubricant while warm. Flush each unit with clean flushing oil. (Refer to Transmission Maintenance on page 297 for

maintenance instructions.)

Air Intake - Air filter Replace the engine intake air filter element. Every 12 months or when required by air restriction indicator or required by the

engine manufacturers operator manual. (Refer to Air Intake System on page 268 for maintenance instructions.)

9 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

MAINTENANCE - Component Specific Intervals

200 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

Component Specific Intervals9

Clutch - Clutch Hydraulic Fluid Replace fluid and bleed system. 240,000 mi (384,000 km) or 2 years, whichever occurs first. (Refer to Hydraulic Clutch on page

298 for maintenance instructions.)

Tires and Wheels - Tires Check inflation pressure. Weekly "cold" using calibrated gauge. (Refer to Tires on page 290 for maintenance instructions.)

Driveshafts - Models SPL-90, 1710 and 1810 slip member and U-joints Inspect. U-joint inspections should be performed every time a vehicle comes in for scheduled maintenance.

Driveshafts - Models SPL-100 slip member and U-joints Inspect. U-joint inspections should be performed every time a vehicle comes in for scheduled maintenance.

Driveshafts - Models SPL-140/140HD/170/170HD/250/250HD slip members and U-joints (ON HIGHWAY and LINEHAUL) Inspect. U-joint inspections should be performed every time a vehicle comes in for scheduled maintenance.

Driveshafts - Models SPL-140/140HD/170/170HD/250/250HD slip members and U-joints (ON HIGHWAY and LINEHAUL) Inspect. U-joint inspections should be performed every time a vehicle comes in for scheduled maintenance.

Driveshafts - Models SPL-140XL/170XL/250XL slip members and U-joints (OFF HIGHWAY) Lubricate. 350,000 mi (560,000 km) 1st interval and then every 100,000 mi (160,00 km) after that.

Driveshafts - Models SPL-140XL/170XL/250XL slip members and U-joints (ON HIGHWAY and LINE HAUL) Inspect. U-joint inspections should be performed every time a vehicle comes in for scheduled maintenance.

9 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

* Use only Spicer Driveshaft approved lubricants when greasing Spicer U-joints.

MAINTENANCE - Component Specific Intervals

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 201

5

Component Specific Intervals9

Driveshafts - Models SPL-140XL/170XL/ 250XL slip members and U-joints (OFF HIGHWAY and CITY) Inspect. U-joint inspections should be performed every time a vehicle comes in for scheduled maintenance.

Aftertreatment System - Diesel particulate filter Clean filter. Refer to the Engine Maintenance Manual.

Aftertreatment System - Diesel exhaust fluid supply module Replace filter. Refer to the Engine Maintenance Manual.

Air - Air dryer (ON HIGHWAY) 360,000 miles/576,000 km (Refer to Air Dryer Maintenance on page 234 for maintenance instructions.)

Air - Air Dryer (Oil- Coalescing Desiccant Cartridge) Annually regardless of mileage. (Refer to Air Dryer Maintenance on page 234 for maintenance instructions.)

Engine - Basic Engine Maintenance and service interval recommendations are detailed in the engine manufacturers Operations and Maintenance Manual included with the vehicle. The engine manufacturers recommendations vary depending engine model. Information is also available from authorized dealers, the engine manufacturers authorized service centers, and the engine manufacturers web site.

Safety - Three-point Safety Belt System Inspect. 20,000 miles/32,000km If the vehicle is exposed to severe environmental or working conditions, more frequent

inspections may be necessary. (Refer to Safety Restraint System - Inspection on page 247 for maintenance instructions.)

9 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

MAINTENANCE - Component Specific Intervals

202 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

Every 15,000 mi / 24,000 km / Monthly

Every 15,000 mi / 24,000 km / Monthly10

Frame - Fifth Wheel Check the kingpin lock and plate for wear and function: lubricate (NLGI #2 grease.) (Refer to Fifth Wheel Monthly Maintenance

on page 272 for maintenance instructions.)

Front Axle - SOFTEK NXT (Hendrickson) - Kingpin Bearings (OFF HIGHWAY or CITY DELIVERY) Multipurpose Grease NLGI Grade 2

Front Suspension - Spring Pins Check for proper function. (Refer to Front Axle and Suspension on page 273 for maintenance instructions.)

Front Suspension - U-bolts (OFF HIGHWAY) Check the general condition and the tightness of the nuts. Tighten the U- bolts after the first day or two of operation. Then

tighten the nuts to the specified torque value as required. (Refer to Suspension U-Bolts, Grade 8 on page 306 for maintenance instructions.)

Front Suspension - SOFTEK NXT (Hendrickson) - Leaf Spring Bushing Threaded (optional) (LINE HAUL, CITY DELIVERY and OFF HIGHWAY) EP Chassis Grease NLGI Grade 2

10 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

MAINTENANCE - Every 15,000 mi / 24,000 km / Monthly

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 203

5

Every 15,000 mi / 24,000 km / Monthly10

Drive Axle - Vocational (PACCAR) - Axle Assembly Check oil level Visually inspect for damage or leaks.

Drive Axle - Vocational (PACCAR) - Breather Check the operation. If the cap doesn't rotate freely, replace.

Drive Axle (Meritor City Delivery / OFF HIGHWAY) - Axle Housing Check the "cold" fill level at the differential carrier plug for a pinion angle of less than 7 degrees, or at the axle bowl plug for a

pinion angle of greater than 7 degrees. Tighten the plug to 35-50 lb-ft (47-68 Nm.) (Refer to Drive Axle - Meritor on page 286 for maintenance instructions.)

Visually inspect for damage or leaks. (Refer to Drive Axle - Meritor on page 286 for maintenance instructions.)

Drive Axle (Meritor City Delivery / OFF HIGHWAY) - Breather Check the operation. If the cap doesn't rotate freely, replace. (Refer to Drive Axle - Meritor on page 286 for maintenance

instructions.)

Drum Brakes (All) - Slack Adjusters Check the push rod travel and check the control arm for cracks. Adjust at reline. (Refer to Auto Slack Adjuster on page 240 for

maintenance instructions.) Lubricate (NLGI #2 grease.)

Drum Brakes (All) - Brake Air System Check air lines and fittings for leaks. Adjust routing as required to prevent chafing. Check tank mounting and condition. (Refer to

How to Check the Compressed Air System for Leaks on page 237 for maintenance instructions.)

10 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

MAINTENANCE - Every 15,000 mi / 24,000 km / Monthly

204 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

Every 15,000 mi / 24,000 km / Monthly10

Hub, Drum, and Hubcap - Hubcaps Clean the sight window. Check the center plug, mounting flange, and fill plug for leaks and for proper installation. Replace

broken or damaged parts. Check the lubricant level and add as required. (Refer to Wheels on page 294 for maintenance instructions.)

Main and Auxiliary Transmission (including Eaton Automated or PACCAR Transmission) - Main and Auxiliary Transmission and Transfer Case Inspect for visible damage, signs of overheating, and leaks. (Refer to Transmission Maintenance on page 297 for maintenance

instructions.)

Auxiliary Transmission - Cotta Transfer Case TR2205 Fabco Transfer Case TC142/TC143/ TC170/ TC270 Inspect: Check oil level, inspect for leaks and any visible damage.

Marmon-Harrington Transfer Case MVG2000/ MVG2000SD Replace/clean the air filter pre-cleaner, if equipped.

Air Intake - Pre-Cleaner Inspect for cuts, irregular wear, missing lugs, sidewall damage, etc. (Refer to Air Intake System on page 268 for maintenance

instructions.)

Tires and Wheels - Tires Inspect the wheel disc for any cracks or surface irregularities. Inspect the rim edge and bead seat area for damage. Replace

any damaged wheels - DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REPAIR. (Refer to Tires on page 290 for maintenance instructions.)

10 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

MAINTENANCE - Every 15,000 mi / 24,000 km / Monthly

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 205

5

Every 15,000 mi / 24,000 km / Monthly10

Tires and Wheels - Disc Wheels Inspect the mounting ring, rim gutter, side ring, and lock ring for damage: replace as required. (Refer to Wheels on page 294 for

maintenance instructions.)

Tires and Wheels - Demountable Rims Check the tightness of the fasteners and tighten the fasteners to the specified torque as required. (Refer to Wheels on page 294

for maintenance instructions.)

Tires and Wheels - Wheel Nuts and Studs Inspect for damaged hex corners, stripped or damaged threads, and excessive corrosion: clean or replace as required. (Refer to

Wheels on page 294 for maintenance instructions.)

Power Steering - Reservoir Check the fluid level. (Refer to Check Power Steering Fluid Level on page 289 for maintenance instructions.)

Power Steering - Power Assist Cylinder Lubricate (EP NLGI #2 lithium-based, moly-filled, HD grease.) (Refer to Steering System on page 288 for maintenance

instructions.)

Steering Components - Drag link and Tie Rod Arm Ball Sockets (OFF HIGHWAY or CITY DELIVERY) Lubricate (EP NLGI #2 lithium-based, HD grease.). (Refer to Steering System on page 288 for maintenance instructions.)

Fuel and Tanks - Fuel Tank Steps Check for snug fit of side plates against tank and tank straps. Check for damaged or broken steps, missing bolts, and missing

grommet between tank and side plate. Replace missing or damaged parts and adjust for fit as required. (Refer to Fuel Tank on page 273 for maintenance instructions.)

10 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

MAINTENANCE - Every 15,000 mi / 24,000 km / Monthly

206 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

Every 15,000 mi / 24,000 km / Monthly10

Driveshafts - Models SPL-90, 1710 and 1810 Slip Member and U-joints Lubricate

Driveshafts - Model SPL-100 Slip Member and U-joints Check the condition of the cables, cushion clamps, nylon tie straps, and routing. Replace a cushion clamp if the rubber has

deteriorated. Repair or tighten terminals, and secure cables to prevent chafing. Replace damaged cables (cuts, cracks, or excessive wear.) (Refer to Batteries on page 258 for maintenance instructions.)

Battery Boxes, Tool Boxes, and Steps - Battery Cables Battery Boxes, Tool Boxes, and Steps - Batteries (OFF-HIGHWAY) Check for cracks and damage, electrolyte level, condition of terminals, and tightness of hold downs. (Refer to Batteries on page

258 for maintenance instructions.)

Battery Boxes, Tool Boxes, and Steps - Battery Box and Tray (OFF-HIGHWAY) Check the box integrity. Clean the drain tube and check for acid leaks. Check condition of all equipment mounted under the box.

(Refer to Batteries on page 258 for maintenance instructions.)

Battery Boxes, Tool Boxes, and Steps - Battery Cable Fasteners Check battery cable fasteners and tighten as necessary to 10-15 lb-ft (13.6-20.3 Nm) as specified on the battery label. (Refer to

Batteries on page 258 for maintenance instructions.)

Electrical and Lights - Warning Lights in Light Bar Check at the ignition start position to verify bulb check and systems check function. (Refer to Bulb Check on page 79 for

maintenance instructions.)

10 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

* Use only Spicer Driveshaft approved lubricants when greasing Spicer U-joints.

MAINTENANCE - Every 15,000 mi / 24,000 km / Monthly

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 207

5

Every 15,000 mi / 24,000 km / Monthly10

Electrical and Lights - Turn, Stop, Reverse Lights and Signals Visual check. (Refer to Daily Checks on page 35).

Electrical and Lights - Power Supply Harnesses (engine, Transmission, etc.) Check for worn or damaged insulation, corroded terminals, frayed wires, and oil or fluid leaks on the connectors or wiring. (Refer

to Electrical System on page 254 for maintenance instructions.)

Heating and Air Conditioning - Air Conditioner Operate the system. (Refer to Heater and Air Conditioner Maintenance on page 276 for maintenance instructions.)

Heating and Air Conditioning - Cabin Fresh Air Filter (ON HIGHWAY) Inspect and clean, replace if necessary. (Refer to How to Replace Air Conditioner Filter on page 278 for maintenance

instructions.)

Heating and Air Conditioning - Cabin Fresh Air Filter (OFF-HIGHWAY) Inspect and clean, replace if necessary. (Refer to How to Replace Air Conditioner Filter on page 278 for maintenance

instructions.)

Aftertreatment System - System Check for leaks and proper support. (Refer to Noise and Emission Control on page 279 for maintenance instructions.)

Every 25,000 mi / 40,000 km / 6 Months

10 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

MAINTENANCE - Every 25,000 mi / 40,000 km / 6 Months

208 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

Every 25,000 mi / 40,000 km / 6 Months

Front Axle - Linehaul (PACCAR) - Kingpin Joint Grease/Tie Rod Ends Heavy-Duty Multipurpose Lithium Based: #1 or #2 Grade. (Refer to Front Axle and Suspension on page 273 for maintenance

instructions.)

Front Suspension - SOFTEK NXT (Hendrickson) - Shock Absorbers Inspect for leaking, body damage, and damaged or worn bushings. Replace as required. Check the shock mounting stud

torque. (Refer to Front Axle and Suspension on page 273 for maintenance instructions.)

Front Suspension - SOFTEK NXT (Hendrickson) - Spring Pins and Shackles Inspect for worn parts and excessive joint clearance. Shim or replace as required. (Refer to Front Axle and Suspension on page

273 for maintenance instructions.)

Front Suspension - SOFTEK NXT (Hendrickson) - U-bolts Check the general condition and the tightness of the nuts. (Refer to Front Axle and Suspension on page 273 for maintenance

instructions.)

Front Axle - SOFTEK NXT (Hendrickson) - Axle Clamp Through Bolts Check the tightness of the through bolts at the bolt head. (Refer to the Hendrickson operators manual for torque specifications.)

Every 30,000 mi / 48,000 km

MAINTENANCE - Every 30,000 mi / 48,000 km

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 209

5

Every 30,000 mi / 48,000 km11

Front Suspension - Spring Pins Lubricate with approved grease. (Refer to Front Axle and Suspension on page 273 for maintenance instructions.)

Drive Axle - Linehaul (PACCAR) - Axle Assembly Check oil level and inspect for leaks. Visually inspect for damage or leaks.

Drive Axle - Linehaul (PACCAR) - Breather Check the operation. If the cap doesn't rotate freely, replace.

Drive Axle - Vocational (PACCAR) - Axle Assembly Drain and replace MINERAL BASE lubricant. Drive Axle (Meritor Line Haul / ON HIGHWAY) - Axle Housing

Check the "cold" fill level at the differential carrier plug for a pinion angle of less than 7 degrees, or at the axle bowl plug for a pinion angle of greater than 7 degrees. Tighten the plug to 35-50 lb-ft (47-68 Nm.) (Refer to Drive Axle - Meritor on page 286 for maintenance instructions.)

Visually inspect for damage or leaks. (Refer to Drive Axle - Meritor on page 286 for maintenance instructions.)

Drive Axle (Meritor Line Haul / ON HIGHWAY) - Breather Check the operation. If the cap doesn't rotate freely, replace. (Refer to Drive Axle - Meritor on page 286 for maintenance

instructions.)

Drum Brakes (All) - Brake Treadle Valve Clean the area around the treadle, boot, and mounting plate. Check the pivot and mounting plate for integrity. Check the plunger

boot for cracks. Lubricate roller pin, pivot pin, and plunger (NLGI #2 grease.) (Refer to Drum Brake Inspection on page 241 for maintenance instructions.)

11 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

MAINTENANCE - Every 30,000 mi / 48,000 km

210 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

Every 30,000 mi / 48,000 km11

Drum Brakes (All) - Brake Lining Inspect: replace as required. (Refer to Drum Brake Inspection on page 241 for maintenance instructions.)

Hub, Drum, and Hubcap - Hubs (non-LMS) Check the bearing endplay and adjust as required. (Refer to Wheels on page 294 for maintenance instructions.)

Hub, Drum, and Hubcap - Hub Seals (all) Check for leaks: replace as required. (Refer to Wheels on page 294 for maintenance instructions.)

Hub, Drum, and Hubcap - Brake Drums Inspect for visible cracks, heat checking, galling or scoring of the braking surface, and for severe corrosion on the outside

surface. Check for out-of-round or oversize condition [0.080 in. (2 mm) more than the original diameter]. Replace as required. (Refer to Brake System on page 239 for maintenance instructions.)

Main and Auxiliary Transmission (including Eaton Automated or PACCAR Transmission) - Main and Auxiliary Transmission and Transfer Case Check the drain plugs for tightness. (Refer to Transmission Maintenance on page 297 for maintenance instructions.)

Main and Auxiliary Transmission (including Eaton Automated or PACCAR Transmission) - Main and Auxiliary Transmission Check the oil level: refill as required. (Refer to Transmission Maintenance on page 297 for maintenance instructions.)

Clutch - Clutch Release Bearing Lubricate. (Refer to Hydraulic Clutch on page 298 for maintenance instructions.) Inspect and adjust when necessary (no adjustment required for SOLO type clutches.) (Refer to Hydraulic Clutch on page 298 for

maintenance instructions.)

11 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

MAINTENANCE - Every 30,000 mi / 48,000 km

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 211

5

Every 30,000 mi / 48,000 km11

Cooling - Extended Life Coolant (ELC) Check coolant/antifreeze condition. (Refer to Cooling System Maintenance on page 250 for maintenance instructions.)

Steering Components - Steering Intermediate Shaft U-joints (OFF HIGHWAY or CITY DELIVERY) Lubricate [EP NLGI #2 HD grease, -10 to 325F (-23 to 163C) range]. (Refer to Steering System on page 288 for maintenance

instructions.)

Steering Components - Drag link and Tie Rod Arm Ball Sockets (ON HIGHWAY) Lubricate (EP NLGI #2 lithium-based, moly-filled, HD grease.) (Refer to Steering System on page 288 for maintenance

instructions.)

Fuel and Tanks - Fuel Tank StrapsFuel Tank on page 273

Electrical and Lights - Fuel and Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank Sending Unit Check the mounting screws and electrical connections for worn or damaged wires and connectors. (Refer to Diesel Exhaust

Fluid (DEF) Tank Straps on page 282 for maintenance instructions.)

Heating and Air Conditioning - Heater and Air Conditioner Perform the checks per Heater and Air Conditioner Maintenance on page 276

Air - Air Compressor Governor Replace air strainer. (Refer to Air Compressor on page 238 for maintenance instructions.)

Air - Air Lines Check condition and routing to prevent chafing. (Refer to Air Compressor on page 238 for maintenance instructions.)

11 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

MAINTENANCE - Every 30,000 mi / 48,000 km

212 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

Every 30,000 mi / 48,000 km11

Air - Air Dryer Perform the checks listed; (Refer to Air Dryer Maintenance on page 234 for maintenance instructions.)

Every 60,000 mi / 96,000 km / 6 Months

Every 60,000 mi / 96,000 km / 6 Months12

Frame - Fifth Wheel Inspect fifth wheel operation. (Refer to Fifth Wheel Monthly Maintenance on page 272 for maintenance instructions.)

Frame - Engine Mounting Inspect engine mounts every 60,000 miles (96,000 km.) (Refer to Engine Mounting on page 271 for maintenance instructions.)

Contact an authorized vehicle OEM dealership if engine mounts need servicing.

Front Axle - Vocational (PACCAR) - Steer Axle Wheel Ends: Oil Bath (Adjusted) Synthetic SAE 75W-140, SAE 50. Mineral Oil SAE 75W, 75W-90, 75W-140, 80W-90, 85W-140. (Refer to Front Axle and Suspension on page 273 for maintenance

instructions.)

11 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

12 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

MAINTENANCE - Every 60,000 mi / 96,000 km / 6 Months

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 213

5

Every 60,000 mi / 96,000 km / 6 Months12

Front Axle - Vocational (PACCAR) - Steer Axle Semi-fluid (Adjusted) Semi-Fluid Synthetic Grease: Delo SF, Mobil SCH 007. (Refer to Front Axle and Suspension on page 273 for maintenance

instructions.)

Front Axle - Vocational (PACCAR) - Steer Axle Grease Pack (Adjusted) Heavy-Duty Multipurpose Lithium Base: #2 Grade. (Refer to Front Axle and Suspension on page 273 for maintenance

instructions.)

Front Axle - SOFTEK NXT (Hendrickson) - Kingpin Bearings and Tie Rod Ends (LINE HAUL) Multipurpose Grease NLGI Grade 2

Front Axle - SOFTEK NXT (Hendrickson) - Axle Clamp Through Bolts Check the tightness of the through bolts at the bolt head. Tighten fasteners using a calibrated torque wrench to the specified

torque value. (Refer to the Hendrickson operators manual for torque specifications.)

Front Suspension - Front Spring Inspect for cracked leaves, worn bushings, and excessive corrosion. (Refer to Front Axle and Suspension on page 273 for

maintenance instructions.)

Front Suspension - Spring Pins and Shackles Inspect for worn parts and excessive joint clearance. Shim or replace as required. (Refer to Front Axle and Suspension on page

273 for maintenance instructions.)

Front Suspension - Shock Absorbers Inspect for leaking, body damage, and damaged or worn bushings. Replace as required. Check the shock mounting stud

torque. (Refer to Front Axle and Suspension on page 273 for maintenance instructions.)

12 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

MAINTENANCE - Every 60,000 mi / 96,000 km / 6 Months

214 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

Every 60,000 mi / 96,000 km / 6 Months12

Front Suspension U-bolts - U-bolts (ON HIGHWAY and VOCATIONAL) Check the general condition and the tightness of the nuts. Tighten the U-bolts using a calibrated torque wrench to the specified

torque value. (Refer to Suspension U-Bolts, Grade 8 on page 306 for maintenance instructions.)

Front Suspension - SOFTEK NXT (Hendrickson) - Ride Height Inspect that ride height is within specifications. (Refer to Air Suspension Ride Height for maintenance instructions)

Drive Axle - Linehaul (PACCAR) - Axle Assembly Drain and replace MINERAL BASE lubricant.

Drive Axle (Dana) - Axle Housing Visually inspect for damage or leaks. (Refer to Drive Axle - Dana on page 285 for maintenance instructions.) Check oil level. Check "cold." Torque the drain plug. (Refer to Drive Axle - Dana on page 285 for maintenance instructions.)

Drive Axle (Dana) - Air Shift Unit Check the lubricant level. (Refer to Drive Axle - Dana on page 285 for maintenance instructions.)

Drive Axle (Dana) - Lube Pump (OFF HIGHWAY) Remove the magnetic strainer and inspect for wear particles. Wash in solvent and dry in air. (Refer to Drive Axle - Dana on

page 285 for maintenance instructions.)

Drive Axle (Dana) - Lube Filter (OFF HIGHWAY) Change. (Refer to Drive Axle - Dana on page 285 for maintenance instructions.)

Drive Axle (Dana) - Magnetic Drain Plug and Breather (OFF HIGHWAY) Clean or replace. (Refer to Drive Axle - Dana on page 285 for maintenance instructions.)

12 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

MAINTENANCE - Every 60,000 mi / 96,000 km / 6 Months

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 215

5

Every 60,000 mi / 96,000 km / 6 Months12

Drive Axle (SISU) Drive Axle (SISU) Oil Servicing on page 287 Drive Axle (SISU) Inspection on page 287 Drive Axle - SISU Breather and Brakes on page 287

Rear Suspension - U-bolts Check the torque. Tighten to specified torque value as required. (Refer to Suspension U-Bolts, Grade 8 on page 306 for

maintenance instructions.)

Drum Brakes (All) - Brake Camshaft Bearing Check for excessive camshaft play in the axial and radial directions. Max allowable play is 0.003 in. Lubricate (NLGI #2 grease.)

(Refer to Drum Brake Inspection on page 241 for maintenance instructions.)

Drum Brakes (All) - Brake Air System Clean or replace the inline filters. (Refer to Air System on page 232 for maintenance instructions.)

Disc Brakes (Bendix) - Brake Pads Inspect: replace as required. (Refer to How to inspect brake pads on disc brakes on page 240 for maintenance instructions.)

Disc Brakes (Bendix) - Brake Disc/rotor Inspect for visible cracks, heat checking, galling, or scoring of surface. Check for runout (max allowable is 0.002 in.) (Refer to

Air Disc Brakes on page 240 for maintenance instructions.)

Disc Brakes (Bendix) - Caliper Sliding Function Ensure caliper slides freely with no obstructions or excessive play. (Refer to Air Disc Brakes on page 240 for maintenance

instructions.)

12 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

MAINTENANCE - Every 60,000 mi / 96,000 km / 6 Months

216 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

Every 60,000 mi / 96,000 km / 6 Months12

Disc Brakes (Bendix) - Caliper Slide Pins Inspect protective caps of the guide pins for damage or cracking. (Refer to Air Disc Brakes on page 240 for maintenance

instructions.)

Disc Brakes (Bendix) - System Operation Check operation: inspect as per manufacturers service literature. (Refer to Air Disc Brakes on page 240 for maintenance

instructions.)

Hub, Drum, and Hubcap - LMS Hubs (Dana) Inspect for leaks. Check the bearing endplay and adjust as required. (Refer to Wheels on page 294 for maintenance

instructions. )

Main and Auxiliary Transmission (including Eaton Automated or PACCAR Transmission) - Mounting Brackets and Fasteners Check the condition of the fasteners and their torque. Tighten to the specified torque value as required. (Refer to Frame

Fastener Torque Requirements on page 304 for maintenance instructions.)

Main and Auxiliary Transmission (including Eaton Automated or PACCAR Transmission) - Oil Cooler Clean the fins (air-to-oil type) and body. Check the hose condition and for leaks: replace as required. (Refer to Cooling System

Maintenance on page 250 for maintenance instructions.)

Main and Auxiliary Transmission (including Eaton Automated or PACCAR Transmission) - Main and Auxiliary Transmission (OFF HIGHWAY) Drain lubricant while warm. Flush each unit with clean flushing oil. (Refer to Transmission Maintenance on page 297 for

maintenance instructions.)

12 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

MAINTENANCE - Every 60,000 mi / 96,000 km / 6 Months

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 217

5

Every 60,000 mi / 96,000 km / 6 Months12

Auxiliary Transmission - Cotta Transfer Case TR2205 Fabco Transfer Case TC142/TC143/ TC170/ TC270 Marmon-Harrington Transfer Case MVG2000/ MVG2000SD Initial oil change: Drain oil while warm: flush case with gear oil-compatible fluid, clean magnetic drain plug, and refill. Do not

flush the case with any solvent. Change oil.

Air Intake - Air Intake Piping, Mounting, and Charge Air Cooler Check the system for broken pipes, leaks, joint integrity, cleanliness, and proper support. (Refer to Air Intake System on page

268 for maintenance instructions.)

Cooling - Hoses Check the radiator and heater hoses for leaks. (Refer to Cooling System Maintenance on page 250 for maintenance

instructions.)

Cooling - Fan Clutch Check for air leaks. Check the fan drive bearings (turn the sheave in both directions to check for worn hub bearings.) (Refer to

Engine Fan on page 267 for maintenance instructions.

Cooling - Solenoid Valve Check the fan drive for proper engagement and disengagement. (Refer to Engine Fan on page 267 for maintenance

instructions.)

Power Steering - Reservoir (OFF HIGHWAY) Drain, replace the filter, and refill. (Refer to Check Power Steering Fluid Level on page 289 for maintenance instructions.)

12 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

MAINTENANCE - Every 60,000 mi / 96,000 km / 6 Months

218 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

Every 60,000 mi / 96,000 km / 6 Months12

Power Steering - Steering Gear Check the lash of the sector shaft: adjust as required. (Refer to Steering System on page 288 for maintenance instructions.) Grease the trunnion bearing (EP NLGI #2 lithium-based, moly-filled, HD grease.) (Refer to Steering System on page 288 for

maintenance instructions.) Grease the input shaft seal (EP NLGI #2 lithium-based, moly-filled, HD grease.) (Refer to Steering System on page 288 for

maintenance instructions.)

Power Steering - Hoses and Tubes Check for leaks and chafing. (Refer to Steering System on page 288 for maintenance instructions.)

Steering Components - Drag link Tube Clamp and Ball Socket Check the torque: tighten to specified torque value as required. (Refer to Steering System on page 288 for maintenance

instructions.)

Steering Components - Pitman Arm Clamp Bolt and Nut Check the torque: tighten to specified torque value as required. (Refer to Steering System on page 288 for maintenance

instructions.)

Steering Components - Steering Intermediate Shaft Check the torque on the pinch bolt and nut. (Refer to Steering Shaft Bolt Torque Specifications on page 290 for maintenance

instructions.)

Steering Components - Steering Intermediate Shaft U-joints (ON HIGHWAY) Lubricate [EP NLGI #2 HD grease, -10 to 325F (-23 to 163C) range]. (Refer to Steering System on page 288 for maintenance

instructions.)

12 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

MAINTENANCE - Every 60,000 mi / 96,000 km / 6 Months

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 219

5

Every 60,000 mi / 96,000 km / 6 Months12

Fuel and Tanks - Fuel Tanks Inspect tanks, brackets, hoses, and fittings for correct location, tightness, abrasion damage, and leaks: repair or replace as

required. (Refer to Fuel Tank on page 273 for maintenance instructions.)

Driveshafts - Models SPL- 140/140HD/170/170HD/250/250HD Slip Members and U- joints (ON HIGHWAY and LINEHAUL) Lubricate*

Battery Boxes, Tool Boxes, and Steps - Batteries (ON HIGHWAY and LINE HAUL) Check for cracks and damage, electrolyte level, condition of terminals, and tightness of hold downs. Refer to Batteries on page

258 for maintenance instructions.

Battery Boxes, Tool Boxes, and Steps - Battery Box and Tray (ON HIGHWAY and LINE HAUL) Check the box integrity. Clean the drain tube and check for acid leaks. Check condition of all equipment mounted under the box.

Check the drain tube and check for acid leaks. Check condition of all equipment mounted under the box. (Refer to Batteries on page 258 for maintenance instructions.)

Electrical and Lights - Alternator Check operation and output. (Refer to Alternator on page 262 Check tightness of the pulley nut. (Refer to Install Engine Belt on page 266 for maintenance instructions.) Check the tension of the drive belt. (Refer to Install Engine Belt on page 266 for maintenance instructions.) Check tightness of the terminal hex nuts. (Refer to Install Engine Belt on page 266 for maintenance instructions.)

Electrical and Lights - Starter Check torque on hex nuts. (Refer to Electrical System on page 254 for maintenance instructions.)

12 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

* Use only Spicer Driveshaft approved lubricants when greasing Spicer U-joints.

MAINTENANCE - Every 60,000 mi / 96,000 km / 6 Months

220 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

Every 60,000 mi / 96,000 km / 6 Months12

Electrical and Lights - ECM Connector Check the tightness of the ECM connector. (Refer to Electrical System on page 254 for maintenance instructions.) for

maintenance instructions.)

Electrical and Lights - Wheel Sensors Check for damaged sensors and connectors, and worn or frayed wires. (Refer to Electrical System on page 254 for

maintenance instructions.)

Electrical and Lights - Power Supply Harnesses (engine, Transmission, etc.) Check for worn or damaged insulation, corroded terminals, frayed. Wash to remove excess grease. (Refer to Electrical System

on page 254 for maintenance instructions.)

Cab Structure, Doors and Hoods - Body and Cab Hold down Bolts, Cab Structure, Doors and Hoods on page 247

For Cab Structure, Doors, Hoods Hinges and Latch (EXCLUDING door hinges) Lubricate with silicone spray. (Refer to Cab Structure, Doors and Hoods on page 247 for maintenance instructions.)

Heating and Air Conditioning - Condenser Clear any debris from the front of the condenser. (Refer to Heater and Air Conditioner Maintenance on page 276 for

maintenance instructions.)

Aftertreatment System - Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank Inspect the tank, straps, brackets, hoses and fittings for abrasion damage, leaks, tightness and fully engaged connectors. (Refer

to Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank Straps on page 282 for maintenance instructions.)

12 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

MAINTENANCE - Every 60,000 mi / 96,000 km / 6 Months

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 221

5

Every 60,000 mi / 96,000 km / 6 Months12

Air - System Lubricate. (Refer to Air System on page 232 for maintenance instructions.)

Air - Inline Filters Replace elements or clean with solvent. (Refer to Replace Engine Air Filter for maintenance instructions.)

Every 120,000 mi / 192,000 km / Annually

Every 120,000 mi / 192,000 km / Annually13

Frame - Frame Fasteners Check for tightness: tighten to the specified torque value as required. (Refer to Frame Fastener Torque Requirements on page

304 for maintenance instructions.)

Frame - Crossmembers and Mounting Brackets Inspect for cracks and loose fasteners. Replace or tighten to the specified torque value as required. (Refer to Frame Fastener

Torque Requirements on page 304 for maintenance instructions.)

12 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

13 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

MAINTENANCE - Every 120,000 mi / 192,000 km / Annually

222 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

Every 120,000 mi / 192,000 km / Annually13

Front Axle - Linehaul (PACCAR) - Steer Axle Wheel Ends: Oil Bath (Adjusted) Synthetic SAE 75W-140, SAE 50W. (Refer to Front Axle and Suspension on page 273 for maintenance instructions.)

Front Axle - Linehaul (PACCAR) - Steer Axle Wheel Ends: Oil Bath (Adjusted) Mineral Oil SAE 75W, 75W-90, 75W-140, 80W-90, 85W-140. (Refer to Front Axle and Suspension on page 273 for maintenance

instructions.)

Front Axle - Linehaul (PACCAR) - Steer Axle Semi-fluid (Adjusted) Semi-Fluid Synthetic Grease: Delo SF, Mobil SCH 007. (Refer to Front Axle and Suspension on page 273 for maintenance

instructions.)

Front Axle - Linehaul (PACCAR) - Steer Axle Grease Pack (Adjusted) Heavy-Duty Multipurpose Lithium Base: #2 Grade. (Refer to Front Axle and Suspension on page 273 for maintenance

instructions.)

Front Axle - Vocational (PACCAR) - Steer Axle Wheel Ends: Oil Bath LMS Synthetic SAE 75W-90. (Refer to Front Axle and Suspension on page 273 for maintenance instructions.)

Drive Axle - Linehaul (PACCAR) - Axle Shaft Tighten the rear axle flange nuts to the specified torque value.

Drive Axle - Vocational (PACCAR) - Axle Shaft Tighten the rear axle flange nuts to the specified torque value.

13 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

MAINTENANCE - Every 120,000 mi / 192,000 km / Annually

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 223

5

Every 120,000 mi / 192,000 km / Annually13

Drive Axle (Dana) - Air Shift Unit Remove the housing cover and drain the lubricant. Wash the parts thoroughly and dry in air. (Refer to Drive Axle - Dana on

page 285 for maintenance instructions.)

Drive Axle (Dana) - Breather Clean or replace. (Refer to Drive Axle - Dana on page 285 for maintenance instructions.)

Drive Axle (Dana) - Lube Pump (ON HIGHWAY) Remove the magnetic strainer and inspect for wear particles. Wash in solvent and dry in air. (Refer to Drive Axle - Dana on

page 285 for maintenance instructions.)

Drive Axle (Dana) - Lube Filter (ON HIGHWAY) Change. (Refer to Drive Axle - Dana on page 285 for maintenance instructions.)

Drive Axle (Dana) - Magnetic Drain Plug and Breather (ON HIGHWAY) Clean or replace. (Refer to Drive Axle - Dana on page 285 for maintenance instructions.)

Drive Axle (Meritor Line Haul / ON HIGHWAY) - Lubricant Filter Change the filter. (Refer to Drive Axle - Meritor on page 286 for maintenance instructions.)

Drive Axle (Meritor Line Haul / ON HIGHWAY) - Input Shaft and Pinion Shaft Check and adjust the endplay. (Refer to Drive Axle - Meritor on page 286 for maintenance instructions.)

Drive Axle (Meritor Line Haul / ON HIGHWAY) - Axle Shaft Tighten the rear axle flange nuts to the specified torque value. (Refer to Drive Axle - Meritor on page 286 for maintenance

instructions.)

13 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

MAINTENANCE - Every 120,000 mi / 192,000 km / Annually

224 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

Every 120,000 mi / 192,000 km / Annually13

Drive Axle (Meritor Line Haul / ON HIGHWAY) - Interaxle Differential Check the operation. (Refer to Drive Axle - Meritor on page 286 for maintenance instructions.)

Drive Axle (Meritor City Delivery / OFF HIGHWAY) - Lubricant Filter Change the filter. (Refer to Drive Axle - Meritor on page 286 for maintenance instructions.)

Drive Axle (Meritor City Delivery / OFF HIGHWAY) - Input Shaft and Pinion Shaft Check and adjust the endplay. (Refer to Drive Axle - Meritor on page 286 for maintenance instructions.)

Drive Axle (Meritor City Delivery / OFF HIGHWAY) - Axle Shaft Tighten the rear axle flange nuts to the specified torque value. (Refer to Drive Axle - Meritor on page 286 for maintenance

instructions.)

Drive Axle (Meritor City Delivery / OFF HIGHWAY) - Interaxle Differential Check the operation. (Refer to Drive Axle - Meritor on page 286 for maintenance instructions.)

Drive Axle (SISU) Drive Axle (SISU) Oil Servicing on page 287 for maintenance instructions.) Drive Axle - SISU Breather and Brakes on page 287 Drive Axle - SISU Breather and Brakes on page 287

Rear Suspension - Frame and Crossmembers Bolts Check the torque. Tighten to specified torque value as required. (Refer to Rear Axle and Suspension on page 282 for

maintenance instructions.)

13 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

MAINTENANCE - Every 120,000 mi / 192,000 km / Annually

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 225

5

Every 120,000 mi / 192,000 km / Annually13

Rear Suspension - Mounting Brackets and Fasteners Check the condition and the fastener torque. Tighten to the specified torque value as required.(Refer to Suspension U-Bolts,

Grade 8 on page 306 for maintenance instructions.)

Hub, Drum, and Hubcap - Hubs (non-LMS) with Standard Seals Clean the components and check for excessive wear or damage. Change the oil and seal. (Refer to Wheels on page 294 for

maintenance instructions.)

Cooling - Extended Life Coolant (ELC) Perform lab analysis. If lab analysis shows coolant is unsuitable for continued use: Flush, drain, and refill. Add ELC Extender.

(Refer to Cooling System Maintenance on page 250 for maintenance instructions.)

Power Steering - Reservoir (ON HIGHWAY) Drain, replace the filter, and refill. (Refer to Check Power Steering Fluid Level on page 289 for maintenance instructions.)

Steering Components - Steering Linkage Check all joints for excessive lash: replace as required. (Refer to Steering System on page 288 for maintenance instructions.)

Fuel and Tanks - Fuel Tank Breathers Check for proper function: clean the drain hoses. (Refer to Fuel Tank on page 273 for maintenance instructions.)

Driveshafts - Models SPL-140XL/ 170XL/250XL Slip Members and U- joints (OFF HIGHWAY and CITY) Lubricate

Cab Structure, Doors and Hoods - Body and Cab Hold down Bolts, Cab Structure, Doors and Hoods on page 247

13 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

* Use only Spicer Driveshaft approved lubricants when greasing Spicer U-joints.

MAINTENANCE - Every 120,000 mi / 192,000 km / Annually

226 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

Every 120,000 mi / 192,000 km / Annually13

Heating and Air Conditioning - Heater and Air Conditioner Full operational and diagnostic check. (Refer to Heater and Air Conditioner Maintenance on page 276 for maintenance

instructions.)

Heating and Air Conditioning - Sleeper Air Filter Inspect and clean, replace if necessary. (Refer to Sleeper HVAC Air Filter on page 279 for maintenance instructions.)

Heating and Air Conditioning - Recirculation Cab Air Filter (ON HIGHWAY) Please contact an authorized dealer when the service interval is required to inspect the cabin recirculation air filter. (Refer to

Replace the Recirculation Air Filter on page 278 for maintenance instructions.)

Heating and Air Conditioning - Recirculation Cab Air Filter (OFF-HIGHWAY) Please contact an authorized dealer when the service interval is required to inspect the cabin recirculation air filter. (Refer to

Replace the Recirculation Air Filter on page 278 for maintenance instructions.)

Air - Air Dryer (OFF HIGHWAY) Replace cartridge. (Refer to Air Dryer Maintenance on page 234 for maintenance instructions.)

Every 240,000 mi / 384,000 km

13 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

MAINTENANCE - Every 240,000 mi / 384,000 km

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 227

5

Every 240,000 mi / 384,000 km14

Drive Axle - Vocational (PACCAR) - Axle Assembly Drain and replace SYNTHETIC BASE lubricant.

Hub, Drum, and Hubcap - Hubs (non-LMS) with Outrunner Seals Clean the components and check for excessive wear or damage. Change the oil and seal. (Refer to Wheels on page 294 for

maintenance instructions.)

Every 300,000 mi / 480,000 km / 6,750 Hours / 3 Years

Every 300,000 mi / 480,000 km / 6,750 Hours / 3 Years15

Cooling - Extended Life Coolant (ELC) Replace blank water filter, if applicable. (Refer to Cooling System Maintenance on page 250 for maintenance instructions.)

Hub, Drum, and Hubcap - LMS Hubs (Dana) with Mineral Lubricant Wheels on page 294

14 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

15 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

MAINTENANCE - Every 300,000 mi / 480,000 km / 6,750 Hours / 3 Years

228 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

Every 500,000 mi / 800,000 km / 5 years

Every 500,000 mi / 800,000 km / 5 years16

Front Axle - Linehaul (PACCAR) - Steer Axle Wheel Ends: Oil Bath LMS Synthetic SAE 75W-90. (Refer to Front Axle and Suspension on page 273 for maintenance instructions.)

Drive Axle - Linehaul (PACCAR) - Axle Assembly Drain and replace SYNTHETIC BASE lubricant.

Hub, Drum, and Hubcap - LMS Hubs (Dana) with Synthetic Lubricant Service the bearings, seals and oil. This interval may be different depending on the results of the regular inspection. (Refer to

Wheels on page 294 for maintenance instructions.)

Every 750,000 mi / 1,200,000 km/ 24,000 Hours / 8 years

16 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

MAINTENANCE - Every 500,000 mi / 800,000 km / 5 years

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 229

5

Every 750,000 mi / 1,200,000 km/ 24,000 Hours / 8 years17

Cooling - Extended Life Coolant (ELC) Flush, drain, and refill with new coolant. (Refer to Cooling System Maintenance on page 250 for maintenance instructions.)

Main and Auxiliary Transmission (including Eaton Automated or PACCAR Transmission) - Main and Auxiliary Transmission (ON HIGHWAY) Drain lubricant while warm. Flush each unit with clean flushing oil. (Refer to Transmission Maintenance on page 297 for

maintenance instructions.)

Lubricants Schedule service more frequently if you are operating under severe conditions such as extreme heat or cold, with very heavy loads, off-road, etc. For any special service requirements, consult your service manuals and your lubricant supplier. Please remember: one key to keeping your truck running at top economy and prolonging its life is proper lubrication servicing. Neglecting this essential aspect of vehicle care can cost time and money in the long run.

WARNING

Handle lubricants carefully. Vehicle lu- bricants (oil and grease) can be poi- sonous and cause sickness, personal injury, or death. They can also damage the paint on the vehicle.

CAUTION

DO NOT mix different types of lubri- cants. Mixing lubricants (oil and grease) of different brands or types could damage vehicle components;

therefore, drain (or remove) old lubri- cants from the unit before refilling it.

Engine Proper engine lubrication depends on the outside temperatures where you will be driving. Use the oil recommended for the conditions you are most likely to be operating in. You will find a complete engine lubrication service guide in the Engine Operation Manual that came with your vehicle. The engine operator manual contains specific maintenance tasks that you or a qualified service technician need to perform to maintain the engine.

17 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

MAINTENANCE - Lubricants

230 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

WARNING

Exhaust fumes from the engine con- tain carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas. DO NOT breathe the en- gine exhaust gas. A poorly maintained, damaged, or corroded exhaust system can allow carbon monoxide to enter the cab. Entry of carbon monoxide into the cab is also possible from other ve- hicles nearby. Failure to properly main- tain your vehicle could cause carbon monoxide to enter the cab, resulting in personal injury or death.

WARNING

Never idle your vehicle for prolonged periods of time if you sense that ex- haust fumes are entering the cab. In- vestigate the cause of the fumes and correct it as soon as possible. If the vehicle must be driven under these conditions, drive only with the windows open. Failure to repair the source of the exhaust fumes may result in death, personal injury, equipment or property damage.

NOTE

Keep the engine exhaust system and the vehicle's cab ventilation system properly maintained. It is recommend- ed that the vehicle's exhaust system and cab be inspected (1) By a compe- tent technician every 15,000 miles (24,140 km); (2) Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system; or (3) Whenever the exhaust system, underbody, or cab is dam- aged.

NOTE

Use only an exact replacement DPF in exhaust systems. Using a noncompli- ant DPF as a replacement could vio- late these standards and also void the emission system's warranty.

Driveline Universal Joints Refer to the Spicer Universal Joints and Driveshafts service manual and lubrication specifications.

Non-PACCAR Transmissions, Axles and Hubs For all non-PACCAR brands, see the manufacturer's operator's manual for recommended lubrication specifications and maintenance intervals.

Checking Oil Level For oil reservoir with side filler plugs (transmission, axles, steering gear boxes, transfer cases, etc.) the oil must be level with the filler opening. Use care when checking the oil level with a finger. Just because you can reach the oil level with a finger does not mean the oil level is correct. Improper Oil Level

Correct Oil Level

MAINTENANCE - Checking Oil Level

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 231

5

Air System The operation of the vehicles braking system and many vehicle accessories depends upon the storage and application of a high-pressure air supply.

WARNING

DO NOT attempt to modify, alter, re- pair or disconnect any component of the air system. Repairs or modifica- tions to the air system, other than what is described in this section, should on- ly be performed by an authorized deal- er. Failure to comply may result in per- sonal injury or death.

WARNING

Prior to the removal of any air system component, always block and hold the vehicle by a secure means other than the vehicle's own brakes. Depleting air system pressure may cause the vehi- cle to roll unexpectedly resulting in an accident causing personal injury or death. Keep hands away from cham-

ber push rods and slack adjusters, they may apply as system pressure drops.

WARNING

After completing any repairs to the air system, always test for air leaks and check the brakes for safe operation before putting the vehicle in service. Failure to comply may result in proper- ty damage, personal injury, or death.

WARNING

Never connect or disconnect a hose or line containing air pressure. It may whip as air escapes. Never remove a component or pipe plug unless you are certain all system pressure has been depleted. Failure to comply may result in property damage, personal injury, or death.

WARNING

Never exceed recommended air pres- sure and always wear safety glasses when working with air pressure. Never look into air jets or direct them at any- one. Failure to comply may result in property damage, personal injury, or death.

WARNING

Never attempt to disassemble a com- ponent until you have read and under- stood recommended procedures. Some components contain powerful springs and injury can result if not properly disassembled. Use only prop- er tools and observe all precautions pertaining to use of those tools. Failure to comply may result in property dam- age, personal injury, or death.

MAINTENANCE - Air System

232 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

WARNING

Completely bypassing a Bendix air dryer will bypass the systems pres- sure protection valves. This could lead to loss of air pressure or damage to the vehicles air system, which could cause an accident involving death or personal injury. Always adhere to the manufacturers procedure if it is nec- essary in an emergency to temporarily bypass a Bendix air dryer. Failure to comply may result in death, personal injury, equipment or property damage.

WARNING

If a different air dryer brand or model is installed on the vehicle other than what was originally installed, it could cause the air system to not perform correctly unless the full air system de- sign is reviewed and modifications made to comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS) 121 AirBrake Systems. Failure to abide by this warning and maintain compliance to FMVSS 121 could

cause loss of vehicle control and may lead to death or serious personal in- jury.

WARNING

If the supply and service air tanks are not drained at the recommended fre- quency, water could enter the air lines and valves. This could cause corrosion or blockage, which could compromise the brake system safety and potential- ly cause an accident. Failure to comply may result in property damage, per- sonal injury, or death.

Your vehicles compressor takes outside air and compresses it, usually to 100-120 psi (689-827 kPa). The compressed air then goes to the reservoirs to be stored until needed. When you operate your air brakes, the stored compressed air flows into the chambers where it is used to apply your truck and trailer brakes. That is why, when you push down on your brake pedal, you dont feel the same amount of pressure on the pedal that you do when you apply the brakes on your car. All you are doing on your truck is opening an air valve to allow air to flow into the brake

chambers. Contamination of the air supply system is the major cause of problems in air-operated components such as brake valves, and suspension height control valves. To keep contaminants to the lowest possible level, follow these maintenance procedures.

Daily Checks Drain moisture from the supply and

service air tanks. Operate air devices to circulate

lubricant within the unit.

Periodically Clean filter screens ahead of the

valves by removing the screens and soaking them in solvent. Blow them dry with pressurized air before reinstalling them.

Twice a Year Maintain the air compressor to

prevent excessive oil bypass. See your maintenance manual for details.

Replace worn seals in valves and air motors as needed.

MAINTENANCE - Air System

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 233

5

Dual Air System Function Test Conduct this test at least every 3 months or if there is any indication of a potential problem. Park the vehicle on level ground and block the wheels. Have an assistant open drain valves and, where required, observe brake action at the wheels. If a malfunction occurs during this test, do not move the vehicle until the problem has been corrected. Engine should be Off with the key switch to the ON or RUN position.

NOTE

Tractor air system must be connected to trailer.

Air Dryer Maintenance

NOTE

Because no two vehicles operate un- der identical conditions, maintenance and maintenance intervals will vary. Experience is a valuable guide in de- termining the best maintenance inter- val for any one particular operation.

NOTE

A small amount of oil in the system may be normal and should not, in it- self, be considered a reason to replace the desiccant cartridge. Oil stained desiccant can function adequately.

Every 900 operating hours or 25,000 miles (40,000 km) or every 3 months check for moisture in the air brake system by opening air tanks, drain cocks, or valves and checking for presence of water. A tablespoon of water found in the air tank would point to the need for a desiccant cartridge change. However, the following conditions can also cause water

accumulation and should be considered before replacing the desiccant cartridge.

Air usage is exceptionally high and not normal for a highway vehicle. This may be due to accessory air demands or some unusual air requirement that does not allow the compressor to load and unload (compressing and non- compressing cycle) in a normal fashion or it may be due to excessive leaks in the air system.

In areas where more than a 30F (17C) range of temperature occurs in one day, small amounts of water can accumulate in the air brake system due to condensation. Under these conditions, the presence of small amounts of moisture is normal and should not be considered as an indication that the dryer is not performing properly.

An outside air source has been used to charge the air system. This air did not pass through the drying bed.

MAINTENANCE - Dual Air System Function Test

234 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

Maintenance

CAUTION

Replace oil-coalescing desiccant air dryer cartridge every 1 year regardless of mileage. Only use oil-coalescing desiccant replacement cartridge when replacing. Failure to perform this main- tenance task will void the PACCAR Transmission warranty and may result in expensive transmission damage.

Replace (non-oil-coalescing) desiccant cartridge:

On-highway operation replace every 2-3 years, 350,000 miles (560,000 km) or 10,800 hours.

High duty cycle usage such as transit bus, refuse hauler, dump truck, cement mixers and off- highway operation replace every 1 year, 100,000 miles (160,000 km) or 3,600 hours.

NOTE

Review the warranty policy before per- forming any maintenance procedures. An extended warranty may be voided if unauthorized maintenance is per- formed during this period.

Bendix AD-HF Series Air Dryer Your vehicle may be equipped with a Bendix AD-HF series air dryer. Any air dryer replacement should be made with an identical component.

WARNING

Use of an air dryer brand or model that differs from what was originally instal- led could cause the air system to not perform correctly unless the full air system design is reviewed and modifi- cations are made to comply with Fed- eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 121 Air Brake Systems. Fail- ure to abide by this warning and main- tain compliance with FMVSS 121

could cause loss of vehicle control and may lead to serious personal injury or death.

The AD-HF Series air dryer has incorporated into its design various components that have typically been installed separately on the vehicle (see below for components/areas affected):

Pressure protection valves Safety valve Solenoid valves and plumbing Plumbing of the front and rear

service air tanks Plumbing to accessory systems

These components are required to meet the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS 121 - Air Brake Systems). As the Warning above states, any other type of air dryer installed in the place of an AD-HF Series will require changes, modifications and/or additions to your vehicles air system to maintain compliance with FMVSS 121.

MAINTENANCE - Air Dryer Maintenance

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 235

5

Air Tanks

WARNING

If the supply and service air tanks are not drained at the recommended fre- quency, water could enter the air lines and valves. This could cause corrosion or blockage, which could compromise the brake system safety and potential- ly cause an accident. Failure to comply may result in property damage, per- sonal injury, or death.

CAUTION

DO NOT use penetrating oil, alcohol, brake fluid, or wax-based oils in the air system. These fluids may cause se- vere damage to air system compo- nents.

To eject moisture from the air system tanks, pull the line that is connected to the moisture ejection valve. Continue pulling until the air comes out free of water.

Daily The supply and service air tanks, must be drained on a daily basis. Operate air devices daily to circulate lubricants within the unit.

Periodically Clean filter screens ahead of the valves by removing the screens and soaking them in solvent. Blow them dry with pressurized air before reinstalling them.

Maintain the air compressor to prevent excessive oil bypass

Replace worn seals in valves and air motors as they are needed. Your authorized dealer carries rebuild kits for most units

Air Gauges and Air Leaks

WARNING

DO NOT operate the vehicle if leakage in the air system is detected. Conduct the following procedure and contact an authorized dealer (or any other proper- ly equipped service center) if a leak is detected. Failure to check the brakes or follow these procedures could cause a system failure, increasing the risk of an accident and may result in personal injury, property damage, or death.

If your vehicle is equipped with air brakes, it has two separate, additional air systems: Primary and Secondary. Each air system is monitored by a gauge indicating system pressure in either pounds per square inch (psi), and/or kilopascals (kPa).

MAINTENANCE - Air Tanks

236 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

The Primary gauge indicates pressure in the rear braking system: Primary Air Pressure Gauge

The Secondary gauge indicates pressure in the front braking system: Secondary Air Pressure Gauge

The Primary and Secondary Air Pressure gauges are shown in the Primary Gauges View on the Digital Display.18

At start-up, the Primary and Secondary Air Pressure gauges may indicate red, and the Low Air System Pressure alarm may sound until the minimum operational pressure setpoint of 65 psi (448 kPa) is reached.1920

If the tanks are empty, this can take up to two minutes. If these gauges

Remain red

Turn red Indicate below 65 psi (448 kPa)

Or the Low Air System Pressure Alarm Turns on Does not turn off

do not attempt to drive the vehicle until the problem is found and fixed: system pressure is too low for normal brake operation.

NOTE

Park brakes lock up at 60 psi (414 kPa), the audible alarm will sound at 65 psi (448 kPa).

How to Check the Compressed Air System for Leaks

WARNING

DO NOT operate the vehicle if leakage in the air system is detected. Conduct the following procedure and contact an authorized dealer (or any other proper- ly equipped service center) if a leak is detected. Failure to check the brakes or follow these procedures could cause a system failure, increasing the risk of an accident and may result in personal injury, property damage, or death.

Use this procedure to check the compressed air system due to the following:

After maintenance When an air system component is

replaced When a leak is suspected

18 The model 520 Right-hand Stand-up uses additional physical gauges for Primary and Secondary Air Pressure. 19 The model 520 Right-hand Stand-up also indicates low air pressure using a warning light in the physical gauges. 20 The Low Air System Pressure alarm is not active when the engine is off.

MAINTENANCE - Air Gauges and Air Leaks

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 237

5

Periodically, to ensure system integrity

To check for Air System leaks 1. Start the engine if not already

running. 2. Scroll to either the Basic or

Enhanced View to monitor Primary and Secondary Air Pressures: see (1) of Enhanced View.

2 21

3

1

3. Build up air pressure in the system until the system cutout setpoint or until 120 psi (827 kPa) is reached.

4. Turn the Ignition Switch to OFF (stopping the engine) and then back to the ON position, but don't start the engine. The Basic or Enhanced View will appear.

5. Release the service brakes, and observe the rate of air pressure drop. This rate should not exceed 2.0 psi (14 kPa) per minute.

6. Start the engine and build up air pressure again.

7. Turn the Ignition Switch to OFF (stopping the engine) and then back to the ON position, but don't start the engine.

8. Apply the brakes fully, holding the pedal down for five minutes. The pressure drop should not exceed 3.0 psi (21 kPa) per minute.

9. If you detect excessive leakage (air pressure loss greater than 3.0 psi (21 kPa) after five minutes of brake application), a leakage test should be made at the air line connections and at all air brake control units. These tests should determine where air is escaping.

Air Compressor All compressors, regardless of make or model, run continuously while the engine is running. System pressure is controlled by the governor. The governor acts in conjunction with the unloading mechanism in the compressor cylinder block to start and stop compression of air. The compressor is unloaded when the system

pressure reaches 120 psi (827 kPa) and compression is reestablished when system pressure falls to 100 psi (690 kPa).

Preventive Maintenance The following service checks are provided for your information only and should be performed by a certified mechanic. Contact your dealer or the engine manufacturer's Maintenance Manual for further information on servicing air compressors. After completing any repairs to the air system, always test for air leaks, and check the brakes for safe operation before putting the vehicle in service. Below is a list of areas to maintain for the air compressor:

Inspect compressor air filter element, if so equipped, and replace element if clogged. Check compressor mounting and drive for alignment and belt tension. Adjust if necessary.

Remove compressor discharge valve cap nuts and check for presence of excessive carbon. If excessive carbon is found, clean or replace the compressor cylinder head. Also, check compressor discharge line for carbon, and clean or replace the discharge line if necessary.

MAINTENANCE - Air Compressor

238 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

Disassemble compressor and thoroughly clean and inspect all parts. Repair or replace all worn or damaged parts, or replace compressor with a factory exchange unit.

Brake System To learn more about brakes, see the Index, under Brakes.

WARNING

DO NOT work on the brake system without the parking brake set and wheels chocked securely. If the vehicle is not secured to prevent uncontrolled vehicle movement, it could roll and cause damage to the vehicle, serious personal injury, or death.

CAUTION

The air brake system of this vehicle was configured for ONE of the follow- ing operations: tractor or truck, and

complies with the respective portions of FMVSS 121. A tractor shall not be operated or configured as a truck, nor shall a truck be operated or configured as a tractor, without significant modifi- cations to the air brake system in order to retain compliance with FMVSS 121. Contact your dealer for instructions.

WARNING

DO NOT use brake linings with a thick- ness below the specified minimum. Such linings will have lining rivets ex- posed that can damage the brake drum and reduce brake efficiency, which could cause death, personal in- jury or system failure.

WARNING

DO NOT use any replacement part in the brake system unless it conforms exactly to original specifications. A nonconforming part in your vehicle's brake system could cause a malfunc- tion resulting in an accident causing death or personal injury. Sizes and

types are so related to one another that a seemingly unimportant change in one may result in a change in how well the brakes work for you on the road. If parts do not work together properly, you could lose control of your vehicle, which could cause a serious accident.

Brake adjustment and brake balance must be set carefully to (1) make the most efficient use of the forces available for braking and (2) allow equal stopping forces at all wheels. Once a brake system is set to specifications, changing any one of its components or any combination of components may cause the system to not work as well. All parts have to work together to perform as they should. Any replacement components in your brake system should be exactly equal to the original components. Any changes from the original specifications can affect the whole system. All of the following areas are interrelated and must conform to original specifications:

Tire size Drum brakes Cam radius Wedge angle

MAINTENANCE - Brake System

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 239

5

Drum radius Brake linings Brake chambers Slack adjusters Disc brakes Disc rotors

All vehicle operators should check their brakes regularly.

Air Disc Brakes This vehicle may have disc brakes instead of drum brakes.

1. Brake caliper 2. Caliper mounting flange 3. Brake rotor 4. Inspection notches

How to inspect brake pads on disc brakes To inspect the brake pads:

1. Park on level ground and chock the wheels.

2. Temporarily release the parking brakes.

3. Looking from the ground up at the bottom of the caliper and rotor, compare the relative position of two notches; one located on the caliper and the other on the carrier.

4. Take a measurement from between these two notches and compare them to the specifications to determine if the pads need to be replaced.

Have a qualified mechanic perform a detailed inspection if the notches are not found. The pads and rotors should be measured and compared against the manufacturers specifications located in the brake manufacturers service manual.

Inspect Disc Brake Caliper for Running Clearance Regularly inspect caliper for Running Clearance:

1. Stop the vehicle on level ground and let the brakes cool down. Hot

brake calipers can burn skin on contact.

2. Chock the wheels. 3. Temporarily release the parking

brakes. 4. Grab the caliper and move it. This

movement is Running Clearance. 5. Proper Running Clearance is 0.08

in. (2 mm) of movement of the brake caliper (approximately the thickness of a nickel) in the inboard/outboard direction.

Have a qualified mechanic provide further inspection if the caliper does not move or appears to move more than the specified clearance

Auto Slack Adjuster The auto slack adjuster is a mechanism to maintain the correct amount of space between the braking surface and the friction material.

MAINTENANCE - Brake System

240 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

1. Retracted position, no brake pedal applied

2. Applied position, brake pedal engaged

Drum Brake Inspection Have brake drum linings inspected by a qualified mechanic for wear at regular intervals according to the maintenance schedule. In severe service or off-highway applications inspect the linings more frequently. In addition, periodically check the brake chamber stroke. Replace the slack adjuster if proper stroke cannot be maintained. Operational checks of automatic slack adjusters

1. Start the vehicle and get the air system up to normal operating pressure. Do not apply the parking brake.

2. Apply pressure to the brake pedal and measure the distance the air chamber pushrod traveled.

3. Compare the results to the specification to determine if the automatic slack adjusters need replacing.

WARNING

Manual adjustment of automatic slack adjusters is a dangerous practice that could have serious consequences. It gives the operator a false sense of se- curity about the effectiveness of the brakes. Contact the Service Depart- ment at your dealership if the stroke exceeds specifications. A stroke ex- ceeding specifications may indicate a problem with the slack adjuster or the brake foundation.

Automatic Slack Adjuster Stroke Specification

Chamber Type Stroke

36 (rear brakes) 1.5-2.5 in. (38-57 mm)

30 (rear brakes) 1.5-2 in. (38-51 mm)

16, 20 and 24 (front brakes)

1-1.75 in. (25.4-44.4 mm)

Cab Maintenance Cab exterior, interior, frame and engine compartment components need maintenance to ensure longevity and safe operations. A clean vehicle also allows leaks to be detected easier.

MAINTENANCE - Cab Maintenance

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 241

5

WARNING

Always allow hot surfaces to cool down before attempting to work near them. Failure to comply may result in personal injury or death.

WARNING

Handle cleaning agents carefully. Cleaning agents may be poisonous. Keep them out of the reach of children. Failure to comply may result in proper- ty damage, personal injury, or death.

WARNING

DO NOT use gasoline, kerosene, naphtha, nail polish remover or other volatile cleaning fluids. They may be toxic, flammable or hazardous in other ways. Failure to comply may result in personal injury, property damage or death.

WARNING

DO NOT clean the underside of chas- sis, fenders, wheel covers, etc. without protecting your hands and arms. You may cut yourself on sharp edged metal parts. Failure to comply may result in personal injury, property damage, or death.

WARNING

Moisture, ice, and road salt on brakes may affect braking efficiency. Test the brakes carefully after each vehicle wash. Failure to comply may result in death, personal injury, equipment or property damage.

Vehicle Cleaning Observe all caution labels Always read directions on the

container before using any product Do not use any solution that can

damage the body paint Most chemical cleaners are

concentrates that require dilution

Only use spot removing fluids in well ventilated areas

Any vehicle is subjected to deterioration from multiple causes (i.e. industrial fumes, ice, snow, corrosive road salt, etc.,)

Exterior and Engine Compartment Corrosive materials used to remove ice, snow and dust from the road can collect on the entire vehicle with concentrated accumulations throughout the underbody and engine compartment. If these materials are not removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame rails, floor pan, electrical and exhaust system, even though they have been provided with corrosion protection. At least every spring, flush these materials from the entire vehicle, including the underbody and engine compartment, with plain water using light water pressure. On vehicles used in applications and/or areas that experience high usage of, or exposure to, corrosive materials, cleaning of the entire vehicle should be done more frequently. If desired, your dealer can do this service for you.

MAINTENANCE - Cab Maintenance

242 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

CAUTION

Do not direct high pressure water onto seals or flexible hoses. Water may en- ter the part which will contaminate the system lubricants and fluids. To pre- vent damage to these components, keep a gentle flow of water moving at all times. Failure to comply may result in equipment damage.

CAUTION

Do not direct high pressure water onto electrical components, plug connec- tors, seals or flexible hoses on the en- gine. Failure to comply can accelerate corrosion and degrade electrical com- ponent which may cause a fire or equipment damage.

To prevent rust, keep chromed parts clean and protected with wax at all times, especially in winter conditions when the roads are salted.

If necessary, use a commercial chrome cleaner to remove light rust.

Chrome surfaces are best cleaned with fresh water. Wipe dry to preserve their luster. A commercial chrome cleaner will remove light rust. After cleaning, wax flat surfaces and apply a thin coat of rust preventive lubricant around bolts or other fasteners.

Clean aluminum wheels and bumpers with cool water. Tar- remover will get rid of heavy deposits of road grime. To prevent spotting, wipe aluminum surfaces dry after washing.

Under corrosive conditions, such as driving on salted roads, clean aluminum parts with steam or high- pressure water from a hose. A mild automotive soap solution will help. Rinse thoroughly.

To maintain the tailpipe's quality finish, wash the tailpipe with a soft cloth, mild automotive soap, and water or glass cleaner. A non-abrasive chrome polish can be used sparingly on hard-to-clean areas. DO NOT clean your high-heat chrome using scouring pads, abrasive chrome polish, highly acidic chemical cleaners or any other abrasive cleaners. Even high quality stainless steel parts can rust under prolonged exposure to salt

water, especially when the salt-laden moisture is held against the metal surface by road grime. It is important to frequently clean salty moisture and grime from stainless steel surfaces.

If surface rust is encountered, wash the surface and use a commercial polishing compound to clean off the rust, followed by a coating of wax.

Never use steel wool when cleaning stainless steel. Minute particles of the steel wool can become embedded in the surface of the stainless steel part and cause rust staining.

Weather Stripping Frequent washing of the vehicle is required to remove road grime and contaminants that can stain and oxidize paint and accelerate corrosion of plated and polished metal surfaces. Waxing offers added protection against staining and oxidation. Do not apply wax in the hot sun and do not friction burn the paint with a buffing machine. Occasionally spray weather- stripping on doors and windows with silicone compound to help preserve resiliency. This is especially useful in

MAINTENANCE - Cab Maintenance

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 243

5

freezing weather to prevent doors and windows from sticking shut with ice.

NOTE

To allow enough time for your truck's finish to cure, wait at least thirty days after the date of manufacture before waxing.

Cleaning Interior Vinyl and Upholstery

NOTE

Strong cleaning agents such as hand sanitizer, solvents, paint thinners, win- dow cleaner and gasoline/ diesel fuel must never be used on your vehicle's interior. Repeated exposure to chemi- cals such as sunscreen, insect repel- lents containing DEET, or brake fluid may cause accelerated wear, tacki- ness or discoloration of interior surfa- ces.

Wipe vinyl upholstery and lining with a good commercial upholstery cleaner. Do not use acetone or lacquer thinner. Clean

fabric upholstery with upholstery shampoo specially formulated for this purpose.

First remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a vacuum cleaner.

Use a soft brush to loosen caked- on dirt before vacuuming it away.

Wipe the fabric surface with a slightly damp cloth and dry the seat fabric thoroughly. If the fabric is still dirty, wipe using a mixture of mild soap and lukewarm water, then dry thoroughly.

If the stain does not come out use an upholstery shampoo specially formulated for this purpose. Test the cleaner on a hidden place to make sure it does not harm the fabric. Follow the instructions on the container.

Other interior surfaces may be cleaned using a mixture of mild soap and lukewarm water, or an automotive interior cleaner, used on its intended surface (i.e. use leather conditioner on leather surfaces, etc.). Avoid frequent or repeated use of the following products on interior surfaces:

Alcohol-based cleaners (including hand sanitizer)

Methanol-based cleaners

Bleach Acetone Any other strong solvent Abrasive cleaners Sunscreen

How to Wash the Exterior of the Vehicle Your dealer has a number of vehicle-care products and can advise you on which ones to use for cleaning the exterior and interior of your vehicle.

WARNING

Handle cleaning agents carefully. Cleaning agents may be poisonous. Keep them out of the reach of children. Failure to comply may result in proper- ty damage, personal injury, or death.

MAINTENANCE - Cab Maintenance

244 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

WARNING

DO NOT use gasoline, kerosene, naphtha, nail polish remover or other volatile cleaning fluids. They may be toxic, flammable or hazardous in other ways. Failure to comply may result in personal injury, property damage or death.

WARNING

DO NOT clean the underside of chas- sis, fenders, wheel covers, etc. without protecting your hands and arms. You may cut yourself on sharp edged metal parts. Failure to comply may result in personal injury, property damage, or death.

WARNING

Moisture, ice, and road salt on brakes may affect braking efficiency. Test the brakes carefully after each vehicle wash. Failure to comply may result in

death, personal injury, equipment or property damage.

CAUTION

DO NOT aim the water jet directly at door locks or latch. Tape the key holes to prevent water from seeping into the lock cylinders. Water in lock cylinders should be removed with compressed air. To prevent locks from freezing in the winter, squirt glycerin or lock deicer into the lock cylinders.

NOTE

To allow enough time for your truck's finish to cure, wait at least thirty days after the date of manufacture before waxing.

1. Begin by spraying water over the dry surface to remove all loose dirt before applying the car wash solution.

CAUTION

Do not direct high pressure water onto seals or flexible hoses. Water may en- ter the part which will contaminate the system lubricants and fluids. To pre- vent damage to these components, keep a gentle flow of water moving at all times. Failure to comply may result in equipment damage.

CAUTION

Do not direct high pressure water onto electrical components, plug connec- tors, seals or flexible hoses on the en- gine. Failure to comply can accelerate corrosion and degrade electrical com- ponent which may cause a fire or equipment damage.

Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunshine.

Do not spray water directly into the cab vents.

2. Using soapy water, wash the vehicle with a clean soft cloth or a soft brush made for automotive cleaning.

MAINTENANCE - Cab Maintenance

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 245

5

Use cool water and a mild, automotive-type soap. Strong industrial detergents, cleaning agents and household-type soaps are not recommended and may damage the vehicle's paint.

Do not use stiff brushes, paper towels, steel wool, or abrasive cleaning compounds because they will scratch painted, plated, and polished metal surfaces.

3. Rinse painted surfaces with gentle water pressure frequently while washing to flush away dirt that might scratch the finishes during the washing operation.

4. Hose dirt and grime from the entire chassis.

CAUTION

Do not direct high pressure water onto seals or flexible hoses. Water may en- ter the part which will contaminate the system lubricants and fluids. To pre- vent damage to these components, keep a gentle flow of water moving at

all times. Failure to comply may result in equipment damage.

CAUTION

Do not direct high pressure water onto electrical components, plug connec- tors, seals or flexible hoses on the en- gine. Failure to comply can accelerate corrosion and degrade electrical com- ponent which may cause a fire or equipment damage.

5. Wipe everything dry with a chamois to avoid water spots. To prevent water spotting, dry off the cosmetic surfaces with a clean cloth or chamois.

6. Remove road tar with an automotive-type tar remover or mineral spirits.

7. After cleaning and drying the entire vehicle, apply a quality automotive wax to protect the vehicle's finish.

Cab HVAC Fresh Air Filter Replacement The fresh air filter for the cab HVAC is located in the air intake housing that is

mounted to the firewall in the passenger side rear corner of the engine compartment. The filter can be replaced without using any tools.

1. Tilt the hood open. 2. Locate the air intake housing at the

passenger side rear corner of the engine bay, below the rain tray.

3. Locate the filter cover labeled OPEN with an arrow pointing towards the rear of the vehicle. Slide the filter cover towards the rear of the vehicle, until you are able to remove the cover.

MAINTENANCE - Cab Maintenance

246 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

4. Remove and inspect the filter, referring to the maintenance interval schedule.

5. Install the new air filter into its housing, taking care to align the airflow direction indicated on the filter element with the airflow direction that's marked on the air intake housing.

6. Replace the filter cover on the air intake housing and slide the cover toward the front of the vehicle. An audible "snap" sound can be heard when the cover is correctly installed. If the snap feature is damaged there are two screw features that may be used to secure the cover.

7. Close and secure the vehicle's hood.

Care of Display Screens on the Dashboard To clean the screen, dampen a clean, soft, lint-free cloth with water only. A mild glass cleaner that does not contain alcohol or ammonia may also be used. Cleaners that contain alcohol and/or ammonia will eventually dry-out, crack and "yellow" the screen. Wipe the screen gently back and forth. You can also use a commercial cleaner especially designed for LCD screens.

Cab Structure, Doors and Hoods Lubricate the lower hood pivot (only if lube fittings are present.)

Safety Restraint System - Inspection

WARNING

Failure to properly inspect and main- tain restraint systems can lead to in- jury or loss of life. Without periodic in- spection and maintenance to detect unsafe conditions, seat restraint com- ponents can wear out or not protect you in an accident.

MAINTENANCE - Cab Structure, Doors and Hoods

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 247

5

WARNING

It is important to remember that any time a vehicle is involved in an acci- dent, the entire seat belt system must be replaced. Unexposed damage caused by the stress of an accident could prevent the system from func- tioning properly the next time it is needed. Failure to comply may result in death or personal injury.

Seat Belt Inspection Points

1. Web cut or frayed or extremely worn at latch area

2. Web cut or frayed at D-loop web guide

3. Comfort Clip cracked or damaged 4. Buckle casting broken 5. Retractor Web Storage for damage

(located behind trim panel) 6. Tethers for web wear and proper

tightness of mounting hardware

7. Mounting hardware for corrosion, proper tightness of bolts and nuts

8. Web for deterioration, due to exposure to the sun

Factors contributing to reduced seat belt life:

Heavy trucks typically accumulate twice as many miles as the average passenger car in a given time period.

Seat and cab movement in trucks causes almost constant movement of the belt due to ride characteristics and seat design. The constant movement of the belt inside the restraint hardware and the potential for the belt to come in contact with the cab and other vehicle parts, contributes to the wear of the entire system.

Environmental conditions, such as dirt and ultraviolet rays from the sun, will reduce the life of the seat belt system.

Due to these factors, the three-point safety belt system installed in your vehicle requires thorough inspection every 20,000 miles (32,000 km). If the vehicle is exposed to severe environmental or working conditions, more frequent inspections may

MAINTENANCE - Safety Restraint System - Inspection

248 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

be necessary. Any seat belt system that shows cuts, fraying, extreme or unusual wear, significant discoloration due to UV (ultraviolet) exposure, abrasion to the seat belt webbing, or damage to the buckle, latch plate, retractor hardware, or any other obvious problem should be replaced immediately, regardless of mileage.

Inspection Guidelines Follow these guidelines when inspecting for cuts, fraying, extreme or unusual wear of the webbing, and damage to the buckle, retractor, hardware, or other factors. Damage to these areas indicates that belt system replacement is necessary.

WARNING

Replace the entire belt system (retrac- tor and buckle side) if replacement of any one part is necessary. Unexposed damage to one or more components could prevent the system from func- tioning properly the next time it is needed. Failure to comply may result in death or personal injury.

1. Check the web wear in the system. The webbing must be closely

examined to determine if it is coming into contact with any sharp or rough surfaces on the seat or other parts of the cab interior. These areas are typical places where the web will experience cutting or abrasion. Cuts, fraying, or excessive wear would indicate the need for replacement of the seat belt system.

2. The pillar web guide (D-loop) is the area where almost constant movement of the seat belt webbing occurs because of relative movement between the seat and cab.

3. Check the Komfort Latch for cracks or possible damage and check for proper operation.

4. Check buckle and latch for proper operation and to determine if latch plate is worn, deformed, or damaged.

5. Inspect the retractor web storage device, which is mounted on the floor of the vehicle, for damage. The retractor is the heart of the occupant restraint system and can often be damaged if abused, even unintentionally. Check operation to ensure that it is not locked up and

that it spools out and retracts webbing properly.

6. If tethers are used, be sure they are properly attached to the seat and, if adjustable, that they are adjusted in accordance with installation instructions. Tethers must also be inspected for web wear and proper tightness of mounting hardware.

7. Mounting hardware should be evaluated for corrosion, and for tightness of bolts and nuts.

8. Check web in areas exposed to ultraviolet rays from the sun. If the color of the web in these areas is gray to light brown, the physical strength of the web may have deteriorated due to exposure to the sun's ultraviolet rays. Replace the system.

Once the need for replacement of the seat belt has been determined, be certain it is only replaced with an authorized PACCAR Parts replacement seat belt. If the inspection indicates that any part of the seat belt system requires replacement, the entire system must be replaced. An installation guide is attached to every replacement belt. Utilize the proper guide for your type of seat, and follow the

MAINTENANCE - Safety Restraint System - Inspection

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 249

5

instructions very closely. It is vitally important that all components be reinstalled in the same position as the original components that were removed and that the fasteners be torqued to specification. This will maintain the design integrity of the mounting points for the seat belt assembly. Contact your dealer if you have any questions concerning seat belt replacement.

Cooling System Maintenance The cooling system in your vehicle was factory filled with extended life coolant that meets or exceeds all ASTM D6210 and Caterpillar EC-1 requirements. PACCAR recommends only using a 50:50 mixture of distilled water and ELC when cooling system service is required. A 50:50 mixture of ELC and distilled water will provide freeze protection down to -34F (-36.7C), which is adequate for most locations in North America. For extremely cold operating conditions, a 60:40 mixture (coolant/water ratio) can be used to provide freeze protection down to -62F (-52.2C).

Unless otherwise optioned, factory fill coolant is an ethylene glycol, nitrited organic acid technology (NOAT) extended life coolant (ELC) formulation at a 50:50 coolant-to-distilled water mixture. The factory fill exceeds ASTM D6210 and Caterpillar EC-1 requirements. Maintaining coolant chemistry and freeze protection is critical to engine and cooling system component health and longevity.

WARNING

Coolant is toxic. DO NOT get the fluid in eyes. If contact occurs, flood eyes with large amounts of water for 15 mi- nutes. Avoid prolonged or repeated contact with skin. In case of contact, immediately wash skin with soap and water. DO NOT take internally. If swal- lowed, seek immediate medical atten- tion. DO NOT induce vomiting. Failure to comply may result in death, person- al injury, equipment or property dam- age.

CAUTION

The engine cooling system has very specific maintenance and inspection requirements. Failure to follow require- ments can damage the engine. Engine damage can include but is not limited to freezing, boiling, corrosion, pitted cylinder liners. This information is found in the engine manufacturers owners manual. It is the owners re- sponsibility to follow all requirements listed in the engine manufacturers owners manual.

NOTE

Coolant is harmful to the environment. Unused coolant must be stored as a toxic hazardous material in leakproof containers. Used coolant must be processed as industrial chemical waste. Please follow HAZMAT guide- lines with both used and unused cool- ants.

MAINTENANCE - Cooling System Maintenance

250 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

CAUTION

Use of non-genuine PACCAR coolant filters can cause severe engine dam- age.

Concentration Check the level of freeze/boil-over protection, which is determined by the glycol concentration. Use a glycol refractometer to determine glycol level. Add coolant to obtain the coolant/water ratio required to provide the protection you need. A 50:50 mix of coolant and water is adequate for most applications. For extremely cold operating conditions, the ratio can be adjusted to a higher concentration of coolant.

NOTE

Maximum recommended ELC concen- tration is 60% ELC and 40% water by volume (a 60:40 coolant mixture). The minimum recommended concentration is 40%.

Glycol Concentration Level

Level

Desired Coolant / Water Ratio

Freeze Point F

(C)

Recommended Levels

40% -12 (-24)

45% -23 (-31)

50% -34 (-37)

55% -50 (-46)

60% -62 (-52)

Condition Perform a visual inspection of the coolant. It should have no cloudiness or floating debris. Determine the chemical inhibitor concentration level by using an extended life coolant specific test kit or test strips. Inhibitor concentration level determines corrosion protection. If you are concerned about possible coolant quality, contamination, or mechanical problems, submit a coolant sample for analysis. Improper maintenance may cause coolant

degradation and could result in damage to the cooling system and engine components. Consult your dealer or the coolant manufacturers representative for recommended extended life coolant test kits, test strips, and laboratory sample procedures.

Coolant Extender Add extended life coolant extender, if necessary, according to the corrosion inhibitor concentration required. DO NOT add coolant extender to nitrite-free coolant.

Checking Coolant Level Check the coolant level daily. When adding coolant, avoid mixing different brands and formulations. If the coolant is mixed with more than 25% of a different formulation, engine corrosion damage could occur. If mixing exceeds 25% of total system volume, it is recommended to flush and refill the system completely with one type of coolant.

Coolant Filter Your engine may be equipped with a coolant filter. It is a "blank filter" and does not contain chemicals or time-release additives. Replace it only with a blank filter at the interval specified in your engine's

MAINTENANCE - Cooling System Maintenance

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 251

5

operator's manual. Never use filters that contain supplemental coolant additives (SCAs) in an ELC-filled system. Consult your engine operator's manual for information on the coolant filter and service procedures.

CAUTION

Use of non-genuine PACCAR coolant filters can cause severe engine dam- age.

Cooling System Sealing Additives and Soluble Oils

OK

1

1. Do not use soluble oils or sealing additives.

CAUTION

The use of sealing additives or soluble oils in the cooling system can cause damage to the engine. These additives can plug various areas of the radiator, EGR system and oil cooler. The plug- ging of the cooling system can hamper heat transfer, causing internal engine damage. DO NOT use sealing addi- tives or soluble oils in the cooling sys- tem. The use of sealing additives can: Build up in coolant low-flow

areas Plug the radiator and oil cooler Damage the water pump seal Damage heat transfer surfaces Damage seals and hoses Corrode brass and copper Failure to comply may result in equip- ment or property damage.

Inspect Coolant Level Inspect the vehicle's coolant surge tank for proper coolant level. Add coolant if the level in the tank is below the line marked MIN.

The minimum fluid level is determined by the line on the surge tank indicated by the letters "MIN." This indicator is located below the fill cap. The cooling system will need to be filled if the level is not above the "MIN" line, regardless of engine temperature.

1. Fill location 2. Fill line

Radiator Hoses Perform these maintenance procedures according to the Preventative Maintenance Schedule.

1. Check the following radiator hose conditions:

MAINTENANCE - Cooling System Maintenance

252 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

Deterioration/signs of leaking Hose clamp torque

How to Add Coolant to the Cooling System Use a solution of half ethylene glycol antifreeze and half water for best heater performance. Do not use more than 60 percent concentration of antifreeze, as a shortened heater life will result.

WARNING

DO NOT remove the coolant fill cap while the engine is hot. Scalding steam and fluid under pressure may escape and cause serious burns. Fail- ure to comply may result in personal injury or death.

NOTE

If frequent topping off is necessary and there are no visible signs of coolant leaks when the engine is cold, check for leaks with the engine operating at normal temperature.

NOTE

DO NOT use the pressure cap to fill the surge tank with fluid.

NOTE

DO NOT overfill a cooling system. Ex- cess coolant may result in overflow, loss of antifreeze, and reduced corro- sion protection.

1. Radiator Mounted Coolant Surge Tank

32 1

1. Turn off the engine and let it cool for a minimum of 10 minutes.

2. If your cooling system is built with an air bleed valve in the upper engine coolant pipe, open the air bleed valve before filling the surge tank.

3. Close any open coolant drain valves in the lower engine coolant pipe.

4. Remove the surge tank fill cap (1). DO NOT remove the surge tank pressure cap (2).

5. Fill the system with premixed coolant through the surge tank fill port. Pour coolant at a steady rate until it reaches the lower of the two lines indicated by either "COLD MIN" or "MIN" on the surge tank. Wait for one minute after adding coolant. If the coolant level drops, add coolant until it returns to the lower line.

6. Close the air bleed valve if opened earlier in this procedure.

7. Start the engine and maintain an idle at low rpm.

8. While the engine is idling air will purge from the cooling system via the surge tank's coolant fill port,

MAINTENANCE - Cooling System Maintenance

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 253

5

which will lower the coolant level in the surge tank. Continue to fill the surge tank until the coolant level remains approximately 1/2 in. (13 mm) above the "MIN" line. This may take up to 2 minutes, depending on the outside temperature.

9. Maintain a low idle until the thermostat opens and the operating temperature stabilizes. A sign that the thermostat has opened is when the upper coolant pipe gets hot on the bottom side indicating hot coolant is now running through it.

10. Add coolant to the surge tank until the coolant remains 1/2 in. (13 mm) above the "MIN" level.

11. Operate the engine at high idle for 10 minutes. Afterward, add coolant to the surge tank until the coolant remains 1/2 in. (13 mm) above the "COLD FULL" line.

12. Reinstall the surge tank fill cap. Check the coolant level before and after each trip. Add coolant as necessary. Coolant may not immediately appear at the correct level after the radiator has been filled. Air may be trapped in the cooling

system, which will affect the coolant level until the air is purged. After servicing the cooling system, continue monitoring it for 3-5 days. The coolant level in the surge tank will lower when air trapped in the cooling system is purged. During each pre-trip inspection you should inspect recently serviced components of the cooling system for signs of coolant leaks.

NOTE

If the coolant frequently needs top- ping-up or there are any signs of cool- ant leakage, consult a PACCAR Serv- ice dealer.

Electrical System

WARNING

Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and

reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.

WARNING

Before attempting any work on the bat- teries or electrical system, remove all jewelry. If metal jewelry or other metal comes in contact with electrical cir- cuits, a short circuit may occur causing you to be injured, as well as electrical system failure and damage.

CAUTION

DO NOT modify or improperly repair the vehicles electrical system or power distribution box. All electrical repairs should be performed by an authorized dealer. Improper repair or modifica- tions will void your warranty and/or cause serious damage to your vehicle.

Engine Aftertreatment System Power Requirements The engine aftertreatment system uses battery power for up to 10 minutes after the

MAINTENANCE - Electrical System

254 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

ignition is turned off. After the ignition turns off, the engine aftertreatment system circulates DEF to help cool down the fluid and prevent overheating. For situations where the battery will be disconnected (i.e. for service or maintenance of the vehicle), please wait 10 minutes before disconnecting battery power.

CAUTION

Wait at least 10 minutes after the key switch is turned OFF before discon- necting battery power. The system uses battery power to circulate DEF and prevent overheating of the DEF system. Failure to comply may result in property damage.

Low Voltage Disconnect (LVD) (option) The Low Voltage Disconnect (LVD) may increase battery life and avoid depleting the battery below the minimum charge needed to start the engine by shutting off non-vital battery loads.

When battery voltage drops below the LVD setting, LVD starts a two-minute countdown. If battery voltage remains below the LVD setting and the engine is not started, when the countdown ends, all non-vital battery loads (hotel loads) will be shut off. The LVD setting is adjusted in the Settings sub-menu of the Digital Display. When battery voltage drops below the LVD setting

1. An amber LVD Popup notification occurs, accompanied by an audible warning. This starts the two-minute countdown.

2. Thirty seconds before the countdown ends, the Battery Voltage indicator is replaced by the amber (or red) LVD telltale21. The LVD popup notification will turn red and will be accompanied by a continuous audible warning.

3. When the two-minute countdown has ended, the LVD Hotel Loads Disconnected Popup appears, and LVD shuts off all loads connected through the LVD system.

The LVD condition will not clear until battery voltage increases above the LVD setting or the engine is started. Electrical loads shut off by LVD

Cab dome lamps Cab accessories Spare LVD wiring for customer

added accessories

WARNING

DO NOT use the Spare Battery A and B circuits or other circuits that are con- trolled by the LVD to power electronic engine controls, ABS circuits, or safe- ty/work related lighting. Before adding any device to the vehicle's electrical system, consult your nearest author- ized dealer or read the contents of TMC RP136. Failure to do so may cause equipment damage or lead to personal injury.

21 On the 15 inch display, LVD telltale color depends on the severity of battery depletion.

MAINTENANCE - Electrical System

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 255

5

NOTE

The determination of what circuits/ loads that were connected to the LVD was based upon the recommendation from Technology and Maintenance Council (TMC) of the American Truck- ing Association. To review the recom- mended practice, see TMC RP-136.

NOTE

All LVD circuits are color-coded blue on the central electrical panel cover la- bel.

How to Replace a Headlight Bulb This procedure applies to low and high beam halogen bulbs used in side-mounted headlight pods. Bulb replacements should be performed with the vehicle parked and the parking brake set. See Vehicle Light Bulb Specifications on page 309 for correct replacement bulbs.

Headlight Pod Back (cover plate removed)

1. Low Beam rubber access cap 2. High Beam bulb 3. Turn Signal/Parking Light bulbs

CAUTION

When replacing a halogen bulb, do not touch the globe with your fingers. Oils or other contaminates on the skin can result in early bulb failure.

1. Remove both screws securing the back-of-pod cover plate using a #3

Phillips-head screwdriver, and remove cover plate. Cover plate is removed in picture.

2. If replacing the Low Beam bulb, remove the rubber access cap (1). The High Beam bulb does not have an access cap (2).

3. Unlock bulb from behind by turning base of bulb (and its wired connector) a quarter-turn counter- clockwise, then withdraw bulb and connector from its seat.

4. Unplug wired connector from back of bulb, and dispose of bulb.

5. Plug the wired connector into the new bulb. Do not touch bulb globe with fingers.

6. Insert new bulb into seat, and turn base quarter-turn clockwise to lock.

7. Replace rubber access cap if removed earlier in this procedure.

8. Replace and secure cover plate. Final Checks

After everything is reconnected, turn on your headlights and check for operation.

Have your headlights periodically checked for proper alignment by dealer.

MAINTENANCE - Electrical System

256 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

Keep your headlights clean using only mild soap and water (see Maintaining Headlight Performance). A dirty headlight reduces performance and creates glare.

Aiming Headlights The headlights were properly aimed at the factory to meet safety specifications. If the headlights need to be adjusted, please have an authorized dealership aim the headlights.

Fuses, Circuit Breakers and Relays Fuses, circuit breakers, and relays are located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) to the left of the steering column, behind the clutch pedal. Additional fuses are located in the engine compartment (drivers side firewall) and also in the sleeper (drivers side of vehicle) under the bunk storage compartment. Refer to the fuse labels affixed at each fuse panel location (generally under the fuse panel cover) for information about the location and amp ratings of each circuit.

Altering the Electrical System Refer to a wiring diagram for your chassis before adding electrical options to ensure proper electrical system performance.

WARNING

DO NOT replace a fuse with a fuse of a higher rating. Doing so may damage the electrical system and cause a fire. Failure to comply may result in proper- ty damage, personal injury, or death.

WARNING

Never install a circuit breaker/poly- switch in a location indicated for fuse only. Using a polyswitch (circuit breaker) in a fuse-only circuit may cause the circuit to overheat when a short exists, which could lead to equip- ment damage and/or personal injury.

NOTE

Polyswitches/circuit breakers are al- lowed in certain locations as indicated by the label on the fuse box. In these

applications, a fuse may be used in- stead of a circuit breaker.

CAUTION

Follow all manufacturers' circuit pro- tection recommendations for the com- ponents and wires being added. Fail- ure to comply may result in equipment damage.

NOTE

If you are unfamiliar with proper elec- trical repair practices and procedures, see your authorized dealer for assis- tance.

Vehicle CAN Bus Your vehicle is equipped with a CAN bus electrical system. Because of how the electrical system is designed it is important that any accessories added after the vehicle is built are installed only on the K- CAN or the S-CAN. These dedicated CANs are provided on the driver's side of the cab, near to the interior fuse panel. Access to

MAINTENANCE - Electrical System

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 257

5

the K-CAN and S-CANs is provided by two RP1226 connectors. DO NOT tap into, connect to, tamper with, or splice into any CAN network other than the K-CAN or the S-CAN. Connecting to a unapproved CAN network may trigger CAN fault codes.

CAUTION

Connecting to an unapproved CAN network may trigger CAN fault codes. The manufacturer will not warrant fail- ures or damage caused to CAN net- work components when the failure or damage is a result of improper con- nections to the CAN network.

CAUTION

The use of scotch locks, scraped off insu- lation, and electrical tape are not ap- proved CAN connection techniques. These are the source of numerous CAN faults.

Scotch locks

Batteries Regular attention to the charging system will help prolong the service life of the batteries.

WARNING

Batteries contain acid that can burn and gases that can explode. Ignoring safety procedures may result in death, personal injury, equipment or property damage.

WARNING

Never remove or tamper with battery caps. Ignoring this could allow battery acid to contact eyes, skin, fabrics, or painted surfaces. Failure to comply may result in property damage, per- sonal injury, or death.

CAUTION

DO NOT store other items in the bat- tery box. Failure to comply could result in damage to the truck and/or batter- ies.

CAUTION

Properly secure battery tie downs and battery box cover when reinstalling batteries after service. DO NOT over tighten. Over tightening can crack the battery case which can lead to equip- ment damage.

MAINTENANCE - Electrical System

258 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

CAUTION

The Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) sys- tem recirculates fluid to the doser to prevent damage from heat after key off. If your vehicle is equipped with battery disconnect switches do NOT disconnect battery power within TEN minutes of switching the ignition key off. Failure to comply may result in ve- hicle or property damage.

Here are some common causes of battery failure: Overcharge: this condition results from improper voltage regulator adjustment. It results in overheating of the battery, warped plates, and evaporation of electrolyte. Undercharge: the voltage regulator is malfunctioning, the drive belt is slipping, or your vehicle has undergone long periods of idling or short distance driving. These conditions result in battery plates becoming covered with a hard coating. Vibration: loose battery hold-downs may cause battery plate failure. Short Circuits: these discharge the battery by draining electricity.

Dirty or Loose Connections: improper connections may stop the flow of electrical power to and from the battery.

Battery Charging

WARNING

Batteries can injure you severely. They contain acid, produce poisonous and explosive gases, and supply levels of electric current high enough to cause burns. A spark or flame near a battery on charge may cause it to explode with great force. Never remove or tam- per with the battery caps. Failure to comply may result in property damage, personal injury, or death.

Except for using small trickle charges to maintain battery condition, you should have your vehicle's batteries charged by a qualified service facility. To help reduce the risk of personal injuries, follow these guidelines carefully when recharging a battery:

Before attempting any service in the electrical installation, disconnect the battery negative cable.

Allow no sparks or open flame anywhere near the charging area.

Charge a battery only in a well- ventilated area, such as outdoors or in a fully open garage which contains no pilot lights or other flames. Gases generated during the charging process must be allowed to escape.

Always make sure the battery charger is OFF before connecting or disconnecting the cable clamps.

To avoid short circuits, damage to the vehicle, or personal injury, never place metal tools or jumper cables on the battery or nearby. Metal that accidentally comes in contact with the positive battery terminal or any other metal on the vehicle (that is in contact with the positive terminal), could cause a short circuit or an explosion.

Charging Reminders Use protective eyewear Keep all batteries away from

children Never reverse battery poles

MAINTENANCE - Electrical System

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 259

5

Never attempt to place the vehicle in motion, or run the engine with batteries disconnected

Keep the battery clean and dry Look for any signs of damage Battery terminals should not be

coated with improper grease. Use a commercially available, noncorrosive, non-conductive terminal coating, or petroleum jelly.

Never use a fast charger as a booster to start the engine. This can seriously damage sensitive electronic components such as relays, radio, etc., as well as the battery charger. Fast charging a battery is dangerous and should only be attempted by a competent mechanic with the proper equipment.

Under Cab Battery Access The battery compartment is located on the left side of the vehicle, under the cab access steps.

1. Remove the six bolts that are located in the two cab access step plate.

2. Remove battery cover for access.

In Cab Battery Access Your vehicle may be equipped with Absorbed Glass Mat (AGM) batteries located in the cab under the passenger's seat. The glass mat in AGM batteries are designed to absorb the battery acid inside the battery that can leak or spill out in conventional batteries. This design feature allows batteries to be positioned in any orientation without risk of leaking. To access the batteries:

1. Enter the cab. 2. Remove six fasteners securing the

passenger side seat base to the battery box assembly.

3. Remove the seat and seat base as one unit to gain access to the batteries.

4. Installation is the reverse of removal.

Cranking Battery Specification

Category Specification

Group 31

Stud Type Threaded

Cold Crank Amps 650

Category Specification

Voltage 12 V

Reserve Capacity 160 minutes

General Maintenance free

Removing Batteries After accessing the batteries, follow these steps to remove them from the vehicle.

CAUTION

Wait at least 10 minutes after the key switch is turned OFF before discon- necting battery power. The system uses battery power to circulate DEF and prevent overheating of the DEF system. Failure to comply may result in property damage.

1. Be sure all switches on the vehicle are turned OFF

2. Wait 10 minutes after turning ignition off before disconnecting the batteries

3. Disconnect negative (-) ground cable first

MAINTENANCE - Electrical System

260 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

4. Disconnect positive (+) cable 5. Unscrew the holding plate bolts

with an open end wrench

NOTE

Always dispose of automotive batter- ies in a safe and responsible manner. Contact your authorized dealer for dis- posal standards. Call your local au- thorized recycling center for informa- tion on recycling automotive batteries.

Follow the procedures below to reinstall batteries on the vehicle and replace parts removed for access.

Installing Batteries Follow the procedure below to reinstall main batteries on the vehicle:

NOTE

Always dispose of automotive batter- ies in a safe and responsible manner. Contact your authorized dealer for dis- posal standards. Call your local au- thorized recycling center for informa- tion on recycling automotive batteries.

NOTE

Make sure to reconnect the ground (negative) cable last.

WARNING

Battery replacement may alter or dis- turb battery cable routing. Check to in- sure battery cables are free from any point of chaffing. Failure to comply may result in death, personal injury, equipment or property damage.

1. Place batteries in vehicle and tighten bolt of holding plate

2. Reconnect positive cable 3. Reconnect ground (negative)

ground cable

Replace Battery Box Cover

WARNING

Always reinstall steps before entering the cab or accessing the deck plate. Without steps you could slip and fall.

Failure to comply may result in person- al injury or death.

WARNING

Fairings not installed properly could come loose and cause other motorists to have an injury accident. It is impor- tant that fairings be installed properly. Failure to comply may result in death, personal injury, equipment or property damage.

1. Replace battery cover. 2. Install two bolts in step strut.

Torque to 24-32 lb-ft (33-43 Nm). 3. Install fairing and install four bolts.

Torque to 6-7 lb-ft (8-9 Nm). 4. Install steps by installing two bolts

in each step. Torque to 24-32 lb-ft (33-43 Nm).

MAINTENANCE - Electrical System

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 261

5

Slow Battery Charging

WARNING

Charger cables must be connected positive to positive (+ to +) and nega- tive to negative (- to -). If connected improperly, batteries could explode. Failure to comply may result in proper- ty damage, personal injury, or death.

WARNING

Always make sure the battery charger is OFF before connecting or discon- necting the cable clamps. To reduce the danger of explosions and resulting death or personal injury, do not con- nect or disconnect charger cables while the charger is operating.

NOTE

Some vehicles may have an ultra ca- pacitor mounted in the battery box. These devices have a similar shape to a battery but have two positive posts and one negative posts. Do not attach

battery chargers to these devices to recharge the vehicles batteries. Con- nect directly to the conventional two post charging batteries to charge them.

NOTE

Follow the instructions that come with your battery charger.

1. Access the battery terminals, the batteries do not have to be removed from the vehicle.

2. Make sure the battery charger is turned off.

3. Disconnect the battery cables. 4. Connect charger cables. 5. Start charging the battery at a rate

not over 6 amperes. Normally, a battery should be charged at no more than 10 percent of its rated capacity.

6. After charging, turn OFF charger and disconnect charger cables.

Alternator Take the following precautions to avoid burning out alternator diodes:

DO NOT start the engine with alternator disconnected (connections removed) from the circuit.

Before welding, disconnect all electronic connections to the vehicle batteries.

Remove battery power cable and insulate it from the vehicle.

DO NOT run the engine with the batteries disconnected.

DO NOT disconnect the battery cables or alternator connection cables with the engine running

Never turn the ignition switch from the ON position to the START position with the engine running.

When charging the battery (installed in the vehicle) disconnect the battery cables.

DO NOT reverse the cables of the alternator, starter motor, or battery.

DO NOT polarize the alternator. The alternator should not be polarized like a generator. To

MAINTENANCE - Electrical System

262 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

ensure correct polarity, use a test lamp or a voltmeter.

Remote Keyless Entry The system will lock or unlock cab doors with the key fob. The system will alert you with parking lights when the selected doors are locked or unlocked. There are two key fobs provided with the system which provide secure rolling code technology that prevents someone from recording the entry signal. If you have issues with a key fob, replace the battery and reprogram the key fob. In some situations, the key fob may need to be replaced and in others, a fuse may have failed that could render both key fobs inoperative. Contact your dealer for help if a key fob does not work and it is not because of a bad battery. The key fob uses one CR2032, 3V battery. Batteries should last approximately three years, depending on use. Consistently reduced range is an indicator that the battery needs replacement. Batteries are available at most discount, hardware, and drug stores. The battery can be accessed by removing the cover of the key fob. After a new battery is installed, the key fob may

need to be reprogrammed to pair with the vehicle.

Quantity Type

1 CR2032

How to replace key fob battery If the key fob will not unlock the doors, replace the battery.

1. Remove the cover of the key fob. 2. Replace the battery and dispose of

the old battery. 3. Check to see if the key fob is still

paired to the vehicle. If not, reprogram the key fob.

Programming Key Fobs The key fob may need to be paired with the truck when the battery is replaced or when the key fob has not been used for an extended period of time.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.

2. Open the driver and passenger doors.

3. Press and hold the passenger doors unlock button for 5 seconds, then release the button.

4. Within 3 seconds press and hold the passenger doors lock button for 5 seconds, then release the button. At this time you should hear the vehicle cycle the locking system by unlocking, then relocking the doors. (This indicates that the door module has entered learning mode.)

5. Within the next 10 seconds, press and hold the key fobs lock button for 5 seconds, (you should hear the vehicle lock the doors) then press and release the unlock button.

6. Once programming is complete (or the 10 seconds from Step 5 has passed), the vehicle will cycle the locking system twice (unlock, lock, unlock, lock). This process should be repeated for each fob to be paired with the module. A maximum of five key fobs may be paired to a single module.

MAINTENANCE - Electrical System

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 263

5

Engine Maintenance These topics relate to the operator maintenance tasks for the engine. Information provided here is in addition to information contained in the Engine Operator Manual supplied with the vehicle.

WARNING

Exhaust fumes from the engine con- tain carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas. DO NOT breathe the en- gine exhaust gas. A poorly maintained, damaged, or corroded exhaust system can allow carbon monoxide to enter the cab. Entry of carbon monoxide into the cab is also possible from other ve- hicles nearby. Failure to properly main- tain your vehicle could cause carbon monoxide to enter the cab, resulting in personal injury or death.

WARNING

NEVER start or let the engine run in an enclosed, unventilated area. Ex- haust fumes from the engine contain

carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas. Carbon monoxide can be fatal if inhaled. Failure to comply may result in property damage, per- sonal injury, or death.

WARNING

Never idle your vehicle for prolonged periods of time if you sense that ex- haust fumes are entering the cab. In- vestigate the cause of the fumes and correct it as soon as possible. If the vehicle must be driven under these conditions, drive only with the windows open. Failure to repair the source of the exhaust fumes may result in death, personal injury, equipment or property damage.

NOTE

Keep the engine exhaust system and the vehicle's cab ventilation system properly maintained. It is recommend- ed that the vehicle's exhaust system and cab be inspected (1) By a compe- tent technician every 15,000 miles

(24,140 km); (2) Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system; or (3) Whenever the exhaust system, underbody, or cab is dam- aged.

Check Engine Oil Level

WARNING

Hot engine oil can be dangerous. You could be burned. Let the engine oil cool down before changing it. Failure to comply may result in death, person- al injury, equipment or property dam- age.

NOTE

It takes approximately 15 minutes for all the oil to run into the sump when the engine is warm. If the level is checked immediately after switching off the engine, the dipstick will show a low oil level.

MAINTENANCE - Engine Maintenance

264 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

1. Make sure that the vehicle frame rail is standing on a flat and level surface.

2. Make sure that the vehicle is horizontal, both lengthwise and crosswise. Check this carefully on a vehicle with air suspension. Note that the engine may be inclined up to 4 degrees, depending on the vehicle model and wheelbase.

3. Twist the dipstick handle to unlock it, then pull the dipstick out of the holder.

4. Wipe the dipstick clean with a lint- free cloth.

5. Place the dipstick back into the holder.

6. Pull the dipstick out again and check the oil level. The oil level should always be between the two marks on the dipstick. Engine Oil Dip Stick Markings

1

2

1. High oil level (1) 2. Low oil level (2)

7. Reinstall the dipstick and twist to lock it in place.

Topping Up the Engine Oil

1. Top up with oil, if necessary, via the filler opening. Use the correct grade in the correct quantity. For oil replacement, please see engine Operators Manual included with this chassis.

2. After topping up, wait 1 minute and check the oil level again.

MAINTENANCE - Engine Maintenance

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 265

5

3. Reinstall the oil fill cap and twist to lock it in place.

Pipe and Hose Clamp Torque Values Torque specifications for engine parts.

Application Type of Clamp lb-in. Nm

Radiator and Heat Exchanger Hoses

Constant Torque CT-L 90-110 10.2-12.5

Heater Hoses Constant Tension not required not required

Air Intake Pipes Hi Torque HTM-L 100-125 11.3-14.2

Plastic Air Intake Pipes Constant Torque CT-L 88 10.0

Charge Air Intake Hoses Flex Seal 70-100 7.9-11.3

B9296 50-60 6-7

Fuel, Oil and Water Heat Exchangers (for hoses less than 9/16 in. diameter).

Miniature 3600L 10-15 1.1-1.7

Install Engine Belt You can extend the reliability and service life of your vehicle's drive belts with proper attention to installation and maintenance. Neglect could cause belt failure. The result could be the loss of the electrical or air system as well as possible engine damage from overheating.

NOTE

See the engine manufacturer's opera- tor's manual for further information on replacing engine drive belts.

The images below may not appear like the configuration of the vehicle. The procedure

is still the same. Follow this procedure to install an accessory drive belt:

1. Route the new belt around the pulleys, and then rotate the automatic tensioner so that the idler pulley swings toward the belt routing. The following figure shows an example of the rotation direction to release the tensioner.

MAINTENANCE - Engine Maintenance

266 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

2. Slip the belt around the idler pulley attached to the automatic tensioner.

3. Release the automatic tensioner. 4. Check the belt alignment on each

pulley. The belt must fall between the flanges of each pulley.

Engine Fan

WARNING

DO NOT work on or near the fan with the engine running. Anyone near the engine fan when it turns on could be injured. If it is set at MANUAL, the fan will turn on any time the ignition key switch is turned to the ON position. In AUTO, it could engage suddenly with- out warning. Before turning on the igni- tion or switching from AUTO to MAN- UAL, be sure no workers are near the fan. Failure to comply may result in death or personal injury.

Follow these guidelines to check your engine fan:

With the engine shut off, check the fan hub bearings for looseness, loss of lubricant, and any abnormal

conditions (e.g. fan belt misaligned or excessive wear/damage, etc.).

With the engine idling and the hood open, stand at the front of the vehicle. Listen for any noises coming from the fan hub. Bearings that have lost lubricant and are dry will typically emit a squeal or a growl when the engine is at operating temperature and the fan clutch is engaged. If noise is detected, have the fan bearings inspected by an authorized dealership.

Engine Fan Blade Verify that there is enough fan blade clearance with the fan shroud. The recommended distance around the fan shroud is 1 in. (25 mm) from front edge of any fan blade-to-radiator side member. Minimum clearance is 3/4 in. (19 mm).

Rear edge of any blade must be no closer than 3/8 in. (9 mm) to the nearest engine component. If this cannot be obtained, the fan spacer or fan is incorrectly placed.

The leading edge of any fan blade must be 1 in. (25 mm) from the inside edge of the shroud.

MAINTENANCE - Engine Maintenance

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 267

5

Air Intake System Engine heat, vibration, and age combine to loosen air intake connections and cause cracks in the tubing and elbows. Leaks in the intake system allow abrasive dust to enter the engine and quickly cause expensive damage. During your daily walk- around inspection, carefully check all tubing, elbows, clamps, supports, and fasteners for condition and tightness. Check the charge-air-cooler for air leaks annually. The air leaks can be caused by cracked tubes or header. For service see your authorized dealer.

CAUTION

DO NOT use air intake pipes and con- nections as a step or to pull yourself up. This could loosen the connections and open the system to unfiltered air which could damage the engine.

Turbocharger

WARNING

DO NOT operate engine with turbo- charger intake piping disconnected. A suction is created when the engine is running. This suction could draw your hand or anything else near it into the impeller fan. You could be injured. Al- ways keep the intake piping connected when you will be running the engine.

When servicing the air intake and exhaust systems on a turbocharged engine, check the items listed below:

Lubricating System Check the oil lines, housing, and connections. Look for leaks, damage, or deterioration. Leaks could mean you have damaged oil lines or oil seals.

Manifold With the engine operating, check for leaking manifold or flange gaskets.

High Frequency Vibration Vibration may indicate turbo rotor imbalance. Have your dealer investigate

this immediately. If you detect any deficiencies, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for servicing. Delay could lead to severe and expensive damage to your vehicle.

How to Replace the Engine Air Filter Engine air filter replacement should be performed with the vehicle parked, the ignition OFF, and the parking brake set.

1. Open the hood to access the engine air cleaner, located on the firewall at the back of the engine compartment.

2. Using a wrench, loosen to disengage the (4) bolts securing the filter housing cap to the filter housing.

3. If present, remove the hose connecting the filter housing cap to the solenoid by pushing in on the plug and pulling the hose out. Hose is present for vehicles with an under-hood air intake. Disconnecting the hose allows the cap to be removed.

4. Pull the air filter housing cap away from the main enclosure to access the filter.

MAINTENANCE - Engine Maintenance

268 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

5. Visually inspect the filter housing, enclosure, and hardware for damage. If damaged, replace the air cleaner.

6. Gently, pull filter directly out of the filter housing, taking care to not drop or tap filter on housing during removal. Loose dirt and dust trapped in the filter can fall into the cleaner, which can lead to engine damage.

7. Inspect, and if necessary (and using ONLY a clean, damp cloth) clean out any debris inside the filter housing. Be careful to not push any contaminate into the engine inlet.

8. Visually inspect the new filter prior to installation. There should not be any damage to the filter media or gaskets, such as dents, dings, cracks, or holes.

9. Install new filter element, then inspect element for a good seal and proper alignment.

10. Install the filter housing cap and tighten the bolts to 30 5 in-lb. DO NOT use the housing cap to drive the filter into position.

11. Reconnect hose to filter housing cap if removed earlier in this procedure.

12. Verify housing cap is secure. Close and secure hood.

Remove and Install Solenoid on Air Filter Housing These instructions are for removing and installing the under hood air intake solenoid from an air filter housing for vehicles with the firewall mounted air cleaner and optional under hood air intake switch on the dash. This solenoid must be removed to access the air filter. With the under hood air intake option, there is an additional step required to disconnect the air line attached to the air filter housing to access the air filter.

WARNING

Drain the air tank to depressurize the air system before disconnecting any air hoses. Failure to perform this step may result in personal injury.

CAUTION

Ensure no foreign debris enters in sol- enoid/airline. Failure to comply may re- sult in equipment damage.

1. Park the vehicle, set the parking brake, and turn the ignition OFF.

2. Open the hood. 3. Drain front air service tank of all air

pressure. 4. Disconnect the air line at the

connection on the air filter housing. 5. Push in on the collar and then pull

the air hose out.

WARNING

DO NOT disconnect any lines at the solenoid body. They could be pressur- ized which may result in personal in- jury.

MAINTENANCE - Engine Maintenance

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 269

5

6. Remove the single bolt (with a 13 mm wrench) that holds the solenoid to the filter housing.

7. Cover the air hose end and the fitting with tape or something lint- free to keep the hose free from debris.

8. To reinstall the air solenoid to the filter housing, tighten the 13 mm bolt to 70 lb-in. 5 (7.9 Nm 0.56)

9. To reinstall the air line to the solenoid, push the air hose into the fitting, then pull on the air hose to ensure that it is properly seated.

10. Verify that there are no air leaks, start the engine and allow the air system to reach operating pressure. Activate the under hood air switch and verify that there are no air leaks.

Disconnecting the air solenoid will allow the air filter housing to be removed to access the air filter.

Air Filter Restriction Indicator (Option) An Air Filter Restriction Indicator may be installed on the air filter housing or air induction piping for access to clean, filtered air. As the filter plugs and restriction increases, a red indicator will appear in a window on the indicator. When red appears, the air filter should be replaced. The indicator can

MAINTENANCE - Engine Maintenance

270 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

be reset by pressing the button at the end of the indicator.

Exhaust System The exhaust system is part of the noise and emission control system. Periodically check the exhaust system for wear, exhaust leaks, and loose or missing parts. For details on how to maintain the emissions components in the exhaust

system, see "Noise and Emission Control" in your vehicle operator's manual. Please refer to the engine operator's manual for more details on how to maintain the emissions components in the exhaust system.

Engine Mounting

CAUTION

DO NOT re-torque or reuse existing flange head bolts. These bolts are fac- tory set to the specified torque. If bolts are loose or damaged, they must be replaced with the new bolts. Failure to comply may result in property damage.

Periodic Inspection: Inspect engine mounts every 60,000 miles (96,000 km). Check for the following:

Inspect both mount and leg fasteners. Check for loose or broken bolts. Replace as necessary.

Check mount and leg for fractures, breaks or deformation. Replace as necessary.

Check for complete insertion of motor mount. Replace as necessary.

New leg to mount flange head bolts should be torqued to 210-230 lb-ft (284-311 Nm).

Frame

WARNING

DO NOT cut, splice or weld frame rails or drill through the top or bottom flang- es of the rails. These operations could affect frame rail strength leading to a failure resulting in an accident. Rail failures resulting from such modifica- tions are not warrantable. Failure to comply may result in property damage, personal injury, or death.

MAINTENANCE - Frame

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 271

5

WARNING

Frame welding is NOT recommended. The high heat of welding nullifies the special heat treatment of the rails, greatly reducing the tensile strength of the frame rail. If a frame member be- comes cracked from overloading, fati- gue, surface damage, or a collision, the only permanent repair is to replace the damaged frame member with a new part.

Emergency Welding In an emergency, a temporary repair may be performed. Observe the following precautions to protect electronic systems during welding operations. Emergency welding procedures are further explained in the maintenance manuals. Please refer to the ordering information on the back cover to obtain a maintenance manual. In the event of emergency welding of a frame rail and when welding any other part of your truck or any component attached to your truck, observe the following precautions before welding:

Disconnect all electronic devices. It is not possible to list all of the

electronics that could be affected, but a few examples include the following: alternator, engine Electronic Control Unit (ECU), transmission ECU, ABS ECU, navigation devices, diagnostic devices, and monitoring devices.

Disconnect battery cables and insulate them from the vehicle.

Do not use the ECU or engine ground stud for the ground of the welding probe.

Ensure that the ground connection for the welder is as close to the weld point as possible. This ensures maximum weld current and minimum risk to damage of electrical components on the vehicle.

Painting Do not electrostatically paint your truck or any component on your truck without first removing all of the electronic components from the truck. It is not possible to list all of the electronics that could be affected, but a few examples include the alternator, engine Electronic Control Unit (ECU), transmission ECU, ABS ECU, navigation

devices, diagnostic devices, and monitoring devices.

Fifth Wheel Monthly Maintenance Refer to specific manufacturer's

literature for any special instructions

Steam clean the fifth wheel Check lock guard operation using a

commercial lock tester Clean and oil all moving parts Lubricate the lock mechanism with

a lithium-base grease All grease fittings (especially those

which grease the top surface of the fifth wheel)

Fifth Wheel Bi-Annual Maintenance

NOTE

Whenever possible, torque all frame fasteners on the nut end, not the bolt head.

Refer to specific manufacturer's literature for any special instructions.

MAINTENANCE - Frame

272 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

Remove fifth wheel from vehicle. Refer to the Shop Manual, "Fifth Wheel Removal."

Steam clean the fifth wheel and mounting brackets.

Check all moving parts for excessive wear or damage. Replace all worn or broken parts.

Complete two-month service procedure.

Install fifth wheel. Refer to the Shop Manual, "Fifth Wheel Installation."

Tighten all frame fasteners with a torque wrench. See Frame Fastener Torque Requirements on page 304.

Sliding Fifth Wheels Lubricate bearing surface of support bracket through the grease fittings on the side of the fifth wheel plate. Use a water resistant lithium-base grease.

NOTE

The plate must be lifted up slightly to relieve the weight of the bracket while applying grease.

Fuel System Location of Fuel Shut-off Valves Fuel shut-off valves for the fuel crossover line are on the bottom of the secondary fuel tank, at the crossover line connection. They are optional on the primary fuel tank.

Specification Use only diesel fuel as recommended by engine manufacturers.

WARNING

Diesel fuel in the presence of an igni- tion source could cause an explosion. A mixture of gasoline or alcohol with diesel fuel increases this risk of explo- sion. DO NOT remove a fuel tank cap near an open flame. Use only the fuel and/or additives recommended for your engine. Failure to comply may re- sult in death, personal injury, equip- ment or property damage.

CAUTION

If anyone ever pours gasoline into your fuel tank, drain the entire system. Oth- erwise, the pump and engine will be damaged. DO NOT try to dilute the gasoline by adding diesel fuel (see Warning above).

Fuel Filters See Engine Manufacturers Operator Manual provided with this chassis.

Fuel Tank Check the strap tightness: tighten to proper torque value as required; aluminum tank - 30 lb-ft (41 Nm) cylindrical steel tank - 8 lb-ft (11 Nm.)

Front Axle and Suspension Axle Lubrication Refer to the axle manufacturer's operator's manual for lubrication specifications and service intervals.

MAINTENANCE - Fuel System

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 273

5

Kingpin Lubrication

Lubricate with approved lubricant. Lubricate knuckle thrust bearings, knuckle pins, and tie rod ends. Lack of lubrication causes premature wear and hard steering. Lubrication schedule may be shortened if necessary.

Suspension Lubrication

Each standard spring anchor pin has a grease fitting. Pressure lubricate spring pins as specified. At regular intervals, the spring leaves may be lubricated with a rust-inhibiting oil applied with a spray gun or brush. Depending on your suspension, lubricate all spring pins until grease flows out of both ends of the bushing. Look for signs of rust or water in the flushed grease. If a pin will not accept grease, it should be removed, cleaned, and inspected.

CAUTION

DO NOT spray the suspension with chemical products or mineral oil; it can cause damage to the bushings.

Inspection For all vehicles, mandatory maintenance procedures include retightening all U-bolts and inspecting the suspension for loose, damaged, or abnormally worn fasteners. Visually inspect the shock absorbers, the rubber bushings, the leaf springs, and that the suspension is aligned and functioning properly. Mono leaf spring suspensions should also have their rear shackle brackets checked for proper alignment. Even with proper maintenance, however, the service life of leaf springs are affected by many factors: fatigue, vehicle gross weight, type of load, road conditions, and vehicle speed. Check for cracks, wear marks, splits, or other defects on the surface of the spring. Defective parts must be replaced. Because repaired springs cannot be fully restored to their original service life, replace the complete assembly if cracks or other defects are detected.

Wheel Alignment For driving safety and comfort, and to prolong the life of your vehicle, it is important to have wheels correctly aligned. Check tire wear frequently. Uneven tire wear is a sign that the wheels may be misaligned. If you see uneven wear, take

MAINTENANCE - Front Axle and Suspension

274 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

your vehicle to an authorized dealer familiar with aligning wheels on your vehicle.

Suspension U-Bolts It is important that U-bolts remain tight. Severe use of your vehicle will cause them to loosen faster, and all vehicles need to have their U-bolts checked and tightened regularly. Be sure someone with the proper training and the right tools checks and tightens the U-bolts on your vehicle. New springs can settle in after service, relieving the tension on the U-bolts. Loose U-bolts can cause leaf spring breakage, axle misalignment, hard steering, and abnormal tire wear. All vehicles should have suspension U-bolts tightened after the first 500 miles (800 km) of operation. Re-torque the front spring pinch bolts and shackle pinch bolts.

WARNING

DO NOT operate the vehicle if the sus- pension U-bolts are not properly tight- ened. Loose U-bolts will cause the axle to not be properly secured to the suspension, which could cause loss of

vehicle control and an accident. Loose U-bolts can also cause uneven tire wear and poor alignment. Failure to comply may result in death, personal injury, equipment or property damage.

U-bolts are difficult to tighten unless you have the right equipment. If you cannot tighten them correctly yourself, be sure to have them checked and tightened regularly by an authorized mechanic. Tighten U-bolt nuts to the specified torque value with the vehicle loaded to its normal gross weight. See Suspension U-Bolts, Grade 8 on page 306 specifications for torque values applying to U-bolts and nuts.

WARNING

DO NOT replace U-bolts and nuts with common U-bolts or standard nuts. These parts are critical to vehicle safe- ty. If the wrong U-bolts or nuts are used, the axle could loosen or sepa- rate from the vehicle and cause a seri- ous accident. Use only U-bolts and nuts of SAE Grade 8 specification or better. Failure to comply may result in

death, personal injury, equipment or property damage.

PACCAR 20k Front Axle Lubrication Proper lubrication practices are important in maximizing the service life of the steer axle assembly.

Kingpins, Thrust Bearings, and Tie Rod Ends On-Highway Applications - Standard

Pressure lubricate every 6 months or 25,000 miles (40,000 km).

A more frequent lubrication cycle is required for axles used in on/off- highway, refuse, or other severe service applications. Use heavy- duty, multipurpose lithium base (#2 grade) grease.

MAINTENANCE - Front Axle and Suspension

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 275

5

NOTE

DO NOT mix with sodium-based grease.

PACCAR 20k Front Axle Lube Points

1

2 3 1. Upper kingpin bearing 2. Tie rod end 3. Lower kingpin bearing

NOTE

If it is difficult to grease either the up- per or lower bearing, try greasing the bearings with the vehicle jacked up and supported on axle stands to im-

prove grease flow and flush contami- nation.

Oil Bath Lubricate wheel end assembly with a drive axle lubricant that meets MIL-L-2105D specifications. Either SAE 80W-90 mineral based or 75W-90 synthetic gear oil is acceptable. Check the lubricant level at each greasing interval. Maintain the lubrication fluid level at centerline of axle or fill line on hub cap. Always check fluid level on flat ground.

CAUTION

Never mix oil bath and grease-packed wheel ends. Mixing oil and grease will reduce the effectiveness of both lubri- cants and may cause damage to the wheel ends.

Heater and Air Conditioner Maintenance The combination heater-air conditioner provides comfort for those in the cab through accurate control of the cab environment in all weather conditions. Regular attention to the items below will help you keep the heater-air conditioner unit running well. Keep the vehicle's ventilation system, engine exhaust system, and cab joints properly maintained. It is recommended that the vehicle's exhaust system and cab be serviced by a competent technician as follows:

Inspected every 15,000 miles Whenever a change is noticed in

the sound of the exhaust system Whenever the exhaust system,

vehicle underbody, or cab is damaged

To allow for proper operation of the vehicle ventilation system, proceed as follows:

Keep the inlet grille at the base of the windshield clear of snow, ice, leaves, and other obstructions at all times.

MAINTENANCE - Heater and Air Conditioner Maintenance

276 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

Keep the exhaust pipe area clear to help reduce the buildup of exhaust gas under the vehicle.

Check the drain tube of the fresh air inlet for trapped water before assuming that there is a leak in the heating system.

Special Precautions

WARNING

Excessive heat may cause the pres- surized components of the air condi- tioning system to explode. Never weld, solder, steam clean, or use a blow torch near any part of the air condition- ing system. Failure to comply may re- sult in death, personal injury, equip- ment or property damage.

WARNING

Air conditioning refrigerant can be haz- ardous to your health. DO NOT ex- pose yourself to leaking refrigerant for prolonged periods near excessive heat, open flames, or without proper

ventilation. Failure to do so may result in death or personal injury.

If a refrigerant leak develops in the presence of excessive heat or an open flame, hazardous gases may be generated. If you become aware of a refrigerant leak on your vehicle have your system serviced immediately and observe the following precautions: Stay away from the hot engine until the exhaust manifold has cooled. Do not permit any open flame in the area. Even a match or a cigarette lighter may generate a hazardous quantity of poisonous gas. Do not smoke in the area. Inhaling gaseous refrigerant through a cigarette may cause violent illness.

Heater

CAUTION

During extreme cold weather, DO NOT blow hot defroster air onto cold wind- shields. This could crack the glass. Turn the Air Flow Control Dial to De- frost and adjust the fan speed accord- ingly while the engine warms. If the engine is already warm, move the

Temperature Control Dial to "cool," then gradually increase the tempera- ture when you see that the windshield is starting to warm up. Failure to com- ply may result in equipment damage.

Check all heater controls for full- range operation.

Check hoses, connections, and heater core for condition and leaks.

Air Conditioner

WARNING

The air conditioning system is under pressure. If not handled properly dur- ing servicing, it could explode. Any servicing that requires depressurizing and recharging the air conditioning system must be conducted by a quali- fied technician with the right facilities to do the job. Failure to comply may result in death, personal injury, equip- ment or property damage.

MAINTENANCE - Heater and Air Conditioner Maintenance

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 277

5

WARNING

Wear eye protection any time you blow compressed air. Small particles blown by compressed air could injure your eyes.

Listen to the compressor and drive clutch for noise and vibration. If you find problems, have the system checked thoroughly. A malfunctioning clutch usually indicates trouble elsewhere in the system.

Check the evaporator core, filter, and condenser core for debris restricting air flow. Clean if necessary. Small particles may be removed with compressed air blown through the core in the opposite direction of normal air flow.

Check the engine belt for condition and proper tension.

Check all hoses for kinks, deterioration, chafing, and leaks. Adjust kinked or chafing hoses to eliminate restrictions and prevent further wear.

Check all components and connections for refrigerant leaks. If you discover a leak, do not try to tighten a connection. Tightening a connection may cause a leak to worsen. Have a qualified technician correct the problem.

NOTE

A leaking evaporator or condenser core cannot be repaired; it must be re- placed.

Have the air conditioning system fully serviced annually by your authorized dealer. Qualified service technicians will have to evacuate and recharge the system.

How to Replace Air Conditioner Filter Inspect and clean cab air filter element every 3-6 months of service. Depending on the operating environment, if air flow from the air conditioner and heater is less efficient or windows fog easier, you may need to replace the cab air filter.

1. Tilt the hood open.

2. Locate air intake housing at passenger rear corner of vehicle under the rain tray.

3. Locate filter cover labeled "OPEN" with an arrow pointing rearward in vehicle. Slide filter cover rearward in vehicle until you are able to remove the cover.

4. Remove and inspect filter referring to maintenance interval schedule.

5. Replace filter in housing taking care to align the airflow direction that is indicated on the side of the side of the filter element with the airflow direction that is clearly marked on the air intake housing.

6. Replace the filter cover on the air intake housing and slide the cover forward in vehicle. An audible snap sound can be heard when the cover is correctly in place. If the snap feature is damaged there are two screw features that may be utilized to retain the cover in place.

7. Close and secure hood of vehicle.

Replace the Recirculation Air Filter Please contact an authorized dealer when the service interval is required to inspect the cabin recirculation air filter.

MAINTENANCE - Heater and Air Conditioner Maintenance

278 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

Sleeper HVAC Air Filter 1. Lift the sleeper bunk to expose the

sleeper HVAC module. 2. Find the retention tab at the side of

the filter element and move it to release the filter. Moving this tab will allow the filter to be removed in an upward direction.

3. Align the airflow direction that is indicated on the side of the filter element such that it points into the HVAC housing.

4. Insert the filter and make sure the retention tab has re-engaged to secure the filter.

5. Close the bunk.

Noise and Emission Control There are specific components on the vehicle that are designed to meet certain Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) emissions and noise regulations. To maintain conformance with the regulations, these components need to be functional and properly maintained.

Noise Emission Warranty Peterbilt warrants to the first person who purchases this vehicle for purposes other than resale and to each subsequent purchaser that this vehicle as manufactured by Peterbilt, was designed, built, and equipped to conform at the time it left Peterbilt's control with all applicable U.S. EPA Noise Control Regulations. This warranty covers this vehicle as designed, built, and equipped by Peterbilt, and is not limited to any particular part, component, or system of the vehicle manufactured by Peterbilt. Defects in design, assembly, or in any part, component, or system of the vehicle as manufactured by Peterbilt, which, at the time it left Peterbilt's control, caused noise emissions to exceed Federal standards, are covered by this warranty for the life of the vehicle.

Tampering with Noise Control System Federal law prohibits the following acts or the causing thereof:

1. The removal or rendering inoperative by any person other than for purposes of maintenance, repair, or replacement, of any

device or element of design incorporated into any new vehicle for the purpose of noise control prior to its sale or delivery to the ultimate purchaser or while it is in use, or

2. The use of the vehicle after such device or element of design has been removed or rendered inoperative by any person. Among those acts presumed to constitute tampering are the acts listed below:

Air Intake System

Removing or rendering inoperative the air filter housing/silencers or intake piping

Engine Cooling System

Removing or rendering the fan clutch inoperative Removing the fan shroud

Engine Removing or rendering engine speed governor inoperative so as to allow engine speed to exceed manufacturer's specifications Modifying ECU parameters

Exhaust System

Removing or rendering inoperative exhaust system components

Fuel System

Removing or rendering engine speed governor inoperative, allowing engine speed to exceed manufacturer's specifications

MAINTENANCE - Noise and Emission Control

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 279

5

Removing of air signal attenuator on engines equipped with this device Removing of diesel exhaust fluid tank and system

Inner Fender Shields and Cab Skirts

Removing shield or skirts Cutting away parts of shields, skirts or damaged or loose portions of shields or skirts

Noise Insulating Blankets

Removing noise insulators from engine block or from around the oil pan Cutting holes in, or cutting away part of noise insulators Removing hood-mounted noise insulation

Inspecting Noise and Emission Components If, during periodic inspection and maintenance of other systems and components, it is found that parts of the noise control system require attention, we recommend that those parts be inspected at more frequent intervals to assure adequate maintenance and performance. The following instructions are based on inspection of the noise control system at regular intervals as indicated in the Noise Control System - Maintenance Log on page 281.

Air Intake System Do all checks and maintenance

procedures listed in this manual under engine air intake system and air filter housing.

Check the induction tubing, elbow connections, clamps, brackets, and fasteners for deterioration, cracks, and security.

If you find an air leak anywhere between the air filter housing and the engine, repair that leak immediately.

CAUTION

Air leaks cause excessive noise and may result in serious damage to the engine. If you do not repair them the engine damage will not be covered by your warranty. Repair all air leaks as soon as you find them.

Engine Mounted Noise Insulators Check condition. Is the insulator

secure? How you do this will depend on the method of attaching the noise insulators on the engine and around the oil pan (bolts, snap fasteners, or straps). Tighten loose

fasteners and repair or replace any worn or damaged fasteners.

Check insulators around fasteners and stress points, especially where they may be affected by engine vibration. Repair any cracked or damaged mounting points. Use suitable reinforcing plates to ensure that the insulators will remain in position.

Exhaust System Check for exhaust leaks, which

would indicate a leaking manifold gasket; replace gasket if necessary.

Check cap screws for tightness, including those at the flanges. Refer to the engine manufacturer's service manual for proper tightening sequence and torque values.

Joints and Clamps Check for leaks, and tighten as

necessary. Check for deterioration or dents in pipes and clamps which could allow exhaust to escape.

Replace any serviceable joints, flexible pipes and gaskets at the service intervals.

Selective Catalysts Reduction (SCR)

MAINTENANCE - Noise and Emission Control

280 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

Check SCR canister filter, clamps and mounting brackets. Tighten if necessary. Inspect SCR canister for signs of rust or corrosion.

Exhaust Piping Check exhaust piping for rust,

corrosion, or damage. Replace deteriorated piping before holes appear. If piping is perforated at any point, temporary patching or lagging is acceptable until you can have permanent repairs made. On turbocharged engines, check joints at flanges and mounting brackets for tightness.

Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Check DPF, clamps, and mounting

brackets. Tighten if necessary. Inspect DPF for signs of rust or corrosion.

Check internal baffling. You can do this by listening for rattling sounds while tapping on the (DPF with a rubber mallet or revving the engine up and down through its normal operating range.

DEF Tank (See Aftertreatment System manual) Exhaust Tail Pipe

Engine Fan and Shroud Hood Insulation Blanket Inner Fenders Shields and Cab Skirts

Noise Control System - Maintenance Log To ensure your vehicle's noise control requirements are maintained, record maintenance checks. Use the following log sheet and retain copies of documents regarding maintenance services performed and parts replaced on the vehicle.

Component Recom- mended Interval (Miles)

Date & R.O. No.

Repair Facility & Location

Work Performed

Date & R.O. No.

Repair Facility & Location

Work Performed

Exhaust System Routing Integrity

25,000

Shutters Shrouds 25,000

Hood Insulation Blanket

10,000

Engine Mounted Hose Insulators Fasteners

10,000

MAINTENANCE - Noise and Emission Control

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 281

5

Component Recom- mended Interval (Miles)

Date & R.O. No.

Repair Facility & Location

Work Performed

Date & R.O. No.

Repair Facility & Location

Work Performed

Inner Fender Shields 50,000

Cab Skirts Fasteners 50,000

Air Intake System Integrity Element

5,000

Clutch-type Fan Drive 10,000

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank Straps During normal operation of the truck, the DEF tank straps may relax. Inspect the spring on top of the strap. If more than " (12.7mm) of the spring is exposed, the bolt will need to be re-torqued between 70 80 in-lbs. (7.9 9 Nm). This distance (1) is measured from the washer at the end of the spring to the edge of the tube at the top of the straps.

1/2" (12.7 mm)

1

See Engine Operator's Manual for DEF filter maintenance interval.

Rear Axle and Suspension Your vehicle's suspension, by design, requires a minimal amount of maintenance. However, suspensions in over-the-road operations require periodic inspection to ensure trouble-free performance.

MAINTENANCE - Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank Straps

282 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

WARNING

DO NOT work on the vehicle without the parking brake set and wheels blocked securely. If the vehicle is not secured to prevent uncontrolled vehi- cle movement, it could roll and may re- sult in death, personal injury, equip- ment or property damage.

WARNING

DO NOT operate the vehicle if the sus- pension U-bolts are not properly tight- ened. Loose U-bolts will cause the axle to not be properly secured to the suspension, which could cause loss of vehicle control and an accident. Loose U-bolts can also cause uneven tire wear and poor alignment. Failure to comply may result in death, personal injury, equipment or property damage.

WARNING

Failure to maintain the specified torque values or to replace worn parts can

cause component system failure, pos- sibly resulting in an accident. Improp- erly tightened (loose) suspension U- bolts can lead to unsafe vehicle condi- tions, including: hard steering, axle misalignment, spring breakage or ab- normal tire wear. Failure to comply may result in death, personal injury, equipment or property damage.

CAUTION

DO NOT spray the suspension with chemical products or mineral oil; it can cause damage to the bushings.

NOTE

Failure to follow these recommenda- tions could void warranty.

Visual Inspection For all vehicles, mandatory maintenance procedures include retightening of U-bolts and complete inspection. Even with proper maintenance, however, many factors affect the service life of springs and suspension components: fatigue, vehicle gross weight,

type of load, road conditions, and vehicle speed. All vehicles need to have their U- bolts checked and tightened regularly, but severe use of your vehicle can cause them to loosen faster. It is important that U-bolts remain tight. Be sure someone with proper training and the right tools checks and tightens the U-bolts on your vehicle. After the first 500 miles (800 km) of operation, periodically inspect the suspension as noted below:

Visually check for loose or missing fasteners, cracks in hanger, or axle connection brackets

Check that springs are centered in hangers and in good condition

Check for cracks, wear marks, splits, or other defects on the surface of the spring

Replace defective parts. Because repaired springs cannot be fully restored to their original service life, replace the complete assembly if cracks or other defects are detected

After replacement of any part or discovery of loose components, check the torque of all fasteners

MAINTENANCE - Rear Axle and Suspension

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 283

5

New springs settle-in after the vehicle's initial service, causing the U-bolts to become loose

Rear Suspension Fasteners To maintain the performance of the air suspension, check fastener torque values after the first 2,000 miles (3,200 km) of service and every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) thereafter. Torque recommendations apply to fasteners supplied and installed by vehicle manufacture. The values listed at the back of this chapter (See Suspension U-Bolts, Grade 8 on page 306 and Frame Fastener Torque Requirements on page 304), are for cadmium plated or phosphate and oil fasteners only.

Rear Suspension U-Bolts U-bolts are difficult to tighten unless you have the right equipment. If you cannot tighten them correctly yourself, be sure to have them checked and tightened regularly by an authorized mechanic.

NOTE

To ensure an accurate torque reading, use properly maintained and calibrated torque wrenches. Clean the nut and

bolt. No dirt, grit, or rust should be present.

WARNING

DO NOT operate the vehicle if the sus- pension U-bolts are not properly tight- ened. Loose U-bolts will cause the axle to not be properly secured to the suspension, which could cause loss of vehicle control and an accident. Loose U-bolts can also cause uneven tire wear and poor alignment. Failure to comply may result in death, personal injury, equipment or property damage.

NOTE

Whenever possible, torque all frame fasteners on the nut end, not the bolt head.

Load the vehicle to its normal gross weight before tightening U-bolts. Loading the vehicle ensures proper adjustment of the U-bolt and spring assembly.

WARNING

DO NOT replace U-bolts and nuts with common U-bolts or standard nuts. These parts are critical to vehicle safe- ty. If the wrong U-bolts or nuts are used, the axle could loosen or sepa- rate from the vehicle and cause a seri- ous accident. Use only U-bolts and nuts of SAE Grade 8 specification or better. Failure to comply may result in death, personal injury, equipment or property damage.

Rear Axle Lubrication See the axle manufacturer's operator's manual for lubrication specifications and service intervals. Check oil level with the vehicle parked on level ground and the fluid warm. The level should be even with the bottom of the filler hole.

Rear Axle Alignment Continual road shock and load stresses may force the rear axles out of alignment. If you detect rapid tire wear on the rear

MAINTENANCE - Rear Axle and Suspension

284 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

axles, you may have misaligned axles. If you suspect rapid tire wear, have your rear axle alignment checked and adjusted by an authorized dealer. Suspension alignment should be checked when any one of the following conditions exist:

Total vehicle alignment required after a body has been installed on truck chassis.

Discovery of loose suspension fasteners (Loose, defined as any torque below the recommended torque value)

Discovery of elongated holes in a suspension component

Bushing replacement Excessive or abnormal tire wear Immediately after post body

installation (See First Day in the Maintenance Chapter)

Drive Axle - Dana Drain the lubricant while warm. Flush each unit with clean flushing oil. Change the lubricant.

Eaton/Dana Axle Lubrication The original mineral-based

lubricant must be drained within 3,000-5,000 miles (4,800-8,000 km) on all Eaton axles. This initial change is very important because it flushes out break-in contaminants that might otherwise cause premature wear.

No initial drain is required on Eaton axles that are factory filled with an Eaton-approved synthetic lubricant.

Mineral-based lubes must be drained within the first 5,000 miles

(8,000 km) if converting to an Eaton-approved synthetic lube.

Change the lubricant within the first 5,000 miles (8,000 km) of operation after a carrier head replacement, regardless of the lubricant type.

Refer to the Eaton Field Maintenance Manual for a particular axle for lubricant specifications.

See your dealer for Eaton- approved lubricant brands.

Refer to the chart below for lubricant change interval.

Type of Lubricant On-Highway Mi. (km) Maximum Change Interval

On/Off Highway Severe Service Mi. (km)

Maximum Change Interval

Mineral-Based 120,000 (192,000) Yearly 60,000 (96,000) Yearly

Eaton-Approved Synthetic

240,000 (384,000) 2 Years 120,000 (192,000) Yearly

MAINTENANCE - Rear Axle and Suspension

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 285

5

Type of Lubricant On-Highway Mi. (km) Maximum Change Interval

On/Off Highway Severe Service Mi. (km)

Maximum Change Interval

Eaton-Approved Synthetic in axle with extended drain interval option

350,000 (560,000)

Drive Axle - Meritor Drain and replace the lubricant.

Meritor Axle Lubrication

NOTE

Axles utilized in 100% off-highway use are not eligible for Meritor's Advanced Lube Rear Drive Axle program.

Under Meritors Advanced Lube Rear Drive Axle program, the axles listed below are exempt from an initial lubricant change:

Available Advanced Lube Axles

RS-19-145 RS-26-180 RT-40-145P RT-46-160

RS-21-145 RS-30-180 SQ-100A RT-46-160P

RS-23-160 RT-34-145 SQ-100AP RT-52-160

RS-23-161 RT-34-145P RT-44-145 RT-52-160P

RS-17-145 RS-23-180 RT-40-145 RT-44-145P

Meritor rear axles that do not appear on the list above will continue to require an

initial drain at 3,000-5,000 miles (4,800-8,000 km).

Refer to the Meritor Field Maintenance Manual for a

MAINTENANCE - Rear Axle and Suspension

286 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

particular axle for lubricant specifications.

See your dealer for Meritor- approved lubricant brands.

Refer to the following chart for lubricant change intervals:

Application Type Of Lubricant Mileage Interval

On Highway Synthetic 240,000 mi. (384,000 km)

Synthetic with Pump and Filter 500,000 mi. (800,000 km)

Mineral Base 120,000 mi. (192,000 km)

City Delivery Synthetic 120,000 mi. (192,000 km)

Synthetic with Pump and Filter 240,000 mi. (384,000 km)

Mineral Base 120,000 mi. (192,000 km)

Off Highway Synthetic 120,000 mi. (192,000 km)

Synthetic with Pump and Filter 120,000 mi. (192,000 km)

Mineral Base 120,000 mi. (192,000 km)

Change the lubricant filter every 120,000 miles (192,000 km). Top off the lubricant level with a similar lubricant

Drive Axle - SISU Breather and Brakes

1. Check the breather for proper operation.

2. Overhaul the brakes: degrease all moving parts, check the bushings and seals for wear.

Drive Axle (SISU) Inspection 1. Check the wheel bearing hubs and

adjust if necessary. 2. Visually inspect for damage or

leaks.

Drive Axle (SISU) Oil Servicing Change the oil in the differential carrier and the hubs, and clean the magnetic oil drain plugs.

Drive Axle - SISU Lube Filter Clean the suction filter for the optional pressure lubrication system.

MAINTENANCE - Rear Axle and Suspension

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 287

5

Steering System

WARNING

DO NOT operate the vehicle if the steering system is not working proper- ly. You could lose control of your vehi- cle if the steering system is not in good working condition, which could result in a serious accident. For driving safe- ty, visually check the steering gear and components. Frequent checks are im- portant for driving safety, especially af- ter traveling over rough roads. Failure to comply may result in personal injury, property damage, or death.

WARNING

If this chassis is equipped with an electronic stability system (ESC) and any part of the steering system (e.g., linkage, steering driveline, column, front end alignment, etc) is repaired, removed, or disassembled in any way, or if the steering angle sensor is re- placed, the steering angle sensor must

be recalibrated. Any repairs or adjust- ments to any part of the steering sys- tem must be performed by an author- ized dealer. Failure to comply may re- sult in personal injury, property dam- age, or death.

Hydraulic fluid (under low pressure) provides the power to operate the steering gear. It also serves to lubricate moving parts and remove heat. A loss of steering efficiency will occur if too much heat builds up in the system. If the steering feels unbalanced from side- to-side while turning, check for the following possible causes:

Unequal tire pressures Vehicle overloaded or unevenly

distributed load Wheels out of alignment Wheel bearings improperly

adjusted If you cannot correct the problem, check with an authorized dealer. Your vehicle is equipped with integral power steering. The system includes an engine-driven fluid pump, a fluid reservoir, the steering gear, and connecting hoses. Because of the hydraulic power assist, little effort is required to turn the steering wheel.

When no input is applied through the steering wheel, the steering gear will return to the neutral position. If, for any reason, the power assist system goes out, steering the vehicle is still possible but it will require much greater effort. Visually check the following parts:

Crosstube: Is it straight? Drag link tube clamp: Check for

looseness or interference Ball joints and steering U-joints:

Check for looseness Steering wheel for excessive free-

play. Check the simplest probable causes first: (A) unequal tire pressures; (B) loose cap nuts; (C) bent crosstube; or (D) lack of lubrication

If these checks do not reveal the problem, or if you correct them and still have a steering problem, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for evaluation.

MAINTENANCE - Steering System

288 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

Check Power Steering Fluid Level

CAUTION

When adding fluid, be sure to use fluid of the same type. While many fluids have the same description and intend- ed purpose, they should not be mixed due to incompatible additives. Mixing incompatible fluids may lead to equip- ment damage.

NOTE

Before removing reservoir cap, wipe the outside of the cap so that no dirt or debris falls into the reservoir.

Check the fluid level. Use the following procedure:

1. Park the vehicle on level ground and turn the engine off.

2. Open the hood. 3. Check the fluid level on the

reservoir.

Power Steering Reservoir

1

3 2

4

5

1. Cold 2. Hot 3. Full 4. Add

5. Fill cap

If you check the fluid with the engine and steering system COLD, the fluid level should be above the Add indicator level and should generally not exceed the middle point between the Add and Full level indicators.

If you check the fluid with the engine and steering system WARM, the fluid should NOT exceed the Full level indicator and should generally not drop below the middle point between the HOT Full and Add level indicators.

4. To add fluid, open the fill cap to the power steering reservoir and then add fluid until the fluid level is in the middle of the appropriate Minimum and Maximum level indicators.

5. Reinstall the reservoir fill cap and close the hood.

MAINTENANCE - Steering System

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 289

5

Steering Shaft Bolt Torque Specifications The steering (intermediate shaft) U-joint pinch bolt should be tightened on the first day or two of operation, then checked weekly (see Weekly Checks). The following are common torque specifications for most steering shafts.

Steering U-joint Pinch Bolt

Fastener Size Torque Spec. lb-ft (Nm)

7/16 -in. 37-43 (50-58)

Pitman Arm Clamp Bolt

Fastener Size Torque Spec. lb-ft (Nm)

3/4 -in. 300-320 (406-433)

WARNING

If this chassis is equipped with an Electronic Stability Control (ESC) and is modified (e.g. adding or removing an axle, converting from a truck to a tractor, converting from a tractor to a truck, changing the body, lengthening of the wheelbase and/or frame, relo- cating frame components, or modifying pneumatic or electrical ABS/ESC har- nesses) the ESC must be evaluated by a qualified technician. If you have any questions, contact your authorized dealer. Failure to comply may result in property damage, personal injury, or death.

Driveline See the driveshaft manufacturer's operator's manual for lubrication specifications and service intervals.

WARNING

Improper lubrication of U-joints can cause them to fail prematurely. The driveshaft could separate from the ve- hicle and result in an accident. Make sure lubricant is purged at all four ends of each U-joint and loosen caps if nec- essary. Also, regularly inspect U-joints for excessive wear or movement, and repair or replace as necessary. Failure to comply may result in death, person- al injury, equipment or property dam- age.

Tires Your tires are a very important part of your vehicles whole braking system. How fast you can stop depends mostly on how much friction you get between the road and your tires. In addition, keeping your tires in good condition is essential to the safe, efficient operation of your vehicle. Regular, frequent inspection and the right care will give you the assurance of safe and reliable tire

MAINTENANCE - Driveline

290 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

operation. Here are some tips on maintaining your tires.

Proper Over Under

TREAD CONTACT WITH ROAD

WARNING

DO NOT repair damaged tires unless you are fully qualified and equipped to do so. Wheel and tire assemblies can- not be worked on without proper tools and equipment, such as: safety cages or restraining devices. Have all tire re- pairs performed by an expert. Stand away from the tire assembly while the expert is working. Failure to do this may result in death or injury.

Checking Inflation Pressure Low pressure is a tires worst enemy. Underinflation allows tires to flex improperly, causing high temperatures to build up. Heat causes early tire damage

such as flex break, radial cracks, and ply separation. Low pressure may affect control of your vehicle, especially at the front wheels. Most tire wear problems are caused by underinflation as the result of slow leaks, so check tire pressure regularly. Lower tire pressure does not provide better traction on ice or snow. Give your tires a visual test every day, and check inflation with a gauge every week:

When checking tire pressure, inspect each tire for damage to sidewalls, cuts, cracks, uneven wear, rocks between duals, etc. If a tire appears underinflated, check for damage to the wheel assembly. Dont forget to check between dual wheels. If you find wheel damage, have an expert tire service repair it.

Maximum tire pressure will be indicated on the sidewall of a tire.

Check pressure only when the tires are cool. Warm or hot tires cause pressure buildup and will give you an inaccurate reading. So never deflate a warm tire to the specified pressure.

WARNING

DO NOT operate a vehicle with under- inflated tires. The extra heat caused by underinflation can cause sudden tire failure such as a tire fire or blow out, which can cause an accident resulting in death or personal injury. Low pres- sure may affect control at the front wheels, which could result in an acci- dent involving death or personal injury. Keep your tires inflated to the manu- facturer's recommended air pressure.

MAINTENANCE - Tires

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 291

5

WARNING

DO NOT attempt to raise the vehicle to remove or install a damaged tire and wheel assembly if you are not fully qualified and not equipped with the proper tools and equipment. DO NOT attempt to reinflate a tire that has been run flat. Obtain expert help. A person can be seriously injured or killed if us- ing the wrong service methods. Truck tires and wheels should be serviced only by trained personnel using proper equipment. Follow OSHA regulations per section 1910.177.

NOTE

Follow all warnings and cautions con- tained within the tire and wheel manu- facturers literature.

Overloaded Tires Overloading your truck is as damaging to your tires as underinflation. The following chart shows how neglect or deliberate abuse can affect the life of your tires.

Effects of Load and Pressure on Tire Life

Vehicle Load

Tire Pressure

Expected Total Tire Mileage

Normal Normal Normal

20% Over 20% Low 70%

40% Over 30% Low 50%

60% Over 35% Low 40%

80% Over 45% Low 30%

100% Over 55% Low 25%

Overinflated Tires Overinflating the tires reduces the tread contact area with the road surface, concentrating all of the vehicle weight on the center of the tread. This causes premature wear of the tire.

WARNING

Overinflated tires can cause accidents. They wear more quickly than properly inflated tires and are more subject to punctures, cracks, and other damage. They could fail and cause you to lose control of your vehicle resulting in an accident causing death or personal in- jury. Be sure all tires are inflated cor- rectly according to the manufacturer's recommendations.

Matching Tires Be sure to buy matched tires for your vehicle, especially on the rear axles. Mismatched tires can cause stress between axles and cause the temperature of your axle lubricant to get too hot. Matched tires will help your driveline last longer and will give you better tire mileage.

MAINTENANCE - Tires

292 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

WARNING

DO NOT mismatch tires, it can be dan- gerous. Never mix tires of different de- sign such as steel belted radials and bias ply tires, etc. Mixing tire types and sizes will adversely affect the road holding ability of both types of tires and can lead to loss of vehicle control and causing death or personal injury.

WARNING

DO NOT install regrooved or reinforce- ment repaired tires on steering axles. They could fail unexpectedly and cause you to lose control of your vehi- cle resulting in an accident causing death or personal injury.

Replacing Tires Front: Replace front tires when less than 4/32 -in. of tread remains. Check at three places equally spaced around the tire. Drive Axles or Trailers: Replace tires on drive axles or trailers when less than 2/32 - in. of tread depth remains in any major

groove. Check at three places equally spaced around the tire.

WARNING

DO NOT replace original equipment tires with load ratings less than the original tires. Doing so could lead to unintentional overloading of the tire, which could cause a failure resulting in loss of vehicle control and an accident. Failure to comply may result in death, personal injury, equipment or property damage.

NOTE

To prolong your tires' life and make them safer, have their radial and later- al run-out checked at your dealer. And of course you should have your tires balanced anytime you change a tire.

Tire Chains If you need tire chains, install them on both sides of each driving axle.

NOTE

To prolong your tires' life and make them safer, have their radial and later- al run-out checked at your dealer. And of course you should have your tires balanced anytime you change a tire.

Speed Restricted Tires

WARNING

This vehicle is equipped with speed re- stricted tires. Check each tires side- wall and/or tire manufacturer's data book for maximum rated speed. The vehicle should not be operated at speeds in excess of the maximum rat- ed speed. Failure to comply with these speed restrictions could cause sudden tire failure, which can result in property damage or personal injury.

MAINTENANCE - Tires

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 293

5

Greenhouse Gas Certified Tires

NOTE

The tires installed on this vehicle at the factory as original equipment are certi- fied for Greenhouse Gas and Fuel Effi- ciency regulations. Replacement tires must be of an equal or larger loaded drive tire size and an equal or lower rolling resistance level (TRRL or Crr). Consult with your tire supplier(s) for appropriate replacement tires.

In order to limit the rolling resistance of the tires and optimize fuel economy, the maintenance procedures specified by the tire manufacturer must be followed. Please see Vehicle Emissions Limited Express Warranty for warranty on greenhouse gas certified tires.

Wheels After the vehicle travels about 50 to 100 miles (80 to 160 km), wheel mountings seat in and will lose some initial torque. Check hub/wheel mountings after this initial period and retighten. Threads should

be clean and dry. Do not lubricate wheel nuts or studs.

WARNING

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts; improper torque readings will re- sult, which could cause improper wheel clamping and could lead to a wheel failure resulting in an accident. Failure to comply may result in death, personal injury, equipment or property damage.

Wheel Replacement with Disc Brake Option

WARNING

Use only the wheel brand, size and part number originally installed. Use of a different wheel brand or size could cause valve stem to interfere with a brake component which could lead to loss of vehicle control. Failure to com- ply may result in death, personal in- jury, equipment or property damage.

Vehicles equipped with front disc brakes are fitted with wheels designed specifically

for disc brake applications. If it ever becomes necessary to replace an original equipment wheel, the replacement wheel must be the same brand and size as the take-off wheel. On vehicles equipped with 22.5 in. disc wheels, installing the wrong replacement wheel could result in the wheel valve stem making contact with the disc brake assembly. When installing any replacement wheel, always inspect the tires/wheels to ensure there is adequate clearance between other vehicle components. With the hood open, check for clearance between the wheel and disc brake assembly. Use a hydraulic jack to raise the front of the vehicle off the ground to allow the wheel to spin freely. While rotating the wheel, check to ensure there is adequate clearance between the wheel and disc brake assembly.

MAINTENANCE - Wheels

294 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

WARNING

Improperly mounting and demounting tire and rim assemblies is dangerous. Failure to observe proper precautions could cause the tire rim assembly to burst explosively, causing death or personal injury. See the wheel manu- facturer's literature for the proper way to mount and demount your tires and rims. Follow their precautions exactly.

WARNING

Always ensure the hood hold open latch is engaged to keep the hood fully open any time anyone gets under the hood for any reason. Failure to do so may cause the hood to close uncon- trollably which may result in death or personal injury.

WARNING

Always support the vehicle with appro- priate safety stands if it is necessary to work underneath the vehicle. A jack is

not adequate for this purpose. Failure to comply may result in death, person- al injury, equipment or property dam- age.

Disc Wheels

WARNING

Use the correct components and tools when working on wheels. Grooves in the wheel disc or other damage to the disc can weaken the wheel and cause it to eventually come off. This could cause you to lose control of your vehi- cle, and may result in an accident. Failure to comply may result in proper- ty damage, personal injury, or death.

The end of the wheel wrench must be smooth. Burrs on the end of the wrench can tear grooves in the disc. These grooves may lead to cracks in the disc, and can cause it to fail.

Wheel Bearings Service the bearings, seals and oil. This interval may be different depending on the results of the regular inspection. 350,000 mi (560,000 km). For safe, reliable

operation and adequate service life, your wheel bearings must be adjusted properly at the recommended intervals. Contact your authorized dealer to make sure the wheel bearings are properly adjusted.

MAINTENANCE - Wheels

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 295

5

Tightening Wheel Cap Nuts

WARNING

Tighten wheel cap nuts properly. If they are not tightened properly, wheel nuts could eventually cause the wheel to become loose, to fail, and/or to come off while the vehicle is moving, possibly causing loss of control and may result in death, personal injury, equipment or property damage.

Hub Piloted Disc Wheels

Proper wheel torque can best be obtained on level ground. Install lug nuts and finger- tighten in the numerical sequence as shown below. This procedure will ensure that the wheel is drawn evenly against the hub. Contact an authorized dealer for information on the proper installation procedure for the wheels on your truck.

This is a job you may not be able to do yourself. You need the right torquing equipment to do it. Stud Piloted Disc Wheels

MAINTENANCE - Wheels

296 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

Windshield Wiper/Washer The windshield wiper system is designed to be maintenance-free. Check wiper blades annually, every 60,000 miles (96,000 km), or when they begin to show signs of wear. Check the washer reservoir water level daily, located in the engine compartment. If necessary, refill to the proper level.

How to Refill the Washer Fluid Reservoir

CAUTION

DO NOT use antifreeze or engine coolant in the windshield washer res- ervoir, damage to seals and other components will result.

1. Park the vehicle and apply the parking brakes.

2. Open the hood and secure it in the open position.

3. Locate the washer fluid reservoir located on the driver's side of the

engine compartment, on top of the radiator, and open the filler cap.

4. Fill the 2.0 Gallon (7.6 Liters) reservoir with windshield washer fluid and replace the cap.

5. Close and secure the hood.

Transmission Maintenance See the transmission manufacturer's operator's manual for lubrication specifications and service intervals.

CAUTION

When adding oil, types and brands of oil should not be intermixed because of possible incompatibility, which could decrease the effectiveness of the lubri- cation or cause component failure.

Vehicles configured with Eaton Automated or a PACCAR transmission must maintain the oil coalescing desiccant cartridge of the air dryer as part of transmission maintenance.

CAUTION

Replace oil-coalescing desiccant air dryer cartridge every 1 year regardless of mileage. Only use oil-coalescing desiccant replacement cartridge when replacing. Failure to perform this main- tenance task will void the PACCAR Transmission warranty and may result in expensive transmission damage.

Fuller Transmission Lubrication Fuller transmissions are designed so that the internal parts operate in a bath of oil circulated by the motion of gears and shafts. Grey iron parts have built-in channels where needed to help lubricate bearings and shafts. All parts will be amply lubricated if these procedures are closely followed:

1. Maintain oil level; check it regularly. 2. Change oil regularly. 3. Use the correct grade and type of

oil. 4. Buy oil from a reputable dealer.

MAINTENANCE - Windshield Wiper/Washer

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 297

5

Lubrication Change and Inspection Off-Highway Use Refer to the Eaton Fuller transmission manual for servicing information.

Highway Use Refer to the Eaton Fuller

transmission manual for servicing information.

Refer to the oil change vs. temperature chart that follows for special oil change information. The "intermittent peak temperature" is the maximum temperature observed for a short time in a fully loaded vehicle performing normally.

CAUTION

Exceeding the recommended oil change intervals may be harmful to the life of the transmission and the trans- mission oil cooler.

Allison Transmission Lubrication Refer to your transmission manual

(furnished separately) for lubrication information.

Refer to the Allison Transmission manual for servicing information.

Hydraulic Clutch The clutch pedal position is factory set and does not require adjustment.

Clutch Hydraulic Fluid

Visually inspect the clutch fluid from the reservoir. There are molded lines with the letters MIN to indicate minimum fluid level and MAX to indicate the maximum fluid level recommended for proper operation. Be sure to maintain the fluid between the MIN and MAX levels indicated on the plastic reservoir. If the fluid level repeatedly goes below the MIN line, then it is time to have your clutch adjusted or the hydraulic system inspected for service. To replace

MAINTENANCE - Hydraulic Clutch

298 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

the fluid, locate the drain fitting on the air solenoid mounted to the transmission housing. Open this fitting and allow fluid to drain out of the system. Once all the fluid is drained out, close the fitting and fill the system through the master cylinder reservoir in the engine compartment. Once the system is full, then purge the system of air by simultaneously pressing on the pedal and opening the fitting to allow air to escape. Close the fitting when fluid starts coming out. Then refill the reservoir. Repeat this until all air has been purged from the system. Replace with the recommended fluid per Lubrication Specification Chart on page 301.

Clutch Adjustment Some clutches are self-adjusting, however; there are manually adjusted clutches that will require the operator to know when to adjust the clutch. The clutch will need adjustment when your clutch pedal stroke seems to get longer and its effectiveness at a seamless shift becomes less. Another sign of the clutch needing adjustment is the level of the fluid in the reservoir. If the hydraulic fluid is not leaking, but the fluid level is getting lower, then the clutch may need to be adjusted. Please take the vehicle to an authorized dealership to have the clutch adjusted. See the clutch

manufacturer's Service Manual for the proper adjustment procedures.

Specification Reference Charts

Pipe and Hose Clamp Torque Values Torque specifications for engine parts.

Application Type of Clamp lb-in. Nm

Radiator and Heat Exchanger Hoses

Constant Torque CT-L 90-110 10.2-12.5

Heater Hoses Constant Tension not required not required

Air Intake Pipes Hi Torque HTM-L 100-125 11.3-14.2

Plastic Air Intake Pipes Constant Torque CT-L 88 10.0

Charge Air Intake Hoses Flex Seal 70-100 7.9-11.3

B9296 50-60 6-7

MAINTENANCE - Specification Reference Charts

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 299

5

Application Type of Clamp lb-in. Nm

Fuel, Oil and Water Heat Exchangers (for hoses less than 9/16 in. diameter).

Miniature 3600L 10-15 1.1-1.7

Wheel Cap Nut Torque Specifications At the first scheduled lube interval, have all wheel cap nuts torqued to their specified

value. After that, check wheel cap nuts at least once a week. Contact an authorized dealer for information on the proper installation procedure for the wheels on your truck.

This is a job you may not be able to do yourself. You need the right torquing equipment to do it.

Wheel and Nut Configuration Stud Size Torque for Two Piece Flanged Cap Nuts

lb-ft Nm

Hub-Piloted Disc-Type Wheel w/Two Piece Flanged Cap Nuts: Steel or Aluminum Wheel PHP-10; Budd Uni-Mount-10; WDH-8

M22-1.5 450-500 610-680

Stud Backnuts (when used) 3/4-16 175-200 240-270

1-14 175-300 240-410

Cast Spoke Wheel Assembly Rim Clamp Nut Torque

1/2 in. Dia. 80-90 110-120

5/8 in. Dia. 160-185 220-250

3/4 in. Dia. 225-245 305-335

MAINTENANCE - Specification Reference Charts

300 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

Lubrication Specification Chart

NOTE

The responsibility for meeting these specifications, the quality of the prod- uct, and its performance in service rests with the lubricant supplier.

*Consult manufacturer or lubricant supplier for special details.

Lubricant Symbol Key

Type Application

ATF MD3 or MERCON-approved automatic transmission fluid

BB High temperature ball bearing grease. Chevron SRI Mobile Grease HP, Texaco Multifax 2

CB Engine oil for mild to moderate requirements

CC/CD Engine oil for severe requirements (MIL-L-2104B /MIL-L-45199B) w/ 1.85 % max. sulfated ash

CD Engine oil meeting API Five engine test sequence

CD50 SAE 50W synthetic transmission fluid

CE Engine oil meeting severe duty service requirements for direct-injection turbocharged

CK-4/ CJ-4

Engine oil for PACCAR MX and Cummins EGR engines

CL Multipurpose chassis grease

MAINTENANCE - Specification Reference Charts

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 301

5

Type Application

EP Extreme Pressure Lubricant (Lithium 12-hydroxystearate base NLGI 2)

GL Straight mineral gear lubricant

HD Hypoid Gear Oil, A.P.I. - GL-5, SAE 75W-90FE synthetic gear lubricant

HT High Temperature grease (Timken Spec. 0-616)

MP Multipurpose gear lubricant (MIL-L-2105B)

DOT3 Brake Fluid

Component Lubrication Index

Application Type

Steering Column CL

Alternator Bearing BB (1)

Fan Hub BB (1)

Power Steering Reservoir ATF

Steering Drag Link CL

Steering Knuckles CL

Spring Pins CL

MAINTENANCE - Specification Reference Charts

302 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

Application Type

Clutch Release Bearings BB

Brake Shoe Anchor Pins HT

Brake Cam Bearings HT

Slack Adjusters CL

Starter Bearings CC

Turbocharger Aneroid CC

Water Pump BB (1)

Suspension Fittings (other than threaded pins and bushings) EP

Steering Axle: Grease Fittings on Steering Arm; Tie Rod Ends; Drag Link; King Pins

EP

Steering Shaft Grease Fittings EP

Brake Treadle Hinge and Roller Engine oil

Lock Cylinders Lock lubricant

Door Hinges Do not lubricate

Door Latches and Striker Plates Polyethylene grease stick

Door Weatherstrip Silicone lubricant

MAINTENANCE - Specification Reference Charts

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 303

5

Application Type

Hub-piloted Aluminum Wheels Coat the wheel pilot or hub pads with Freylube #3 lubricant (light colored) or Chevron Zinc lube. Do not get lubricant on the face of the wheel or the hub.

Manual Transmission Hydraulic Clutch DOT3 (Brake Fluid)

(1) Consult manufacturer or lubricant supplier for special details.

Frame Fastener Torque Requirements

CAUTION

Incorrectly tightening the fasteners may result in failure of the fastener or incor- rect clamp loads. Fastener failure may lead to frame failure. Failure to comply may result in equipment or property damage.

Use a torque wrench for final tightening of these fasteners. Due to the coating on the threads of these bolts, be aware that if an impact gun is used to tighten the fasteners, they may over-torque and break.

When torquing, the nut must ro- tate slightly before achieving the torque value. If the nut does not rotate, the fastener is over-tor- qued and should be replaced.

To achieve correct clamp loads, the frame fasteners must be tor- qued with the nut. The intended clamp load may not be achieved if the nut is held and torque is applied to the bolt.

Where Nylon lock-nuts (AKA, "ESNA" or "nyloc") are indicated in the following tables

NOTE

The torque values and instructions found in the following section apply ONLY to Nylon locknuts (right image). They do NOT apply to the all-metal lock-nut type (left image).

MAINTENANCE - Specification Reference Charts

304 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

Use only lock-nut with nylon insert. Lubricate nylon insert nut lightly

with SAE 20W or 30W oil. Tighten all frame fasteners with a

torque wrench.

NOTE

The following values are applicable to fasteners on the FRAME and DO NOT APPLY to u-bolts for the suspension.

Standard Grade 8 UNF or UNC Nylon Lock-Nuts

Tightening Specification lb-ft (Nm)

Fastener Size (-in.)

16-22 (22-30) 5/16

30-40 (41-54) 3/8

55-65 (75-88) 7/16

80-90 (109-122) 1/2

115-140 (156-190) 9/16

165-195 (224-265) 5/8

290-340 (394-462) 3/4

380-460 (517-626) 7/8

700-830 (952-1,129) 1

990-1,170 (1,346- 1,591)

1-1/8

1,380-1,630 (1,877- 2,217)

1-1/4

Metric Fastener Size (with NYLON insert nuts)

Tightening Specification lb-ft (Nm)

M5 6-9 (8-12)

M6 7-11 (9-15)

M8 17-23 (23-31)

Where fasteners with all-metal lock- nuts are indicated in the following table

NOTE

The torque values and instructions with the following table apply ONLY to all-metal lock nuts (left image) but do NOT apply to Nylon lock-nuts (right im- age).

MAINTENANCE - Specification Reference Charts

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 305

5

Do NOT lubricate all-metal lock- nuts.

Bolts and washers can be reused, but nuts can only be reused once. If in doubt, install new nuts.

If a bolt must be replaced the nut installed on it must also be replaced.

Fasteners must be torqued from the nut to achieve correct clamp load.

Metric Fastener Size (with all METAL Lock- nuts)

Tightening Specification lb-ft (Nm)

M10 29-41 (39.4-55.6)

M12 51-69 (69.1-93.5)

M16 125-165 (169.5-223.7)

M20 230-300 (311.8-406.8)

Suspension U-Bolts, Grade 8 Tighten all U-bolts with a torque wrench. Torque requirements in the table below apply to PACCAR proprietary suspensions using Protec Torque/TEXO coated U-bolts, only. For all other suspensions, follow the manufacturer's recommended torque values. PACCAR proprietary suspension u- bolts must be tightened in a specific sequence. Take your vehicle to an

authorized dealer to tighten the U-bolts on your vehicle.

Torque for Grade 8 U-Bolts

Peterbilt Front Suspension U-bolts

U-Bolt Size Diameter (-

in.)

Torque (lb- ft)

Torque (Nm)

3/4 260-290 353-393

7/8 370-415 502-563

For all non-PACCAR suspension systems, see the manufacturers

operators manual for torque specifications.

MAINTENANCE - Specification Reference Charts

306 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

Peterbilt Rear Suspension U-bolts

Rear Suspensio

n Type

U-Bolt Diamet

er

Torque lb-ft (Nm)22

Low Air Leaf (U-bolt,

spring)

M22 x 1.5

375475 (508 644)

Flex Air M22 x 1.5

325375 (440 508)

Tandem Low Air

Leaf

M22 x 1.5

375475 (508 644)

Air Leaf (U- bolt, spring)

1.0 -in. NF

450550 (610 746)

Air-Trac 1.0 -in. NF

450550 (610 746)

13.5K Taper Leaf (Axle

U-bolt)

-in. 16 UNF

275320 (373 434)

Peterbilt Rear Suspension U-bolts

Rear Suspensio

n Type

U-Bolt Diamet

er

Torque lb-ft (Nm)

18K Taper Leaf (Axle

U-bolt)

-in. 16 UNF

275320 (373 434)

18K Air Leaf (Axle U-

bolt)

-in. 16 UNF

275320 (373 434)

For all non-PACCAR suspension systems, see the manufacturers

operators manual for torque specifications.

NOTE

The values shown here are for sus- pension U-bolts and should not be ap-

plied to bolts and fasteners for the frame.

Rear Suspension Fasteners Air-Trac Fastener Torque Values

Fastener Fastener Name lbft (Nm)

M16 Tracking rod bolts

155195 (210264)

0.75 NF Spring center bolt

165210 (224285)23

M16 0.75 NF

Radius rod bolts (forward)

155195 (210264)

Radius rod bolts (at axle)

250350 (339475)

22 Torques listed are for primed (or non-oiled) U-bolts. 23 Torque requirement applies at subassembly of airspring support and leaf spring only.

MAINTENANCE - Specification Reference Charts

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 307

5

Fastener Fastener Name lbft (Nm)

M16 Frame bracket bushing bolts

5065 (68 88)

1.0 NF U-bolt24 Refer to section on Suspension U-Bolts, Grade 8.

0.5 UNC Air bag stud nut

4050 (54 68)

M16 Tracking rod bolts

155195 (210264)

Low Air Leaf Torque Values Low Air Leaf Torque values apply to both single and tandem axles.

Fastener Fastener Name

Torque lbft (Nm)

M20 x 2.5 Bar pin bolts

325425 (441576)

M22 x 1.5 U-bolt, spring25

Refer to section on Suspension U-Bolts, Grade 8.

0.5 UNC Air bag stud nut

4050 (54 68)

M16 Tracking rod bolts

155195 (210264)

Flex Air Fastener Torque Values

Fastener Fastener Name

Torque lb-ft (Nm)

M16

Drive bracket - frame bolts

155195 (210264)

Drive bracket - link spring bolt

Drive bracket - radius rod bolt

Drive beam - shock bolt (lower)

Shock bracket - shock bolt (upper)

Tracking rod bolts (all)

24 See owners manual for torque tightening sequence.

MAINTENANCE - Specification Reference Charts

308 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

5

Fastener Fastener Name

Torque lb-ft (Nm)

M10 Air spring support beam bolts

3651 (49 69)

0.88 - 14 UNF

Drive beam - link spring bolt

380460 (515624)

0.88 - 14 UNF

Radius rod bracket bolt

380460 (515624)

M22 x 1.5 U-bolt26 Refer to section on Suspension U-Bolts, Grade 8.

0.5 UNC Air bag stud nut

4050 (54 68)

Vehicle Light Bulb Specifications

Bulb Location

Type of Bulb

Notes

Low beam/DRL halogen

H11-LL, 12 volts, 55 Watts

(Long life version not required)

High beam halogen

HB3A-LL, 12 volts, 60 Watts

(Long life version not required)

Turn signal/ Parking/ Side-marker halogens27

4157NAK, 12 volts 28.5 Watts

N/A

LED Side markers

N/A LED

Rear tail lamps/turn signals

N/A LED

Interior map/ Dome/ Indirect light

N/A LED

25 Contact your dealer for torque tightening procedure. 26 Contact your dealer for torque tightening procedure. 27 Bulb provides all three lighting functions.

MAINTENANCE - Specification Reference Charts

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 309

5

Chapter 6 | INFORMATION Consumer Information.......................................................................................................................311 Vehicle Identification Labels.............................................................................................................. 311 Clean Idle..........................................................................................................................................314 Greenhouse Gas Certified Configuration..........................................................................................315 Vehicle Emissions Limited Express Warranty................................................................................... 318

INFORMATION -

310 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

6

Consumer Information How to Order Replacement Parts Replacement parts may be obtained from an authorized dealership. When you order, it is IMPORTANT that you have the following information ready:

Your name and address Serial number of the truck The name of the part you need The name and number of the

component for which the part is required

The quantity of parts you need How you want your order shipped

National Highway Traffic and Safety Administration (NHTSA) If you believe that your vehicle has a defect, which could cause a crash or could cause death or personal injury, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the vehicle manufacturer. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and

remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot get involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, and vehicle manufacturer. Contacting NHTSA is possible through telephone, written mail and email. NHTSA also has a website where you can input your comments directly to them on the web. Please use any of the four ways to contact NHTSA:

Toll Free 1-888-327-4236 (800-424-9153 TTY) 8:00 a.m. to 10:00 p.m. EST Monday-Friday

Office of Defects Investigations/CRD NVS-216 1200 New Jersey Ave. SE Washington, D.C. 20590

www.safercar.gov

email: nhtsa.webmaster@dot.gov

Transport Canada Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, Defect Investigations and Recalls, may telephone the toll free hotline 1-800-333-0510, or contact Transport Canada by mail at:

Transport Canada, ASFAD Place de Ville Tower C 330 Sparks St. Ottawa, ON K1A 0N5 For additional road safety information, please visit the Road Safety website at: http://www.tc.gc.ca

Vehicle Identification Labels Each vehicle completed by Peterbilt Motors Company uses a vehicle identification number (VIN) that contains the model year designation of your vehicle. The practice is in compliance with 49 CFR 565, Code of Federal Regulations. The full, 17-digit VIN is located on the Weight Rating Data Label. The label is located on the driver's side door edge or on the driver's side door frame.

INFORMATION - Consumer Information

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 311

6

Chassis Number The Chassis Number refers to the last six characters of the VIN. This number will allow your dealer to identify your vehicle. You will be asked for this number when you bring it in for service. Chassis Number Locations

Right frame rail, top flange, about 3 ft. from the front end

Back of cab, left-hand rear panel, lower edge

Tire, Rim, and Weight Rating Data label (truck)

Components and Weights label Noise Emission label Paint Identification label

Certification Labels Your vehicle information and specifications are documented on labels. As noted below, each label contains specific information pertaining to vehicle capacities and specifications that you should be aware of.

Components and Chassis Weight Label The Components and Chassis Weight Label is located on either the drivers side door edge or on the drivers side door frame. It includes chassis number, chassis weight and gross weight, plus model information for the vehicle, engine, transmission, and axles.

Tire, Rim and Weight Rating Data Label The Tire, Rim, and Weight Rating Data Label is located on the drivers side door

edge or on the drivers side door frame. It contains the following information:

GVWR - Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

GAWR FRONT, INTERMEDIATE and REAR - Gross Axle Weight Ratings for Front, Intermediate and Rear Axle

TIRE/RIM SIZES AND INFLATION PRESSURES - Tire/Rim Sizes and Cold Pressure Minimums

VIN including CHASSIS NUMBER. The components of your vehicle are designed to provide satisfactory service, if the vehicle is not loaded in excess of either the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR), or the maximum front and rear gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs).

WARNING

DO NOT exceed the specified load rat- ing. Overloading can result in loss of vehicle control, either by causing com- ponent failures or by affecting vehicle handling. Exceeding load ratings can also shorten the service life of the ve- hicle. Failure to comply may result in death or personal injury.

INFORMATION - Vehicle Identification Labels

312 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

6

NOTE

GVW is the TOTAL SCALE WEIGHT the vehicle is designed to carry. This includes the weight of the empty vehi- cle, loading platform, occupants, fuel, and any load.

Noise Emission Label The Noise Emission Label is located in the driver's side door frame. It contains information regarding U.S. noise emission regulations, chassis number, and date of manufacture.

Paint Identification Label The Paint Identification Label contains the paint colors used by the factory to paint your vehicle. It lists frame, wheels, cab interior and exterior colors. This label is located inside the glove box.

Federal Safety Standard Certification Label The NHTSA regulations require a label certifying compliance with Federal Safety Standards, for United States and U.S. Territories, be affixed to each motor vehicle and prescribe where such label may be located. This certification label, which

indicates the date of manufacture and other pertinent information, is located on the drivers side door edge or on the drivers side door frame.

Component Identification Each of the major components on your vehicle has an identification label or tag. For easy reference, record component numbers such as, model, serial, and assembly number.

Engine For further information, please refer to the Engine Operation and Maintenance Manual.

Transmission For both manual and automatic transmissions, the identification number is stamped on a tag affixed to the right rear side of the transmission case.

Clutch Enclosed in clutch housing. Location depends on manufacturer.

Steer Axle The front axle serial number is stamped on a plate located on the center of the axle beam.

Axle Specification Number Usually stamped on the right rear side of the axle housing. This number identifies the complete axle.

Axle Housing Number Usually located on the left forward side of the housing arm. This tag identifies the axle housing.

INFORMATION - Vehicle Identification Labels

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 313

6

Axle Differential Carrier Identification Usually located on the top side of the differential carrier. The following information is either stamped, or marked with a metal tag: Model No., Production Assembly No., Serial No., Gear Ratio, and Part Number.

Clean Idle To comply with CARB emissions requirements, your vehicle will either have the Certified Clean Idle label or an Engine Shutdown System (ESS). Some vehicles, however, are exempt from these requirements because of their configurations (for example: fire truck service). Your vehicle may have either of these labels affixed to the vehicle to identify that its engine meets the strict low exhaust emission regulations instituted by the state of California (and other states that have chosen to adopt CARB emissions requirements). Trucks with this type of engine will not require an Engine Shutdown System and will be allowed to idle continuously. It is important that you do not remove or deface this label. Do not block it from view. Please contact your authorized dealership if you need to replace this label. The dealership will be

able to help you to determine whether or not your vehicle's engine may be a candidate for a Certified Clean Idle label if it did not already have the label. If you have a PACCAR PX-7 or PX-9 engine, your label will look like the image below.

If you have a Cummins engine, your label will look like the image below.

Engine Shutdown System If the vehicles engine does not meet the low exhaust emission standard it will have an Engine Shutdown System (ESS) to meet limited idle regulations implemented by CARB and some additional states. These regulations require that the engine have an automatic system to restrict the idle time on certain vehicles. An Engine Shutdown System will shut down the engine after 5 minutes if the vehicle idles with the park brake set and the transmission in neutral or park. The ESS will also allow the vehicle 15 minutes of idle time if the driver does not set the park brake and shifts the transmission to neutral or park. The ESS, however, will not shut down the engine if the engine is operating in Power Take Off (PTO) mode, if the engine coolant is below 60 degrees Fahrenheit, or if the engine is performing a parked regeneration. The check engine light will alert you when the ESS shutdown timer reaches the last 30 seconds before the engine shuts down. The last 30 seconds prior to engine shutdown is the

INFORMATION - Clean Idle

314 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

6

only time the driver may reset the idle time by pressing on the accelerator. More detailed information may be available in the Engine Operators Manual provided with your vehicle.

Greenhouse Gas Certified Configuration This vehicle includes Greenhouse Gas (GHG) regulated parameters and technologies. A Vehicle Emission Control Information label is located on the drivers door with codes that partially identify the vehicles GHG certified configuration. In addition to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label, other technologies that reduce GHG emissions and regulated parameters included in the vehicles GHG certified configuration are described in this section.

NOTE

Modifying a vehicles certified configu- ration without good engineering judg- ment or PACCARs approval may be a violation of the Clean Air Act and sub-

ject to fines and penalties. Please con- tact the vehicle manufacturer for fur- ther information about this vehicles certified configuration.

Vehicle Emission Control Information Label Descriptions

Label Identifiers Label Identifier Descriptions

Family Name Describes the vehicles certified manufacturer, regulatory category, and regulatory subcategory

Emission Controls Describes regulated emission control devices installed on the vehicle

Compliance Statement

Describes the vehicles compliance standards

Regulatory Subcategory

Describes the vehicles certified

regulatory subcategory

Emission Controls

Emission Control Descriptions

ARF Aerodynamic roof fairing

ARFR Adjustable height aerodynamic roof fairing

ATS Aerodynamic side skit and/or fuel tank fairing

AFF Aerodynamic front fairing

AREF Aerodynamic rear fairing

TGR Gap reducing fairing

LRRA Low rolling resistance tires (all)

INFORMATION - Greenhouse Gas Certified Configuration

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 315

6

LRRD Low rolling resistance tires (drive)

LRRS Low rolling resistance tires (steer)

VSL Vehicle speed limiter

VSLS Soft-top vehicle speed limiter

VSLE Expiring vehicle speed limiter

VSLD Vehicle speed limiter with both soft-top and expiration

IRT Engine shutoff system

IRT5 Engine shutoff after 5 minutes or less of idling

IRTE Expiring engine shutoff

ADVH Vehicle includes advanced hybrid

technology components

ADVO Vehicle includes other advanced- technology components

INV Vehicle includes innovative (off- cycle) technology

ATI Automatic tire inflation system

TPMS Tire pressure monitoring system

GHG Regulated Technology Not On the Emission Control Information Label

Technology Compliance Requirements

Wheel-Related Weight Reduction

Wheel-related weight reduction benefits may be included in this vehicles certified

configuration. Changing aluminum wheels to a steel wheels may be a violation of the Clean Air Act and subject to fines and penalties.

Nonwheel-Related Weight Reduction

Nonwheel-related weight reduction benefits may be included in this vehicles certified configuration. Changing aluminum material to steel material may be a violation of the Clean Air Act and subject to fines and penalties.

INFORMATION - Greenhouse Gas Certified Configuration

316 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

6

Other Technologies This vehicle may be equipped with factory installed automatic engine shutdown (AES), neutral idle, start- stop systems, intelligent controls (Predictive Cruise Control and Neutral Coast), or extended idle reduction systems (Engine Idle Shutdown Timer, Engine Auto Start, Sleeper APUs, Fuel-Fire Sleeper Heater System). Disabling or modifying any GHG regulated technology may be a violation of the Clean Air Act and subject to fines and penalties.

GHG Regulated Powertrain Parameters Not On the Emission Control Information Label

Powertrain Components

Regulated Parameters

Engine Engine idle speed, torque, horsepower, and governed RPM

Transmission Lock up gear, number of gears, and torque converter

Axle Configuration and drive axle ratio

GHG Regulated Aerodynamic Performance The vehicle needs to stay in as-built aerodynamic performance unless good engineering judgment shows that the modification will improve safety or will not increase greenhouse gases.

GHG Regulated Certified Tires

NOTE

The tires installed on this vehicle at the factory as original equipment are certi- fied for Greenhouse Gas and Fuel Effi- ciency regulations. Replacement tires must be of an equal or larger loaded drive tire size and an equal or lower rolling resistance level (TRRL or Crr). Consult with your tire supplier(s) for appropriate replacement tires.

In order to limit the rolling resistance of the tires and optimize fuel economy, the maintenance procedures specified by the tire manufacturer must be followed. Please see Vehicle Emissions Limited Express Warranty for warranty on greenhouse gas certified tires.

GHG Regulated Air Conditioning Leakage Standards Loss of refrigerant from the air conditioning systems may not exceed a total leakage rate of 11.0 grams per year or a percent leakage rate of 1.50 percent per year, whichever is greater. This vehicle was built to meet this air conditioning leakage

INFORMATION - Greenhouse Gas Certified Configuration

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 317

6

standards. Any modification of the air conditioning system must comply with leakage rates defined in SAE J2727.

NOTE

Modifying a vehicles certified configu- ration without good engineering judg- ment or PACCARs approval may be a violation of the Clean Air Act and sub- ject to fines and penalties. Please con- tact the vehicle manufacturer for fur- ther information about this vehicles certified configuration.

Vehicle Emissions Limited Express Warranty Original Equipment Tires PACCAR Inc. warrants the tires installed as original equipment on this vehicle only against defects in materials and workmanship which cause the vehicle to fail to comply with applicable U.S. and Canadian greenhouse gas emission limits ("Warrantable Emissions Failures"). This vehicle emissions limited express warranty

relating to original equipment tires is valid for two (2) years or 24,000 miles (38,000 km), whichever occurs first. YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AGAINST PACCAR Inc. IS LIMITED TO THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF ORIGINAL EQUIPMENT TIRES, SUBJECT TO PACCARS TIME AND MILEAGE LIMITATIONS LISTED ABOVE. This Vehicle Emissions Limited Express Warranty relating to original equipment tires begins on the date of delivery of the vehicle to the first purchaser or lessee and accrued time and mileage is calculated when the vehicle is brought in for correction of the Warrantable Emissions Failures relating to the original equipment tires. PACCAR MAKES NO OTHER VEHICLE EMISSIONS WARRANTIES RELATING TO THE ORIGINAL EQUIPMENT TIRES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. WHERE PERMITTED BY LAW, PACCAR EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE RELATING TO VEHICLE EMISSIONS. PACCAR AND THE SELLING DEALER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO:

LOSS OF INCOME OR LOST PROFITS; VEHICLE DOWNTIME; COMMUNICATION EXPENSES; LODGING AND/OR MEAL EXPENSES; FINES; APPLICABLE TAXES OR BUSINESS COSTS OR LOSSES; ATTORNEYS FEES; AND ANY LIABILITY YOU MAY HAVE IN RESPECT TO ANY OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY RELATING TO WARRANTABLE EMISSIONS FAILURES. This Vehicle Emissions Limited Express Warranty relating to original equipment tires is limited to emissions compliance only. The tires are separately warranted by their manufacturer for defects in materials and workmanship other than those which cause non-compliance with U.S. and Canadian GHG regulations, subject to limitations and conditions contained within the tire manufacturers warranty agreement. You are responsible for the safe operation and maintenance of the vehicle and its tires. PACCAR does not warrant wear and tear of the tires.

Greenhouse Gas (GHG) Components Other Than Tires This GHG vehicle Warranty applies to the vehicle (hereafter, vehicle) certified with the US Environmental Protection Agency.

INFORMATION - Vehicle Emissions Limited Express Warranty

318 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

6

Your Warranty Rights and Obligations This vehicle is warranted for components that directly impact the manufacturers GHG certification with the US Environmental Protection Agency. PACCAR must warrant these components for the periods of time listed below provided there has been no abuse, neglect or improper maintenance of the vehicle. If a GHG-related part on your vehicle is found to have a defect in material or assembly, the part will be repaired or replaced by PACCAR.

Manufacturer's Warranty Coverage This warranty coverage is provided for five years or 100,000 miles (160,000 km), whichever occurs first, from the date of delivery of the vehicle to the first purchaser or first lessee. Where a Warrantable Condition exists, PACCAR will diagnose and repair the vehicle, parts and labor included, at no cost to the first purchaser or first lessee and each subsequent purchaser or lessee. This warranty does not override any extended warranty purchased to cover specific vehicle components.

Owner's Warranty Responsibilities The vehicle owner is responsible for performing required maintenance that is listed in your engine and vehicle Operators Manuals. The owner is responsible for presenting the vehicle to a service location as soon as a problem exists. Any warranty repairs should be completed in a reasonable amount of time. Retain all receipts covering maintenance on this equipment. PACCAR cannot deny warranty solely for the lack of receipts or for the failure to ensure the performance of all scheduled maintenance. PACCAR may deny warranty coverage if a vehicle component has failed due to abuse, neglect, improper maintenance, unapproved modifications (both physical components and computer programming) or using non-Original Equipment replacement parts. If there are any questions regarding these warranty rights and responsibilities, please contact the vehicle OEM manufacturer at the customer center telephone number provided with the vehicle operating instructions. Prior to the expiration of the applicable warranty, Owner must give notice of any warranted failure to an authorized PACCAR dealer and deliver the vehicle to such facility for repair. Owner is responsible for incidental

costs such as: communication expenses, meals, lodging incurred by Owner or employees of Owner as a result of a Warrantable Condition. Owner is responsible for downtime expenses, cargo damage, fines, all applicable taxes, all business costs, and other losses resulting from a Warrantable Condition. Owner is responsible for maintaining all emissions related engine and vehicle computer program settings in accordance with manufacturer specifications. This responsibility includes GHG specific settings that may not be altered before the GHG-related expiration mileage has been reached for each system. Owner is responsible for maintaining all physical parts related to GHG-regulations in the as- built configuration and in proper working order for the full regulatory useful life of 435,000 miles (700,000 km) or 10 years for Class 8 vehicles, 185,000 miles (300,000 km) or 10 years for Class 5-7.

Replacement Parts PACCAR recommends that any service parts used for maintenance, repair or replacement of GHG components be new or genuine approved rebuilt parts and assemblies. The use of non-genuine engine or vehicle replacement parts that

INFORMATION - Vehicle Emissions Limited Express Warranty

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 319

6

are not equivalent to the PACCAR engine or OEM vehicle manufacturers original part specification as built from the factory may impair the engine and vehicle emissions control system from working or functioning effectively, and may jeopardize your GHG warranty coverage. In addition, genuine vehicle or engine parts must be replaced with the same material and function as the part assembled on the vehicle from the factory. The owner may elect to have maintenance, replacement or repair of the emission control parts performed by a facility other than an authorized PACCAR dealer and may elect to use parts other than new or genuine approved rebuilt parts and assemblies for such maintenance, replacement or repair; however, the cost of such service or parts and subsequent failures resulting from such service or parts may not be fully warranted if the manufacturer determines that the replacement part is not of similar material and function as the OEM part assembled to the vehicle at the factory.

PACCAR Responsibilities The warranty coverage begins when the vehicle is delivered to the first purchaser or first lessee. Repairs and service performed by any authorized PACCAR dealer using

new or genuine approved rebuilt parts and assemblies will utilize replacement parts that are selected and installed to support the GHG compliance certification. PACCAR will repair parts found by PACCAR to be defective without charge for parts or labor (including diagnosis which results in determination that there has been a failure of a warranted part).

Warranty Limitations Sole and exclusive remedy against PACCAR and the Selling Dealer arising from the purchase and use of this vehicle is limited to the repair or replacement of "warrantable failures", for replacement parts that are similar in material and function to OEM specifications and subject to PACCARs time, mileage, and hour limitations of the greenhouse gas warranty. The maximum time, mileage and hour limitations of the warranty begin with the Date of Delivery to the first purchaser or first lessee. The accrued time, mileage, or hours is calculated when the vehicle is brought in for correction of warrantable failures. PACCAR is not responsible for failures or damage resulting from what PACCAR determines to be abuse, neglect or uncontrollable acts of nature, including, but not limited to: damage due to accident;

operation without adequate coolants or lubricants; overfueling; overspeeding; lack of maintenance of cooling, lubricating or intake systems; improper storage, starting, warm-up, run-in or shutdown practices; unauthorized modifications to the vehicle and its components. PACCAR is also not responsible for failures caused by incorrect oil, fuel or diesel exhaust fluid or by water, dirt or other contaminants in the fuel, oil or diesel exhaust fluid. Failure of replacement parts used in repairs due to the above non- warrantable conditions is not warrantable. This warranty is void if the vehicle is altered with parts that do not meet the material and functional specifications as manufactured from the factory. Any alterations to vehicle or engine computer settings will void GHG warranty and potentially cause the vehicle to become non-compliant with EPA Clean Air Act GHG regulations. Any alterations to GHG specific settings prior to the GHG related expiration mileage for each system will void GHG warranty and potentially cause the vehicle to become non-compliant with EPA Clean Air Act GHG regulations. This warranty is void if certain GHG components are not properly maintained and thus cannot perform to their designed capability. PACCAR is not responsible for

INFORMATION - Vehicle Emissions Limited Express Warranty

320 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21)

6

failures resulting from improper repair or the use of parts which are not genuine approved parts. PACCAR is not responsible for the material and labor costs of emission control parts and assemblies replaced during Scheduled Maintenance of the engine as specified in PACCAR Operators Manuals. THIS WARRANTY, TOGETHER WITH THE EXPRESS COMMERCIAL WARRANTIES ARE THE SOLE WARRANTIES MADE BY PACCAR IN REGARD TO THIS VEHICLE. THIS LIMITED GHG WARRANTY IS THE SOLE WARRANTY MADE BY PACCAR AND THE SELLING DEALER. EXCEPT FOR THE ABOVE LIMITED WARRANTY, PACCAR AND THE SELLING DEALER MAKE NO OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. PACCAR AND THE SELLING DEALER EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. PACCAR AND THE SELLING DEALER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO: LOSS OF INCOME OR LOST PROFITS; ENGINE OR VEHICLE DOWNTIME; THIRD PARTY DAMAGE, INCLUDING DAMAGE OR LOSS TO

OTHER ENGINES, VEHICLES OR PROPERTY, ATTACHMENTS, TRAILERS AND CARGO; LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PERSONAL CONTENTS; COMMUNICATION EXPENSES; LODGING AND/OR MEAL EXPENSES; FINES; APPLICABLE TAXES OR BUSINESS COSTS OR LOSSES; ATTORNEYS FEES; AND ANY LIABILITY YOU MAY HAVE IN RESPECT TO ANY OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY.

INFORMATION - Vehicle Emissions Limited Express Warranty

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 321

6

Index

A Active Cruise Control Set Following Distance 146 Active Warnings 64, 81 adaptive cruise control 135 Adaptive Cruise Control 145 Adaptive Cruise Control Notification, See ADAS Notification ADAS Camera Fault 84 ADAS Notification 68 Additives to Cooling System 250 Adjust Seat 23 Adjust Side Mirrors 113 Advanced ABS with Stability Control 163 Advanced Driver Assistance Systems (ADAS), See Driver Assistance Aiming Headlamps 257 Air Conditioner 114 Air Conditioner Sleeper 120 Air ConditionerDefrost Windshield 119 Air Disc Brakes 240 Air Dryer Maintenance 234 Air Filter Restriction Indicator 270 Air Gauges and Air Leaks 236 Air Intake 22 Air Intake System 268 Air Ride Height Data 176 Air Tanks 236 Air-Controlled Sliding Fifth Wheel 180 Air-Operated Kingpin Release, See How to Release the Kingpin from the Cab Air-Trac Fastener Torque ValueRear Suspension Fasteners 307 Alarm ClockSet alarm 123 Alarm ClockSet time 123 Alert Switch 120 Allison Transmission Lubrication 298 Altering the Electrical System 257 Alternator 262

Anti-Theft 76 Antilock Brake System 86 At first 15,000 mi / 24,000 km or at first PM 195 Auto Slack Adjuster 240 Automated Emergency Braking, See Collision Mitigation Automated transmission 158 Automatic Slack Adjuster Stroke Specification 241 Automatic time 72 Automatic Traction Control 164 Axle Temperature Gauge 92 Axle, Traction Control 84, 85, 161

See also ATC AxleAuxiliary 172 AxleDiff Lock 170 AxleDifferential Lock 170 AxleDual Range 170 AxlePusher Tag 172 AxleTwo Speed 170

B Back Button 63 Basic View 69 Batteries 258 Battery Voltage 66 Battery,Jump Start 46 Belt

Komfort Latch 30 Lap/Shoulder 28 Safety 26 Tether 29

Bendix AD-HF Series Air Dryer 235 Brake System 239 Brake, Park Brake 86

Index

Brake, ParkingManual release 49 Brakes, Antilock Brake System 86 Brakes, Low Air 86 Brakes, Trailer Antilock Brake System 86 Bulb Check 79 Bunk Ladder 14, 17, 18, 185

C Cab

How to Lock and Unlock the Doors 13 Cab Access 12 Cab Air Filter 246 Cab HVAC Fresh Air Filter Replacement 246 Cab Maintenance 241 Cab Structure, Doors and Hoods 247 Camera Obstruction Conditions 150 CAN bus 257 Care of Display Screens on the Dashboard 247 Check Engine Oil Level 264 Cleaning LCD Display Screens 247 Clock 66, 72 Collision Mitigation 147 Column Mounted Transmission Control 157, 158 Coolant fill 252 Coolant level 252 Cooling system maintenance 250 Cooling System Overheating 42 Cranking Battery Specification 260 cruise control 135 Cruise Control 143 Cruise ControlCancel 144 Cruise ControlChange Set Speed 144 Cruise ControlResume Set Speed 144 Cruise ControlSet Speed 143 Cruise ControlStandard 142

D Daily Checks 35 Dash Switch Tailer Hand Brake 161 Dashboard Display Screen 247 Dedicated Telltales 80 Deep Snow and Mud Switch 165 Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) 70 Diesel Exhaust Fluid tank maintenance 282 Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Warning Light 88 Differential, Inter-Axle Lock 87 Digital Display 76 Digital Gauges 70 Display 76 Display Launch 63 DNR 65 Door Mounted Mirror Controls 113 DPA, See Driver Performance Assistant DR, See Driver Rewards Drive Axle - Dana 285 Drive Axle - Meritor 286 Drive Axle SISU 287 Drive Axle Temperature Gauge 92 Driver Assistance

Object Detected Alert 146 Drum Brake Inspection 241 Dual Air System Function Test 234 Dual Range (Two-Speed) Rear Axle 170 Dump Truck, Body Up 87 Dump Truck, Gate 87 Dynamic Telltale 81

E Eaton/Dana Axle Lubrication 285 Effectiveness and Limitations 166 Electrical System 254 ELST 107 Emissions 141

Index

Emissions Engine Derate 90 Emissions, High Exhaust System Temperature 88 Emissions, Malfunction Indicator Lamp 88 Engine Aftertreatment System 141 Engine Brake 108, 111 Engine Brake Allison Automatic Transmission 111 Engine Brake Column Mounted Transmission Control 136, 137 Engine Brake indicator 135 Engine Brake Manual Transmission 111 Engine Brake PACCAR Transmission 136, 137 Engine Cooling Recommendations and Specifications 250 Engine Fan 267 Engine Hours 66 Engine is overheating 42 Engine Maintenance 264 Engine Mounting 271 Engine Start Module 46 Engine Wait-To-Start Lamp 89 Engine Warm Up 133 Engine, Check Engine 89 Engine, Engine Block Heater 89 Engine, Low Coolant Level 89 Engine, Overspeed Air Shutdown 89 Engine, Retarder (Brake) 89 Engine, Stop Engine 89 Enhanced View 69 ESM 46 Every 120,000 mi / 192,000 km / Annually 222 Every 15,000 mi / 24,000 km / Monthly 203 Every 240,000 mi / 384,000 km 227 Every 30,000 mi / 48,000 km 209 Every 300,000 mi / 480,000 km / 6,750 Hours / 3 Years 228 Every 500,000 mi / 800,000 km / 5 years 229 Every 60,000 mi / 96,000 km / 6 Months 213 Every 750,000 mi / 1,200,000 km/ 24,000 Hours / 8 years 229 Exhaust 141 Exhaust System 271 Exterior Lamp Self Test Switch 108 Exterior Lamps Self Test 107 Exterior Lights Self Test 107

F Fast Idle Control 91 Favorites View 71 Fifth Wheel 177, 179 Fifth Wheel Bi-Annual Maintenance 272 Fifth Wheel Locked IndicatorFifth Wheel 90 Fifth Wheel Monthly Maintenance 272 Fifth Wheel Slide, See How to Slide the Fifth Wheel Fifth Wheel Slide Switch 100 Fifth Wheel Slide Unlocked 90 Fifth Wheel Unlocked IndicatorFifth Wheel 91 Filling Washer Fluid, See How to Refill the Washer Fluid Reservoir Final Chassis Bill of Material 12 Final Stopping Procedures 186 Flashing Headlamps, Aftertreatment Warning 141 Flex Air Fastener Torque ValueRear Suspension Fasteners 308 Frame 271 Frame Fastener Torque Requirements, Nyloc, ESNA, Lock-Nuts 304 Front axle and Suspension 273 Front Suspension U-Bolts, Grade 8 306 Fuel Level 70 Fuel System 273 Fuel Tank 273 Fuller Transmission Lubrication 297 Fuse box label 257 FuseInspect and replace 44 FuseLocation 46

G General Safety Instructions 7 Greenhouse Gas Certified Configuration 315 Greenhouse Gas Certified Tires 294

H Hand Brake Trailer 161

Index

HDB, See Highway Departure Braking Heater and Air Conditioner Maintenance 276 Heating and Air Conditioning 114 High Beam 110 High Beam Flash 110 Highway Departure Braking 151 Horn 113 Horn honking, Aftertreatment Warning 141 How to Add Coolant to the Cooling System 253 How to Adjust Mirrors 113 How to Change a Headlight Bulb, See How to Replace a Headlight Bulb How to Check the Compressed Air System for Leaks 237 How to inspect brake pads on disc brakes 240 How to Prepare the Axles for Towing 52 How to Recover a VehicleTowing 48 How to Refill the Washer Fluid Reservoir 297 How to Replace Air Conditioner Filter 278 How to Replace the Engine Air filter 268 How to Use the ELST Switch 108 How to Wash the Exterior of the Vehicle 244 HVAC 114 HVAC Air Filter 246 Hydraulic Clutch 298

I Ice 56 Illustrations 7 In Cab Battery Access 260 Inside/Outside Engine Air Intake 99, 133 Inspect Disc Brake Caliper for Running Clearance 240 Inspecting Noise and Emission Components 280 Install Engine Belt 266 Installing Batteries 261 Instrument Cluster 60

K Key Fob 263

Keyless Entry 263

L Lamp Self Test 107 Lamp Test 107 Lamps, Headlamps Flashing, Aftertreatment Warning 141 Lane Departure 150 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) 91 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) Disable 101 Lane Departure Warning Fault 91 Lane Departure Warning Mute, See Lane Departure Warning Disable Lane Keeping Assist Mute, See Lane Departure Warning Disable Language

English 72 French 72 Spanish 72

LDW 150 Light Self Test 107 Lights Marker Clearance 110 Lights, High Beam 91 Locking the Fifth Wheel, See How to Lock the Kingpin Low Air Alarm 41 Low Air Leaf Fastener Torque ValueRear Suspension Fasteners 308 Low Oil Pressure Lamp 42 Lubricants 230 Lubrication Specification Chart 301 LVD, See Low Voltage Disconnect

M Maintenance Manuals 11 Maintenance Schedule 194 Manifold Pressure Gauge 92 Manual Kingpin ReleaseFifth Wheel Operation 179 Manually lock a differential 53 MAX Mode 137 Menu 72

Index

Meritor Axle Lubrication 286 Metric Units 72 minimized view 2 66 Mirror Controls 113 Mirror Passenger Side 'down' Mirror 128 Mirror switch 113 Mud 56

N New Vehicle Maintenance Schedule 191 New Vehicle Maintenance Schedule: First 2,000 mi / 3,218 km 192 New Vehicle Maintenance Schedule: First 50-100 mi / 80-160 km 192 New Vehicle Maintenance Schedule: First 500 mi / 800 km 192 New Vehicle Maintenance Schedule: First Day 191 New Vehicle Maintenance Schedule:First 3,000-5,000 mi / 4800-8000 km 193 Noise and Emission Control 279 Noise Control System - Maintenance Log 281 Notifications 72

O Odometer 66 Off-Road ABS Function Switch (Optional) 165 Oil Level 231 Outside Air Temperature 64 Overflow tank 252

P PACCAR 20k Front Axle Lubrication 275 PACCAR AMT 158 PACCAR AMT Shifting gears 157 PACCAR Shifter 108 PCC 148 Pipe and Hose Clamp Torque Values 266, 299 power distribution box 257 Power Steering Fluid 289

Power Take Off 138 Pre-Trip Inspection 32 Predictive Cruise Control 148 Predictive Cruise Control Behavior 148 Predictive Cruise Control Controls 149 Predictive Cruise Control Interrupt 149 Predictive Cruise Control Set Undershoot 150 Predictive Cruise Control Software Information 149 Predictive Cruise Control Troubleshooting 149 Predictive Cruise Overshoot 72 Prepare the Axles for Towing 52 Program Key Fobs 263 PTO 138 PTO indicator 135

R Radiator Hoses 252 Rear Axle Alignment 284 Rear Axle and Suspension 282 Rear Axle Lubrication 284 Rear Suspension U-Bolts, Grade 8 306 Recovery Hitch 51 Recovery hitch capacities 54 Recovery hitch How to use tow pin 52 Recovery hitchBest practices 55 Recovery hitchPrepare axles 52 Refrigerator 91 Release KingpinFifth Wheel Operation 179 Releasing the Kingpin, See How to Release the Kingpin from the Cab Remote Keyless Entry 263 Remove Optional Solenoid on Air Filter Housing 269 Removing Batteries 260 Repairs 11 Replace Battery Box Cover 261 Replace HVAC Air Filter 246 Replace the Recirculation Air Filter 278 Returning to Service after Recovering 55 Roadside Assistance 41 Roll Stability 163

Index

Roll Stability Example 163

S Safety 6 Safety Alerts 6 Safety Restraint System - Inspection 247 Sand 56 Scroll Wheel 62 Seat

Komfort Latch 30 Lap/Shoulder Belt 28 Safety Restraint Belts 26 Tether Belts 29

Seat Belt Fasten 91 Set Shut Down Timer 140 Settings 72 Shortcuts 76 Shut Down Timer 73 Sleeper control panel 119 Sleeper HVAC Air Filter 279 Sliding Fifth Wheels 273 Sliding the Fifth Wheel, See How to Slide the Fifth Wheel Slow Battery Charging 262 Snow 56 Specific Cruise Indicator 87 Speed Sign Recognition 152 Speedometer 66 Stability Control 84, 85 Standard Units 72 Steering Shaft Bolt Torque Specifications 290 Steering System 288 Steering Wheel Controls 112 Steering Wheel Pod Use 62 Stop Engine Light 42 Stopping Procedures 186 Sub-trip Odometer 65 Suppressing Popups 81 Surge tank 252 Suspension U-Bolts 306

Systems Check 37

T Tachometer 66, 184 Testing Exterior Lamps 107 Tilt Telescope 108 Time 72 Tire Inflation 91, 290 Tire Pressure Monitoring System 37 Tires 290 Topping Up the Engine Oil 265 Tow Pin 51 Towing Doubles Or Triples May Reduce The Effectiveness Of Stability Systems 167 Towing the Vehicle 56 TPMS 37 Traction Control 104 Trailer Hand Brake 98, 161 Trailer Hand Brake Dash Switch 161 Transmission Gear Display 66 Transmission, Automated 155 Transmission, Auxiliary 92 Transmission, Check 92 TransmissionMaintenance 297 Trip Odometer 65 Trip Summary 72 Truck Information 77 Turbocharger 268 Turn Signal 108, 110 Turn Signal, Left 92 Turn Signal, Right 92

U Under Cab Battery Access 260 Under hood air filter housing 22, 268 Under Hood Air Intake Symbol 99, 133 Under Hood Intake 99, 133 Unlock Fifth Wheel, See How to Release the Kingpin from the Cab

Index

Unlocking the Fifth WheelFifth Wheel Operation 179

V Variable Road Speed Limiter 144 Variable Speed LimiterHow to Set the Variable Speed Limiter 144 Vehicle Emissions Limited Express Warranty 318 Vehicle ID Labels 311 Vehicle is stuck 56 Vehicle Light Bulb Specifications 309 Vehicle Loading 34 View Indicator 65 Visual inspection while approaching the vehicle 34

W Warm Up, Engine 133 Warning Icons 81 Washer Fluid, See How to Refill the Washer Fluid Reservoir Weekly Checks 36 What is an Air Compressor 238 What is the Air System 232 What to do before starting the vehicle 32 Wheel Cap Nut Torque Specifications 300 Wheels 294 Windsheild Wiper Interlock 73 Windshield Washer 109 Windshield Washer Fluid, See How to Refill the Washer Fluid Reservoir Windshield Wiper 109 Windshield Wiper/Washer 297

Y Yaw Control 164 Yaw Control Example 164 Yaw Stability 163

Index

P E T E R B I L T M O T O R S C O M P A N Y

Printed in the U.S.A. 01/21

Do not remove the manual from vehicle.

Before operating vehicle study the manual carefully.

Read and understand all warnings, cautions and notes.

Need help? Give us a call 24 hours a day

1.800.4.PETERBILT

Y53-6126-1A

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the Model 567 Peterbilt works, you can view and download the Peterbilt Model 567 Operator's Manual v2 on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Operator's Manual for Peterbilt Model 567 as well as other Peterbilt manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Operator's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Peterbilt Model 567. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Peterbilt Model 567 Operator's Manual v2 is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Peterbilt Model 567 Operator's Manual v2 consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Peterbilt Model 567 Operator's Manual v2 free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Peterbilt Model 567 Operator's Manual v2, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Peterbilt Model 567 Operator's Manual v2 as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.